GIAO AN TIENG ANH 6QUANG HUYUNG HOA HA TAY

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.39 MB, 474 trang )

(1)SỞ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO SƠN LA TRƯỜNG PTDT NỘI TRÚ SÔNG MÃ. GIÁO ÁN LỚP 6. Môn: Tiếng Anh Họ và tên: NGUYỄN HỒNG TRANG Năm học 2011 – 2012. 1.

(2) Date of preparing: 13/8/2010 PERIOD 1. Date of teaching:16/8/2010 class 6A 16/8/2010 class 6B. HƯỚNG DẪN CÁCH HỌC. 1. OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to know the subject and the way to study English. b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss to know to use language accurately. 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: student’s book b. Students: student’s book. 3. PROCEDURE Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (Optional) To know English 6 we study lesson today. (1') b. Teaching the new lesson * Warm up(4') T asks ss: Who’s absent today ? *Introduction:(25') T: calls students to go to the board to write the letters in Vietnamese.. Student’s activities. Ss: write . T: gets ss to read alphabet in English. T: introduces & guides ss to how learn E.. Ss: read in chorus & single.. T: gets ss read .. Ss: listen & write some new words .. T: introduces some words abbreviations Ss: read in chorus & single . T: asks ss to read . Ss: listen & write . 2.

(3) T: corrects mistake . Ss: read in chorus & single .. * Production (10') T:Introduces to play game & gets ss to play game “Matching’’.. 1 .Vocabulary New word (n): Structure (n) Dialogue(n) Adverb(n) Adjectives(n) Verb(n) Conjunction(n) Noun(n) Preposition(n) * Play game. Ss:listen & play. A Adjective Verb Noun Conjunction Adverb Preposition. c. Consolidation(3') - Repeat the content of the lesson.. B danh từ liên từ trạng từ giới từ tính từ động từ. d. Guide the homework (2') - Learn by heart words of lesson - Guide ss prepare next lesson “Unit1 A 1,2,3,4”./.. ____________________________________________ Date of preparing: 13/8/2010. PERIOD 2. Date of teaching: 16/8/2010 class 6B 17/8/2010 class 6A. UNIT 1 : GREETINGS LESSON 1: A. HELLO (1,2,3,4). 3.

(4) 1. OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to greet and introduce myself . + Structures: My name is....... I am........ + Vocabulary: Hi(n) l ời chào Hello(n) l ời chào name (n) tên b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately. 2.TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Student’s & teacher’s books, workbook b.Students: Student’s & workbooks, prepare lesson 3. PROCEDURE Teacher’s activities a.Checking the previous lesson (Optional) *To greet and introduce yourself (with friedly way) we study lesson today.(1') b. Teaching the new lesson * Warm up(4') - Organization Who’s absent today? - Introduction T: asks ss look at in the picture on page 10 (?) What are they doing ? * Presentation.(20') T: reads part A1 & introduces way to greet. T: explains 2 ways to greet “ hi,hello”.. Student’s activities. Ss:answer . 1. Listen and repeat. Ss:listen . Ss:listen & write . * New words - hello(v) Chào - hi (v) Xin chào - Là 2 cách chào thân mật “ hi” là câu thân mật hơn thường dùng khi. 4.

(5) T:gets ss to look at part 2 & practice in pairs . T: calls some pairs to practice .. gặp bạn bè thân thiết cùng trang lứa 2. Practice.. T:corrects mistakes .. Ss practice in pairs. Ss: practice in pairs in front of class . a. A: Hello, Lan. B: Hello, Hoa. …………… b. A: Hi, Nhi. B: Hi, Ba. ……………. 3. Listen and repeat.. T asks ss: ? Do you know what my name is? T: introduces the name in 2 ways. My name is Trang . I'm Trang.. Ss: answer.. T:looks at in the picture A3 .. Ss: write structure & new word then read . *Introduce the name of myself + I am ..... I’m ….. Ex: I am Lan = I’m Lan + My name is ......... My name’s …… Ex: My name is Ba. T:gets ss read .. Name (n) : tên. T:calls some ss to introduce the name of Ss: look at . themselves. Ss:read in chour &single. T:corrects mistakes . *Practice(10') T: asks ss to repeat the ways to greet people & introduce their name. Ss:introduce . 4. Practice with a group. 5.

(6) T: asks ss to practice in pairs. Ss: repeat . T: corrects mistakes . * Production(5') T:gives a situation “one new s comes in class & one old s greets &introduces name . Ss:practice . T: calls some pairs to practice in front of class. a. I am …… P1: I am Lan. …………. b. My name is …….. P1: My name is Ba ………………. Ss:practice in pairs . T calls some pairs to check.. P1: Hello, I am Lan. P2: Hi, Myname is Ba. ……………………. c. Consolidation.(3') - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework.(2') - Learn by heart the newwords & structures - Do exercise 1,2 - 4 in the workbook - Prepare next lesson A 5,6, 7, 8.. ___________________________________. Date of preparing: 14/8/2010. PERIOD 3. Date of teaching: 17/8/2010 class 6B 19/8/2010 class 6A. UNIT 1: GREETING LESSON 2: A. HELLO (5,6,7). 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to greet people, ask how people are &to love & say thanks. 6.

(7) + Structures : How are you? I’m fine, thanks. + Vocabulary: thank(n):lời cảm ơn Miss(n):cô Fine(adj):khoẻ b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5') - Form: oral Question:T asks ss to greet & Introduce their name in two ways. - T: corrects and gives marks for Ss.. Student’s activities. Hello/ Hi, I’m Nga Hello/ Hi.My name is Hoa. *To ask & answer about health and say thank you , we study lesson today(1') * Warm – up(4') -T asks ss: Khi gặp bạn em chào hỏi thế nào? Ss answer. Khi ai đó hỏi em về sức khoẻ em trả lời thế nào? b. Teaching the new lesson. *Presentation(10') T: gets ss to look at the picture A5-12 & introduces the situation of the dialogue between Ba & Lan through the picture ? What can you see in the picture ? ?Who are they ? ?What are they doing ?. 7. 5. Listen and repeat..

(8) T:They are greeting & asking about the Ss: look at & answer . health ? What will they say these in E? What should we say when others ask about our health. The best way is to say thanks. That is the title of this lesson “ thanks’’ T: reads the dialogue once and introduces the new words &structure. * New words. - thanks(n):- cảm ơn fine (adj) :khoẻ , tốt Ex: How are you? I’m fine, thanks. Ss: read and write.. T: corrects mistake . T: calls some ss to practice in pairs . T: corrects mistakes . T: reads the dialogue in A5.. Ss: practice .. T:calls some to practice in pair then correct mistakes. * Practice(15'). Ss: read in chorus & pairs.. T: asks ss look at the pictures & cue words in 6. Practice with a partner. part A6 then introduces the new words. Miss( n) cô (Chưa có gia đình) T: gets ss to read new words then makes new Mr (n) Ông, ngài, thầy… dialogues (using pictures) &practice in pairs . Ss:look at & write . T: corrects mistakes . Ss: read & make &practice . Ex: S1:Hi, Mr. Hung S2:Hello,Miss Hoa S1:How are you? S2: I’m fine, thanks And you? S1:Fine,thanks. * Production(5'). 8.

(9) T: asks ss to make the dialogues with real 7. Write in your exercise book. situation in class with their partners T: gets ss to do exercise A7 on page 13.. Ss: make & practice.. T: corrects mistakes and gives answer .. Ss: write. Nam: Hello,Lan How are you? Lan:Hi,I’m fine,thanks And you? Nam: fine,thanks. c. Consolidation.(3') - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework.(2') - Learn by heart the new words & structure & the dialogue - Do exercise 3,4-5 at home. - Prepare next lesson B1,2,3,4.. ____________________________________ Date of preparing: 19/8/2010. Date of teaching: 23/8/2010 class 6A 23/8/2010 class 6B. PERIOD 4: UNIT 1: GREETINGS LESSON 3: B. GOOD MORNING (1,2,3,4,5,6) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to greet each other as the E & say Goodbye. * Structures : * Vocabulary: Good morning: chào(buổi sáng) Good afternoon: chào (buổi chiều) Good evening: chào(buổi tối) Good bye /bye: chào tạm biệt Good night: chúc ngủ ngon b. Skill. 9.

(10) - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately. 2.Teaching aids a.Teacher:Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a.Checking the previous lesson (5')Form:oral *Question:call students go to the board to do exercise 4 on page 5 in the workbook.. Student’s activities. * Answer Ba:Hello,Hoa. How are you? Hoa: I’m fine,thank you . How are you? Ba: Fine,thanks.. *In new lesson today , we study the greeting in polite way(1') b. Teaching the new lesson: * Warm up(4') T greets ss: -Hello, my class. How are you?. * Presentation(7') T: asks ss to look at the pictrure & guess the time .. Ss answer. Hello, (my teacher). We are.......... 1. Listen and repeat. Ss: answer .. T: introduces the topic of the lesson then teaches the new words using the pictures : * Vocabulary - Good morning - Good afternoon 1.

(11) - Good evening - Good bye /bye - Good night + Note Là lời chào trang trọng & phải dùng phù hợp với thời gian. Ss: write & read in chorus & single. T: corrects mistakes . T: reads B1,2 . Ss: read in chorus & single. T: corrects mistakes. *Practice(15') 2. Practice with a partner T: asks ss to pratice in pairs. Ss: practice in pairs. T calls some ss to check. Corects mistakes. 3. Listen and repeat.. T:This is a dialogue between a teacher &students meeting in school. T: reads B3 . Ss: listen & read . T: corrects mistakes. T: explains the difference between “ Hello, Hi and Good morning, Good afternoon, Good evening”. Ss: listen &write. T:gets ss to practice in pairs( part B3). Ss:practice in pairs. T: corrects mistakes. * Production(8') T: introduces the situation of the dialogue between Lan &Nga ( part B4 on page 16 ). T: asks ss to read & complete the dialogue then practice reading . T: corrects mistakes.. 4. Write.. Ss: read. 1.

(12) Then T asks ss to practice part 5 (play with words). c. Consolidation.(3') - Repeat the content of the lesson by Remember( part 6).. Lan: Good afternoon, Nga. Nga: Good afternoon, Lan. Lan: How are you? Nga: I am fine, thanks. And you? Lan: Fine, thanks. Nga: Good bye. Lan: Bye. Ss do in pairs.. d. Guide the homework.(2') - Learn by heart the new works &structure &the dialogue - Do exercise 1,2,3 on page 6 and 7 in the workbook. - Prepare next lesson “C 1,2”.. Date of preparing: 19/8/2010. Date of teaching: 23/8/2010 class 6B 24/8/2010 class 6A. PERIOD 5 UNIT 1: GREETINGS LESSON 4: C. HOW OLD ARE YOU? (1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to count fluently numbers from one to twenty in English. + Structure + Vocabulary: one (n) 1 eight (n)8 fifteen (n) 15 two(n) 2 nine (n) 9 sixteen(n) 16 three (n) 3 ten (n) 10 seventeen (n) 17 1.

(13) four (n) 4 five (n) 5 six (n) 6 seven(n) 7. eleven (n) 11 eighteen (n) 18 twelve (n) 12 nineteen (n) 19 thirteen(n) 13 twenty(n) 20 fourteen(n) 14. b. Skill. - Reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. a. Checking the previous lesson(5') - Form: oral * Question: Write again new words.. *To help you count from 1 to 20 ,we study lesson today.(1'). * Answer: + Good morning + Good afternoon + Good evening + Good night + Good bye /bye + Good night Ss:count & write on the board.. b. Teaching the new lesson * Warm up(4') T: asks ss to count from 1 to 20 in Vietnamese . * Presentation(10') T: gives out the numbers from 1 to 20 & teaches them (in English).. 1. Listen and repeat. Ss:listen &write. * Vocabulary - one: 1 - eleven: 11 - two: 2 - twelve: 12. 1.

(14) - three: 3 - four: 4 - five: 5 - six: 6 - seven: 7 - eight: 8 - nine: 9 - ten: 10. - thirteen: 13 - fourteen: 14 - fifteen: 15 - sixteen: 16 -seventeen17 - eighteen 18 - nineteen 19 - twenty: 20. T: gets ss to read in chorus & single . Ss: read in chorus & single. T: corrects mistakes . * Practice(15'). 2.Practice. T: gets ss to play game “slap the board” with countable numbers from 1 to 20. T: remarks the winner. Then T asks ss to count: -Even numbers -Odd numbers -Down numbers T: gets ss to practice counting the people in a desk or counting things in the class .. Ss: play .. Ss:practice. T: corrects mistakes . * Production(5') T: guides ss to play game “ Jumble -words”. T: remarks the winner.. * Play game Ss: play. erthe =three vesne =seven torfeue =fourteen weytnt =twenty. c. Consolidation.(3') - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework.(2') - Learn by heart count the numbers - do exercise 1 on page 7 in the workbook. - Prepare next lesson “C3,4,5,6” before going to school. Date of preparing:20/8/2010. Date of teaching:24/8/2010 class 6B 26/8/2010 class 6A 1.

(15) PERIOD 6 UNIT 1: GREETINGS LESSON 5: C. HOW OLD ARE YOU? (3,4,5,6) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to talk about the other’s ages & introduce the others. + Structure: This is + (name) How old + be + S ? S+ be + (a number) + year(s) old + Vocabulary: This (pron): đây, này year (n) năm, tuổi b. Skill. - Improve reading, speaking, listening and writing skill. c. Education. - Educate ss to know to use language accurrately. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a.Checking the previous lesson(5') -Form: oral *Question: read the numbers from one to twenty.. Students’ activities. * Answer : One, two, three…….. *To talk about ages and introduce someone , we study lesson today.(1') b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm up(4') - Introduce: T gets ss to play the Bingo game with the numbers from 11 to 20. T: remarks the winner.. Ss: play.. * Presentation(10') T:gives out the pictures & asks ss to guess the. 3. Listen and repeat.. 1.

(16) situation of the dialogues. T:introduces the situation of the dialogue again .. Ss:look at & guess.. T: reads the dialogue then introduces new words & the new structures in the dialogue & explains .. Ss: listen .. Ss:write & read . * Structrures: - Introduce the other. Ex: This is Lan . This is …. Đây là…… - Ask and answer about the age: Ex: S1: How old are you? S2: I’m ten years old. How old + be +S ? S + be + …… years old * Practice(12') T: gets ss to practice reading the dialogue 3.. 4. Practice with your classmates Ss:read in chorus & single .. T: gets ss to read in groups of three T: corrects mistakes & gets ss to practice the structure to ask & answer about other’s ages .. Ss: practice in groups.. Ss: practice. Ex: S1: How old are you? S2: I’m twelve years old.. T: corrects mistakes. * Production(8') T:repeats the situation of the dialogues & the structures .. T:gets ss to practice the structures with real Ss:listen . situation in class to introduce others & ask the ages . T: calls some groups to practice in front of 1.

(17) class.. Ss: practice .. T: corrects mistakes. Ss:practice in groups . Ex: S1: Hello, .....(S2) This is .....(S3) S2: Hello, .....(S3) How old are you ? S3: I’m .......years old . * 5. Play bingo (Optional). T guides ss to play game. c. Consolidation.(3') - Repeat the content of the lesson. (Remember part 6). d. Guide the homework.(2') - Learn by heart new words &structures. - Do exercise3,4-9,10 . - Prepare next lesson A 1,2,3. Date of preparing: 25/8/2010 clas 6A. Ss play.. Date of teaching: 30/8/2010 class 6A 30/8/2010 class 6B. PERIOD 7 UNIT 2 AT SCHOOL LESSON 1: A/ COME IN (A1,2,3,4) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to understand and carry -out the teacher’s commands in the class. + Structure: Imperative ( Commands) + Vocabulary: - to come in(v) vào - to stand up(v)đứng lên - to sit down(v)ngồi xuống - to open(v) mở - to close(v) đóng, gấp vào - a book (n) quyển sách b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately. 1.

(18) 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a.Checking the previous lesson(5') - Form: oral Question:to do exercise 4a on( page 10). * Answer Phong: Hello,miss Nhi. This is Thanh . Miss Nhi: Hello, Thanh. How old are you? *To give -out the commands and Thanh: I’m twelve years old . carry-out the commands ,we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm up(3') T: gets ss to play the game “Noughts& crosses” by doing the sum of the numbers .. *Play game 9-5 20 - 7. T: remarks the winner .. 17 + 1. 6+5. 8-6. 3-3. 6 + 12. 5+3. * Presentation(10') T: asks ss to look at the picture on page 20 and guess the activities in the picture.. 10+2. 1. Listen and repeat. Then practice with a partner.. T: uses the imperatives in classroom to introduce new words . Ss:look at and guess.. Ss:write & read in chorus & single. * New words. - come in (v) - sit down (v) 1.

(19) - stand up (v) - open your book (v) - close your book (v) - a book (n). T: calls some students to read again to check their pronunciation.. * Practice(15') T:gets ss to look at the picture & the Ss: read. word cards of the classroom imperatives. 2. Match and write. T: asks ss to match the word cards with suitable pictures. Ss:look at. T: correct mistakes. Ss: match . Ss: write. a. Open your book b. Sit down c. Come in d. Close your book e. Stand up. T: gets ss to practice about imperatives . T: corrects mistakes. * Production(6') T: calls 1 student to repeat the classroom imperatives .. Ss: practice .. T: explains the game “ Simon says” T: reads the words &asks ss to play mime(kịch câm). T:gets to play the game “Simon says”.. Ss: repeat . *3. Play Simon Says. T: remarks the winner. c. Consolidation(3'). - Repeat the content of the lesson(By remember part).. Ss: do following what teacher reads.. d. Guide the homework(2'). T: repeats the lesson by "remember 1.

(20) part". - Learn by heart the newwords & imperatives . - Do exercises 1,2 page 11 on the workbook - Prepare next lesson B1,2./.. _____________________________________________ Date of preparing: 27/8/2010. Date of teaching:30/8/2010 class 6B 31/8/2010 class 6A. PERIOD 8 UNIT 2 AT SCHOOL LESSON 2: B/ WHERE DO YOU LIVE (B1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to talk about the places you live & ask for give personal information;know how to read the letters in English. + Structure: - What’s your name? – My name’s........ - Where do you live? – I live on .......... + Vocabulary: - to live(v) sống - a house (n) nhà - street (n)đường, phố - a city (n) thành phố b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately.. 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5') - Form: oral - Question:Write again new words.. Students’ activities * Answer - come in (v) 2.

(21) - sit down (v) - stand up (v) - open your book (v) - close your book (v) - a book (n) *To ask and answer about ages, names and addresses as well as know about English Alphabet , we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm up(4') T: gets ss to play game “ Slap the board” with the new words in the last lesson. T: remarks & gets ss to read again all the classroom imperatives. * Presentation(10').. Ss: play game. Ss: read.. T: gives a picture of a street &asks ss to guess it is city or country .. 1. Listen and repeat. Then practice the dialogue with a partner.. T: gives the situation of the lesson through the picture to introduce new words. Ss: look at & guess .. T: gets ss to read new words . T: corrects mistakes . T:introduces the structures in lesson (the uses , the meaning ).. * New words. - live (v) sống - street (n) đường phố - a house (n) ngôi nhà - a city (n) thành phố - What (n) Gì, cái gì... - Where (n) Đâu, ở đâu… Ss: write . Ss: read in chorus & single.. T: gets ss to read the structures . T: explains the difference between “live on” & “live in’’ and "live at" . 2. Ss:listen & write..

(22) Ss: read in chorus & pairs. Ss: listen & remember . * Structures. + Ask and answer about the name. Ex 1: What’s your name ? My name is Nam. What’s your name ? My name’s + ........ + Ask and answer about the address. Ex2: Where do you live ? I live on Tran Phu Street. Where + do/does + S + live? S + live(s) + on + N in + N at + N. * Practice(15') T: asks ss to listen and read in part B1 .. Ex: S1: where do you live ? S2: I live on Tran Phu Street S3:I live in H C M city . S4: I live at 12 Tran Hung Dao street.. T: asks ss to practice in pairs. T: call ss to practice in front of class.. Ss:listen & read in chorus.. T: correct mistakes .. Ss: practice in pairs.. T: gets ss to practice the part "Play with words".. Ss: practice in front of class . *2. Play with words.. T:calls some ss to check. Corrests mistakes.. Ss: practice.. * Production(5') T: gets ss to play the game “ Slap the board” with the letters in the alphabet. 2.

(23) T: remarks the winner. c. Consolidation(3'). - Repeat the content of the lesson. Ss: play . d. Guide the homework(2'). - Learn by heart new words & structures. - Do exercise3,4 on page 12 and 13 in the workbook. - Prepare next lesson B3, 4,5,6. _____________________________________________. Date of preparing:26/8/2010. Date of teaching:31/8/2010 class 7A 1/9/2010 class 7B. PERIOD 9 UNIT 2 AT SCHOOL LESSON 3: B/ WHERE DO YOU LIVE (B3,4.5,6) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. -By the end of the lesson ss are able to spell the names( using the alphabet). + Structure: - How do you spell your name ? + L-A –N + Vocabulary: - spell (v) đánh vần - a song (n) bài hát b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately. 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous. Students’ activities. 2.

(24) lesson(5') -Form: oral Question:Write again new words T: asks ss some personal questions: (?) What’s your name ? (?) Where do you live? (?) How old are you?. * Answer - live (v) - street (n) - a house (n) - a city (n). *To know English Alphabet andspell name in English, we study Ss: answer . lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm up(2') T calls some ss to read again alphabet in E . * Presentation(10') T asks ss: How many letters in Vietnamese? T introduces: There are 26 letters in English Alphabet. T: gives out the alphabet. T asks ss: Which letters that not place in Vietnamese Alphabet?. 3. Listen and repeat.. Ss answer:29 letters.. T reads in English. Ss answer:F,T,W,Z Ss: read in chorus & single. * Read the alphabet A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U and V W X Y and Z T: asks ss to look at the picture . (?) Who are they ? (?) What are they going to do?. 4. Listen and repeat. Then practice spelling with a partner.. T: introduces the content of part 2.

(25) then & reads 1 time & introducs new words. Ss: answer. T: gets ss to practice the structures in part B4. T: calls some pairs to practice in front of class. T: corrects mistakes.. * New word. - Spell (v) đánh vần. Ss:write & read . Ss: practice . Ss: practice .. * Practice(15') T: asks ss to practice exercise 5 on page 25 in pairs . T: calls ss to stand up to answer.. * New structure. How do you spell your name? L – A – N, Lan. Ex: S1: What’s your name? S2: My name’s Hoa. S1: How do you spell it? S2: H – O – A, Hoa 5. Write the answers in your exercise book.. T: corrects misakes. Ss: practice in pairs. Ss: answer.. * Production(8') T: asks ss to ask& and answer about themselves. T: asks ss to practice in front of class.. S1: What’s your name? S2: My name’s Ngan. S1: How old are you? S2: I’m twelve years old. S1: Where do you live? S2: I live in Son La. S1: How do you spell your name? S2: N – G – A – N, Ngan.. 2.

(26) T: gets ss to play the game “ lucky number” . Ss: practice in pairs. Ss: practice in front of class. Ss: play .. T: remarks the winner. c. Consolidation(2'). - Repeat the content of the lesson (By remember part).. * Play game 1. How old are you ? 2. Lucky number 3. Where do you live ? 4. What’s your name ? 5. Lucky number 6. How do you spell your name ? 7. How old are you ? 8. How do you spell your village ? 9. Lucky number. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Learn by heart the new word and new structures. - Do exercises 4,5,6 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “C 1” before going to school.. 2.

(27) Date of preparing: 2/9/2010. Date of teaching: 6/9/2010 class 6A 6/9/2010 class 6B. PERIOD 10 UNIT 2 AT SCHOOL LESSON 4: C/ MY SCHOOL (C1) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to talk about people & things at school identify (nhận ra ) places , people & objects at school. + Structure: - That/ This is + N - Is + that /this + N ? + Yes, that /this is. + No, that /this is not (isn’t) + Vocabulary: - a school (n) trường học - a student (n) học sinh - a teacher (n) giáo viên - a class (n) lớp học - a desk ( n) cái bàn b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately. 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities 2.

(28) a. Checking the previous lesson - Form: check 10’ Question: Complete the dialogue Hoa: what’s ..............? Lan: My ..................... Lan. Hoa: Hi, Lan. Where ......you .......? Lan: ..... ...... ...... Song Ma town. Hoa: How. ..............you , Lan ? Lan: I ................years .......... * Answer: Hoa: what’s your name ? Lan: My name’s Lan. Hoa: Hi, Lan. Where do you live ? Lan: I live in Song Ma Town . Hoa: How old are you,Lan ? Lan: I am 15 years old .. * To introduce your school ,classroom and objects in the classroom we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(3') - T gets ss to play game “Simon says” with the classroom imperatives. - Ss: play - T: remarks the winner . * Presentation(8') 1. Listen and repeat. Then practice the dialogue with a partner. - T: gets ss to look at the pictures & introduces picture & introduces new words by situation . - Ss: write & read in chorus & single. * New words. - a school (n) trường học - a student (n) học sinh - a teacher (n) giáo viên - a desk ( n) cái bàn - a class (n) lớp học - a classroom (n)phòng học - T: gives out examples & structures Ex: This is my desk. That is my school. - Ss: Write. 2.

(29) - T: explains uses & meanings of the structures & the difference between “that/ this” then gets ss to read .. * Structure. (+) That /This is + N (-) That /This isn’t + N (?) Is + that/ this + N ? - Yes, that/ this/It is. - No, that/ this/It isn’t .. - Ss: listen & read .. * Practice(11') - T: gets ss to read the dialogue of C1 . - T: gets ss to practice in pairs.. * Practice - Ss: read in choral & single .. - T: corrects mistakes .. - Ss: practice in pairs .. * Production(8') - T: asks ss to practice with real situation in the class. S1: This is a table. S2: That is a ruler.. - T: calls ss to stand up to practice. - T: corrects mistakes .. - Ss: practice in pairs.. - T: gets ss to play game “ matching’’. - T: remarks the winner.. - Ss: play game .. * Play game A Teacher Student Class Desk School. c. Consolidation(2') - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework(2') - Learn by heart new words and structures & using - Do exercise 1,2 on page 14 and 15 in the workbook. 2. B Lớp học Cái bàn Trường học Giáo viên Học sinh.

(30) - Prepare next lesson C 2,3 before going to school.. Date of preparing:2/9/2010. Date of teaching: 6/9/2010 class 6B 7/9/2010 class 6A. PERIOD 11 UNIT 2 AT SCHOOL LESSON 5: C/ MY SCHOOL (C2,3,4) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to identify places & objects at school. + Structure: + What is that /this ? - It’s + a/an + N + Vocabulary: - a door (n) cửa ra vào - a school bag(n)cặp sách - a windown(n) cửa sổ - a pencil(n) bút chì - a board ( n)cái bảng - a pen(n)bút mực - a ruler(n)cái thước - an eraser(n)cục tẩy. - a waste-basket(n) sot rác - a clock(n) đồng hồ treo tường b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5'). * Question. - Ask 2 Ss to make sentences with this/that.. Students’ activities * Answer - Ss use the structures : This/That is + single N 3.

(31) - Remarks and gives marks.. * Possible answer: This is a pen. That is a hat. Is this a desk?. *To describe or call name of objects in the classroom ,we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(4') - Let the students play Chain game. - Divide the class into 4 groups. - Say a sentence “ I’m a student”. - Ask the groups continuously with the teacher’s sentence and another go on. - Which group making more sentences is the winner. Ss play. T: remarks. * Presentation(7'). 2. Listen and repeat. - T asks the students to look at the pictures of section 2 on page 29. - Show new words by some methods and let the students guess the meaning of them. - pencil (real object) - door (real object) window (real object) eraser (real object), etc. * New words. a door (n) cửa ra vào a school bag (n)cập sách a window (n) cửa sổ a pencil (n) bút chì a board ( n)cái bảng a pen (n)bút mực a clock(n) đồng hồ treo tường a ruler(n)cái thước a waste basket (n) sọt rác an eraser(n) cục tẩy -T: reads and lets them read in chorus. - T:asks some ss to read a gain. *Notes: The way to ask about name of objects. -T: gives out the examples and explains 3.

(32) how to ask and answer about names of objects. Eg: What is this/that? This/That/It is a pen. - Let ss to give out the form . Form: What is this/that? This/that/it +a/an + N (?)When is the form "what is this?" used? (?) How do you use the form "what is that?". - Ss: It is used to ask about name of one thing that is near you. - Ss: It is used to ask about name of one thing that is far from you.. -T: explains how to use of article "a/an".. -T: asks ss to answer some questions: - Point at a ruler. What is this? - Point at a door. What is that? - Point at an eraser. What is this?. * Article a/an. -"an" is placed before single N that opens by one vowel(a, e, u, i, o) Eg: an ink pot ,an eraser -"a" is placed before single N that open by one consonant. Eg: a book ,a desk ,a door S1:It's a ruler S2:It's a door. S3:It's an eraser. * Practice(15').. 3. Practice with a partner. - T:asks them to practice in pairs. (asking and answering about the pictures of the section 2). Ss practice in pairs.. -T:calls some pairs to work in front of the class. -T: listens, remarks and corrects.. S1:What is this? S2: It's a door. S1: What is this? S2: It's a window. S1: What is this? S2: It's a board.. * Production(8') 3.

(33) - Divide the class into 2 groups (group 1 makes questions and group 2 answers( using real objects in the class)). -T:encourages ss and gives out new words if they need.. c. Consolidation(3'). - Let Ss repeat how to ask and answer about name of objects and use article (a, an).. ……………………... Eg: group 1: Take a book and ask: What is this? - Group 2: It's a book. - Group 1: Point at a window is far from him and ask: What is that ? - Group 2: It's a window. - Do the same.. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and new structures. - Do exercises 1,2 on page 15 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “UNIT 3: A/ My house”(A1,2) before going to school.. Date of preparing: 3/9/2010. Date of teaching: 7/9/2010 class 6B 9/9/2010 class 6A. PERIOD 12. UNIT 3. AT HOME LESSON 1: A/ MY HOUSE (A1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. -By the end of the lesson, Students are able to talk about things in a house. + Structure: - What is that /this ? + This/ That/ It is a/ an + noun. - What are these/ those ? + These/ those/ They are + plural noun. 3.

(34) + Vocabulary:. - a living room (n) phòng khách - a couch(n)ghế sa lông dài - a lamp (n) đèn - a table(n) bàn - a bookshelf( n)giá sách - a television(n) Ti vi - a chair (n) ghế tựa - a stereo(n)dàn/ máy nghe nhạc - a armchair(n) ghế bành - a stool(n) ghế đẩu. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5'). - Form: - oral Question: write again new words. Students’ activities * Answer: - a door (n) cửa ra vào - a school bag (n)cập sách - a window (n) cửa sổ - a pencil(n) bút chì - a board ( n) cái bảng - a pen(n) bút mực - a clock(n) đồng hồ treo tường - a ruler(n)cái thước - a waste-basket(n)sọt rác - an eraser(n) cục tẩy. *To introduce the objects in the house ,we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(3') - T: asks ss the question about things in the classroom using the structure “ what’s this / that?" 3. - Ss: answer..

(35) Ex: It’s a board. - T: corrects mistakes . * Presentation(10'). 1. Listen and repeat.. - T: asks ss to look in the picture in book and asks: ? What’s this /that ?. - Ss: => This is my living room. That’s my house .. - T: introduces new words by picturs - Ss: write & read in chorus & single * New words. - a living room (n) phòng khách - a couch (n) ghế sa lông dài - a lamp (n) đèn - a table(n) bàn - a bookshelf ( n) giá sách - a television (n) Ti vi - a chair (n) ghế tựa - T: repeats the structures with “ This/ That” - a stereo(n)dàn/ máy nghe nhạc - Ss: listen. - T: introduces the structures with “ those/ these”.. What is this /that? This/ That/ It’s .......... * Structure. What are these /those ? - T: explains the difference between “ those/ These/ Those/ They are ...... these” - Ss: listen & write . - giống nhau: dùng chỉ vật .ng ư ời - khác nhau: “that/ this”: dùng dtừ số ít “those/ these”dùng dtừ số nhiều - thường thêm “s” vào cuối dtừ số ít - T: pays attention to the way how to change để chuyển sang dtừ số nhiều. the singular noun into plural noun.. 3.

(36) * Practice(13') - T:reads part A1 and let ss read in chorus. - T:asks ss to practice part A2. - Lets ss practice( depend on the model example).. -T: calls some pairs to practice speaking before the class.. - Ss: listen and write. * Notes: plural N is formed by adding "s, es". - Nouns end: o, ch, sh, x, s, z + es Eg: a box - boxes a couch - couches -Nouns end: "y" but before "y" is a consonant "y" changes into "i" and adds "es". Eg: a city - cities But before "y" is a vowel we only add "s" Eg:a key - keys -Nouns end: "f or fe" change "f or fe" into "v + es" Eg: a knife - knives a shelf - shelves - Ngoại lệ: a roof - roofs a chief - chiefs a handkerchief - handkerchiefs - Noun the left + s Eg: a pen - pens a ruler - rulers 2. Practice with a partner.. * Model examples. Ex 1: What is this/that? It's a table(an chair) Ex 2: What are these/those? They are tables(couches) - Ss work in pairs. S1:Point at a TV: What is this? S2:It's a television. S3:Point at 2 couches: What are these? S4:They are couches.. -T: listens and corrects their mistakes. * Production(8') -T gives out an exercise and asks ss to 3.

(37) complete it.. - Lets them work in pairs. - Calls some pairs to give out their answers. - Lets others to check and correct.. * Exercise: Complete the dialogue. A: What is...........? B: It...........a pen. A: What are ..........? B: They ..........erasers. A: Is ......your ruler? B: Yes,......... - Work in pairs.. Answer A:....this/that B:....is... A:....these/those B:...are... A:....this/that... B:....it is. c. Consolidation(3'). Lets ss to repeat the the lesson. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and structures. - Do exercises 1,2 on page 17 and 18 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period (A3,4,5*). =====================================. Date of preparing:9/9/2010. PERIOD 13. Date of teaching:13/9/2010 class 6A 13/9/2010 class 6B. UNIT 3 : AT HOME 3.

(38) LESSON 2: A/ MY HOUSE (A3,4,5*) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students are able to introduce the members of the family. + Structure: - What is his / her name ? + His/Her name is ...... - Who is this / that ? + That / This is .......... 2.Vocabulary: - a family (n) gia đình - a father (n)cha , bố - a mother ( n) mẹ - a sister (n) chị gái, em gái - a brother (n) anh, em trai - people (n) người b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately 2TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5'). -Form: - oral Question:- Call 2 students to write new words in last period.. - T: remarks and gets points. *To know someone (about age,name, job) and ask and answer people in a family , we learn lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. 3. Students’ activities * Answer a living room (n) phòng khách a couch(n)ghế sa lông dài a lamp(n)đèn a table(n) bàn a bookshelf( n) giá sách a television(n)ti vi a chair (n) ghế tựa a stereo(n)dàn/ máy nghe nhạc.

(39) * Warm – up(5') - T: gets ss to play game “Naught & crosses”. - Ss: play T: remarks the winner . * Presentation(8'). 3. Listen and repeat. Then practice.. - T: asks ss to look at the picture of Ba’s family & introduces some information about Ba’s family and some new words.. - T: lets the students listen and repeat the new words twice. - T: calls some students to read the words again. - T: corrects mistakes . - T: introduces the structures in the lesson & gets the ss to practice reading.. - Ss: write & read in choral & single * New words. - a family (n) gia đình - a father (n)cha , bố - a mother ( n) mẹ - a sister (n) chị gái , em gái - a brother (n) anh trai , em trai - people (n) người - Who ai. Ss read.. - Possessive adjs. Pronouns I You He She It We They. Possessive adjs My Your His Her Its our Their. * Using: It is used to express the possessive of thing or person. - Ss: write and read. 3.

(40) * Structures. Asking the third person’s name. What is his/ her name ? His / Her name is + name *Asking and answering about the people. Who’s this /that ? This/ That is + name - T: explains using “ too” & “ how many”.. * Practice(14') - T: lets ss listen to the tape threes times. - T: gets ss to read about Ba’s family again.. *Asking and answering about the quantity. How many + N + are there + in...? There are + N + in ........ * “too” thường đặt ở cuối câu trong ngôn ngữ nói & có nghĩa là “cũng”. Ss :listen . - Ss: read.. - T: calls on some students to read it in front of the class to check their pronunciation. 4. Answer the questions. - T: explains and guides ss to answer the questions in part 4 on page 33 and then asks them to practice in pairs. - Ss: practice in pairs . - T: corrects mistakes .. * Answer keys a. Her name’s Nga. b. His name’s Ha. c. That is Ba. He is twelve years old. d. This is Lan. She is fifteen years old . e. There are 4 people in the family.. * Production(8') - T: explains & guides ss to answer in part 5.. *5. Answer the questions. - Ss: listen and practice. - Ss: practice in pairs in front of class.. - T: calls ss to stand up to practice . - T: corrects mistakes . 4.

(41) - T: asks ss to write a short passage about their family.. Ex: My name’s Hoa. I’m12 years old . There are 4 people in my family. My father isTtuan . He is 45 . My mother is Loan & she is 40 years old. My sister is Hien.She is 15 .She is a student.. c. Consolidation(2'). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. -. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and new structures. - Do exercises 3,4 on page 19, 20 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B1,2”. Date of preparing: 10/9/2010. Date of teaching:14/9/2010 class 6A 14/9/2010 class 6B. PERIOD 14 UNIT 3 AT HOME LESSON 3:NUMBERS (B1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students are able to count from one to one hundred. + Structure: + Vocabulary : - Numbers from 21 to 100 - a bench (n) ghế dài - a bookcase (n) tủ sách b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately 2. TEACHING AIDS 4.

(42) a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5'). - Form: oral - Question: write again new words. Students’ activities * Answer: - a family (n) gia đình - a father (n)cha , bố - a mother (n) mẹ - a sister (n) chị gái , em gái - a brother (n) anh trai , em trai - people (n) người - who ai. *To use the numbers to count the objects around us , we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(4') - T: gets ss to play game “ Bingo” with these numbers from 1 to 10 . - Ss: play . Six, ten , five, eight ,seven ,three , one - T: remarks the winner. * Presentation(10') - T: gives out numbers from 21 to 100 on the board. - Ss look at. - T: asks ss to read in choral & single . - Ss: read. - T: calls ss to stand up to read. - Ss: read in choral and individual. - T: guides ss to read and write the numbers. - Ss: listen and write. “30 =thirty 40 = forty 50 = fifty 60 =sixty. 70 = seventy 80 = eighty 90 = ninety 100 = one hundred. * Quy tắc xây dựng số chẵn chục: Ngoài “ten, twenty and one hundred” Các số xây dựng bằng cách chuyển đuôi “teen” thành đuôi “ty” Ex: thirteen -> thirty 4.

(43) fourteen -> forty Số chẵn chục + số đếm đ ơn v ị Ex: 31: thirty - one * Note: Các số đếm được kết hợp bởi hai từ chúng ta phải có dấu gạch nối ở giữa ( - ). * Practice(15'). 2. Practice.. - T: gives out the pictures of classroom & describes to use the structure “There is/ are ………”. - Ss: listen & write.. - T: gives out new words in the picture.. - Ss: write & read in choral and individual. * New words. - a bench (n) ghế dài - a bookcase (n) tủ sách - “ there is”dùng cho dtừ số ít - “there are” .......................nhiều. - T: explains “ noun” – “nouns”. - Ss: listen & write . * The way how to change the singular nouns into plural nouns. - Thêm “s” vào cuối dtừ , những dtừ kết thúc bằng “o, s, x, ch, sh” ta thêm đuôi “ es’’ . Ex: desk – desks bench – benches /s/ : noun the ending is : k, t, p , /z/ : ......................... is : n , d, v, y, m, l, r, g, ....... /iz/ : ........................is: s, x, ch, sh, z. - T: gets ss to count the objects in the classroom.. - Ss: practice and answer .. - T: gets ss to play game “ What & Where” ( viết từ vào vòng tròn hs đọc 12 lượt rồi xoá chữ trong vòng tròn đi hs viết lại đúng vòng tròn ) . 4.

(44) - Ss: play game. - T: remarks the winner .. Sevent y. Eighty- five One hundre ddddd. Twelv e. Twenty-two Thirty- three. Fifty * Production(5') - T: gets ss to count from 1 to 100 turn by turn. - Ss: count . - T: gives out the alphabet & gets ss to count the alphabet from 1 to 26 . - Ss: count - T: remarks the winner. c. Consolidation(3'). - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and the structures. - Do exercises 1,2 on page 21 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B3,4,5” before going to school.. 4.

(45) ==========================================. Date of preparing: 10/9/2010. Date of teaching: 14/9/2010class 6B 16/9/2010 class 6A. PERIOD 15 UNIT 3 AT HOME LESSON 4: B/ NUMBERS (B3,4,5*) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students are able to talk about things in the classroom, the living room and know the pronunciation of plural noun ( /s/, /z/ /iz/ ) to count things. + Structure: + How many + Ns + are there ? - There + is/ are + ( number) + Vocabulary b. Skills - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5'). - Form: - oral - Question: write again numbers 16,34,59,80,100.. Students’ activities - Answer: Sixteen , thirty-four , fifty-nine, eighty , one hundred .. * To ask and answer about the objects in somewhere ,we study lesson today(1') b. Teaching the new lesson.. 4.

(46) * Warm – up(3') - T: gets ss to count things in the classroom ( using the numbers from 1 to 100 ). - Ss: play . - T: remarks the winner . *Presentation(6') T: gives example and explains about them. Ex: How many desks are there in the classroom? There are 10 desks. - T: gives out how to add plural. - T: asks ss to repeat the structure: “ There + is /are …………”. 3. Listen and repeat.. How many + N + are + there ? There is/ are + number +N (s) * Practice(20') 4. Practice with a partner. - T: gets ss to change the singular (số ít) nouns into plural (số nhiều). Ss repeat. +“ There is…..”dùng cho dtừ số ít + “There are” …....................nhiều T: makes ex: -S1:How many teachers are there in the classrooom? S2: There are 1 teacher. -S1: How many students are there in class? S2: There are 26 students. 5. Practice. T: explains the ex.. - Ss: change the nouns into plural form * Thêm “s” vào cuối dtừ , những dtừ kết thúc bằng “o, s, x, ch, sh” ta thêm đuôi “ es’’ Ex: desk – desks bench – benches /s/ : noun the ending is : k, t, p ,f /z/ : …...................... is : n , d, v, y, m, l, r, g, ….... 4.

(47) /iz/ : ….....................is: s, x, ch, sh, z. Ss: do in groups. - T: corrects mistakes & asks ss to divide them into 3 columns( following the pronunciation of the ending sounds) . - Ss: divide . /s/ /z/ /iz/ Students Doors benches Books Windows Clocks Rulers Desks Tables Boards Erasers Chairs - T: corrects mistakes . * Production(6') - T: asks ss to ask & answer about the things in class . Ss: do in pairs.. - T: calls ss to stand up to practice. - T: corrects mistakes.. Ex : S1: How many boards are there? S2: There is 1 board . S1: How many students are there? S2: There are ............... c. Consolidation(2'). - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and new structures. - Do exercises 3,4 on page 22 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “ C1,2” before going to school.. ========================================== 4.

(48) Date of preparing: 15/9/2010. Date of teaching: 20/9/2010class 6A 20/9/2010 class 6B. PERIOD 16 UNIT 3 AT HOME LESSON 5: FAMILIES (C1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students are able to describe the family members and talk about jobs. + Structure: - What + do /does + S + do ? - S + be + job + Vocabulary : - an engineer (n) kỹ sư - a nurse (n)y tá - a doctor(n) bác sĩ b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5'). - Form: - oral - Question: T: asks ss to complete these sentences. 1. How old ...you? 2. I....eleven years old. 3. Lan ....a student. 4. How many teachers ......there in your school? 5. There .....forty teachers. * To ask and answer about names ,ages, jobs of members in a family , we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. 4. Students’ activities *Answer. 1. are 2. am 3. is 4. are 5. are.

(49) * Warm – up(3') - T: asks ss some suggested questions: (?) How many people are there in your family ? (?) What do your parents do ?. - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions. 1. Listen and read. Then answer the questions.. * Pre-reading(8') - T: asks ss to look at the picture & introduces the situation of the text (using the picture).. - Ss: look at & listen. - T:lets ss listen to the tape once.. - Ss: listen.. - T: introduces some new words.. - Ss: listen and write. * New words. - an engineer (n) kỹ sư - a doctor (n) bác sĩ - a nurse (n) y tá. - T: introduces the new structure by give some examples. Ex: S1: What do you do ? S2: I’m a student. S1: What does she do ? S2: She is a teacher.. - Ss:listen and write. * New structure. What do/ does + S + V? S + be + a/an + Job.. * While -reading(13') - T:reads the text first. - T:calls 2 ss to read the text again.. - 2 Ss read individually.. - T: asks ss to read in silent. - T:gets them to answer the questions.. - Ss: work in pairs.. - T:calls some pairs to practice speaking before the class. - T: While they are speaking ,calls some ss to write their answers on the board. 4.

(50) - T: lets ss to check and correct by themselves. - T: gives the answer( if necessary). S1:How many people are there ? S2:There are four. S1:How old is her father? S2:He is forty . S1:What does he do? S2:...... * Answer a. there are 4 people. b. he is 40 . c. he is an engineer. d. she is 35 . e. she is a teacher . f. he is 8 . g. he is a student. h. they are in the living room . 2. Practice with a partner.. * Post - reading(10') - T: asks ss to describe about their family (base on the text and Song's family). - T: calls some excellent ss to describe about their family and Song's family. - T: checks and corrects.. Ss do in pairs. * Talk about Song’s family Ex. S1: How old is Song’s father? S2: He is 42 years old . S1: What does he do ? S2: He is a doctor . * Writing. -This is Song's family.There are 4 people in Song family:his father, his mother, his sister, and Song.His father is Mr. Kien.He is 42 years old. He is a doctor. His mother is Mrs. Oanh.She is a nurse. She is 39. He sister is Lan. She is a student. She is 15.Song is a student ,too. He is 12. -This is my family. There are four people in my family: my father ,my mother, my brother(sister) and me. This is my father. He is forty five. He is a teacher .This is my mother. She is a doctor. She is forty. My brother is ten .He is a student.. 5.

(51) c. Consolidation(3'). -T:lets ss to repeat the lesson(ask and answer about job). What +do/does + S + do? S + be + (a/an) + N(job). d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and new structure. - Do exercises 1,2,3,4,5 on page 23,24 and 25 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “ Grammar practice”.. Date of preparing:15/9/2010. PERIOD 17. Date of teaching:20/9/2010 class 6B 21/9/2010 class 6A. GRAMMAR PRACTICE. 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - Ss review the knowledge from unit 1 to unit 3; to be, imperative(commands), question words , greeting and demonstrative pronouns. b. Skills. - All four skills are used. c. Education. - Help them use English correctly 2.TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Lesson plan, visual aids. b. Students: prepare lesson. 3. PROCEDURE. 5.

(52) Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson. (Optional) *To practice the learned grammar , we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson.. Students’ activities. *Warm up(2') T asks ss to carry out the commands in the classroom. Ss do. *Practice(37') 1.To be -Tasks ss to repeat the form of "to be" - How many form "to be" have? -T: explains.. +Tobe. am(I) is(he,she,it) are(we,you,they). (-)I+am+not He,she,it+is+not(isn't) We you,they+are +not(aren't) -Ss work in groups. -T: asks ss to do part 1,2,3 then asks them to speak out . -T:calls some groups to speak out their answers. - Checks and corrects. * Answer keys. Exercise 1. am...am...are.. is.. are.. Exercise 2. am...is...is...are...are.. Exercise 3. a. are...am b. is...is c. is....is not. d. Are …are not. 2. Imperative(commands) T: asks ss: - How to use command? - Who can repeat the commands that you have learnt? - Who can take out the form ? - Ss: câu mệnh lệnh dùng để yêu cầu 5.

(53) ai đó làm việc gì. * Form: V(bare infinitive) + O - T:asks ss to do part 4. -Ss: Work in groups. -T:calls some ss to speak out. Exercise 4 *Answer keys a. Come in b. Sit down c. Open your book. d. Close your book. e. Stand up. 3. How many..? - What is "how many" used for? - Who can repeat the form? - S1:It used to ask about quantity. - S2:Give out the form. * Form: How many +Ns(es) + are there ....? Exercise 5 - T asks ss to do part 5. - Ss work in pairs. - Calls some pairs to practice speaking before the class. Ss do. - Lets them check and correct . a.S1:How many desks are there ? S2:There is one b.S1: How many books are there? S2:There are six c) and d )do the same. 4.Question words - How many question words have you learnt.. -Ss give out the question words. What, When, Where, How, Who.... - Lets ss repeat the usage of them. Eg: What: ask about name, time, job When: ask about time ...... -T:asks ss to do part 6 . - Ss work in pairs. -T:calls some ss to speak out. Exercise 6. * Answer keys 5.

(54) a. What.... is b. Where….live c. Who... is d. What...is 5. Numbers. Exercise 7 - Who can count from 1 to 20? -T: asks ss to write the words for the numbers and the numbers for the words on the board. - Checks and corrects. a. 5-five b. seven-7 8-eight nine-9 10-ten eleven-11 20-twenty twenty-five-25 50-fifty eighty-80 6. Greetings -Hi, Hello: greet friends(friendly) -Good morning.....greet the older(politely) Exercise 8. (?) How do you greet people?. -T: asks them to do part 8 then call some ss to speak out. *Answer keys Hi/hello...How ...fine ...you...thanks 7. This and That. -T:lets ss to repeat the usage of "this, that, these, those". - Who can give out the form of them? -This / that + is + a/ an + N -These/ those + are + Ns(es) -T:asks ss to do part 9. -T:asks Ss to give their answers. *Answer keys a. That ..is...yes b. This...is...isn't 8.A picture quiz. Exercise 10. -T:guides: Look at the picture and call the name of objects. - T:Points at the chair and asks: What is this? 1.It's a chair. - Lets them do the same. 5.

(55) c. Consolidation)3'). -T:lets Ss repeat the aims of the lesson. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Review the knowledge carefully. - Prepare for test.. Date of preparing: 17/9/2010. PERIOD 18. Date of teaching:21/9/2010 class 6B 23/9/2010 class 6A. TEST 45’. 1.OBJECTIVE - Test their knowledge which have learnt from unit 1 to 3 . 2. THE CONTENT OF THE TEST. **THE FIRST TEST** I. Listen to the passage and choose the best answer ( A, B or C) to complete the sentences. (2.5pts). 1. My father is………………………… A. a teacher B. an engineer C. a doctor 2. He is ………. years old. A. 35 C. 45 C. 25 3. My mother is ………………………. A. an engineer B. a nurse C. a doctor 4. She is ………….. years old. A. 30 B. 32 C. 36 5.

(56) 5. We live in ……………. A.Son la B.Hanoi C. Hue II. Read the passage tick “” in the box True or False to the statements. (2,5 pts). I am Ngan. I’m fourteen years old. I’m a student. This is my father. He is an engineer. He’s forty-six years old. This is my mother. She is a teacher. She is thirty-eight years old and this is my sister. She is nine years old. She is a student. We live on Hang Bac Street. T. F. 1. Ngan is fifteen years old. 2. Her father is an engineer. 3. Her mother is forty-eight years old. 4. Her family lives on Hang Bac Street. 5. Her sister is a student. III. Match the questions in Column A with their answers in Column B (2,5 pts) A 1. What’s your name? 2. How are you? 3. What’s this? 4. How old are you? 5. Where do you live? 1………... 2……….. B a. This is an eraser. b. I live in Hai phong. c. My name’s Hoa. d. I’m fine, thank you. e. I’m twelve years old. 3………... 4……….. 5……….. IV. Write the completed sentences base on the provided words (2,5 pts). 1. This/ my family. => ………………………. 2. There/ four/ people/ in/ my family. => ……………………….. 3. That/ my mother. => ……………………….. 4. She/ an engineer. => ……………………….. 5. My family/ in / Son La. => ………………………….. *** THE SECOND TEST ***. 5.

(57) I. Listen to the passage and choose the best answer ( A, B or C) to complete the sentences. (2.5pts). 1. My father is………………………… A. a doctor B. a teacher C. an engineer 2. He is ………. years old. A. 45 C. 35 C. 25 3. My mother is ………………………. A. an engineer B a doctor C. . a nurse 4. She is ………….. years old. A.32 B. 36 C. 30 5. We live in ……………. village. A.Hue B. Song ma C.Vinh II. Read the passage tick “” in the box True or False to the statements. (2,5 pts). I am Ngan. I’m fourteen years old. I’m a student. This is my father. He is an engineer. He’s forty-six years old. This is my mother. She is a teacher. She is thirty-eight years old and this is my sister. She is nine years old. She is a student. We live on Hang Bac Street. T. F. 1. Her father is an engineer. 2. Ngan is fifteen years old. 3. Her mother is forty-eight years old. 4. Her sister is a student. 5. Her family lives on Hang Bac Street. III. Match the questions in Column A with their answers in Column B (2,5 pts) A 1. What’s this? 2. How are you? 3. What’s your name? 4. How old are you? 5. Where do you live? 1………... 2……….. B a. I’m twelve years old. b. I live in Sai Village. c. My name’s Hoa. d. I’m fine, thank you. e. This is an eraser. 3………... 4……….. 5……….. IV. Write the completed sentences base on the provided words (2,5 pts). 1. There/ four/ people/ in/ my family. => ……………………….. 2. She/ an engineer. 5.

(58) => ……………………….. 3. This/ my family. => ………………………. 4. My family/ in / Son La. => …………………………. 5. That/ my mother. => ……………………….. 3. ANSWER KEYS. ** THE FIRST TEST ** I. Each correct sentence is 0,5 point. 1–C 2–B 3–B 4–A 5–A Tape transcript. Hello, this is my family. This is my father. He is a doctor. He is fortyfive years old. This is my mother. She is a nurse. She is thirty years old. My family lives in Son La. II. Each correct answer is 0,5 point T 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. F .    . III. Each correct answer is 0,5 point. 1-c 2-d 3-a. 4-e. IV. Each correct answer is 0,5 point. 1. This is my family. 2. There are four people in my family. 3. That is my mother. 4. She is an engineer. 5. My family lives in Son La. *** THE SECOND TEST *** I. Each correct sentence is 0,5 point. 1–A 2–A 3–C 5. 5–b.

(59) 4–C 5–B Tape transcript. Hello, this is my family. This is my father. He is a doctor. He is fortyfive years old. This is my mother. She is a nurse. She is thirty years old. My family lives in Son la. II. Each correct answer is 0,5 point 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. T . F  .  . III. Each correct answer is 0,5 point. 1-c 2-d 3-a. 4-e. 5–b. IV. Each correct answer is 0,5 point. 1. There are four people in my family. 2. She is an engineer. 3. This is my family. 4. My family lives in Son La. 5. That is my mother.. Date of preparing:23/9/2010. PERIOD 19. Date of teaching:27/9/2010 class 6A 27/9/2010 class 6B. CORRECT THE TEST. 1. OBJECTIVE. a,Knowledge:Use the learned knowledge to correct the test. b,Skills: Practice all of skills. c,Education: Correct the “TEST” for the students how to know their result of the test. 2TEACHING AIDS. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, chalk… 5.

(60) b. Students : Books, pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE . a. Checking the previous lesson. ( Optional ) *. To know the right and wrong of the test , we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. ** THE FIRST TEST ** I. Each correct sentence is 0,5 point. 1–C 2–B 3–B 4–A 5–A Tape transcript. Hello, this is my family. This is my father. He is a doctor. He is fortyfive years old. This is my mother. She is a nurse. She is thirty years old. My family lives in Son La. II. Each correct answer is 0,5 point T 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. F .    . III. Each correct answer is 0,5 point. 1-c 2-d 3-a. 4-e. IV. Each correct answer is 0,5 point. 1. This is my family. 2. There are four people in my family. 3. That is my mother. 4. She is an engineer. 5. My family lives in Son La. *** THE SECOND TEST *** I. Each correct sentence is 0,5 point. 1–A 2–A 3–C 4–C 5–B 6. 5–b.

(61) Tape transcript. Hello, this is my family. This is my father. He is a doctor. He is fortyfive years old. This is my mother. She is a nurse. She is thirty years old. My family lives in Sai Village. II. Each correct answer is 0,5 point 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. T . F  .  . III. Each correct answer is 0,5 point. 1-c 2-d 3-a. 4-e. 5–b. IV. Each correct answer is 0,5 point. 1. There are four people in my family. 2. She is an engineer. 3. This is my family. 4. My family lives in Son La. 5. That is my mother. 4. REMARK . Knowledge ……………………………………………………………………… Skill ……………………………………………………………………………... Atitude……………………………………………………………………. Date of preparing: 22/9/2010. Date of teaching: 27/8/2010 class 6B 28/9/2010 class 6A. PERIOD 20 UNIT 4 BIG OR SMALL? LESSON 1: A/ WHERE IS YOUR SCHOOL (A1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. -By the end of the lesson, Students are able to describe the location and size of a school . + Structure: Where is your school ? - It is in the country Is your school big ? - Yes, it is. / No, it isn’t . 6.

(62) + Vocabulary:. - small(adj) nhỏ, bé - big (adj) to, lớn. - country (n) nông thôn - city (n) thành phố. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson. (Optional) *To introdude the school(big or small), practice "yes/No",we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(4') T asks ss to describe their school (in Vietnamese). * Pre – reading(12) - T: asks ss to look at two pictures on page 44 and asks ss to compare about Thu’s school &Phong’s school.. Students’ activities. 1. Listen and repeat.. - Ss: answer - T: introduces new words and gets ss to read . - Ss: read in choral & single * New words. - small(adj)nhỏ, bé - country (n)nông thôn - big (adj) to, lớn - city (n) thành phố - T: gives out examples & introduces the using of possessive (sở hữu) in the lesson. Ex1: It’s Lan’s pen. Ex2 : It’s Lien’s eraser. - Ss: write 6.

(63) *Possessive case. Eg: Phong 's school is small. N1+ 'S +N2 Notes:N1 là chủ sở hữu,N2 là vật bị sở hữu ('s) là dấu sở hữu.Nếu N1 tận cùng bằng chữ " s"ta chỉ thêm dấu (') Eg. Pupils' books are on the table. N1+ ' +N2 *Adjective. Eg1.Thu's school is big. S + be + adj Eg2.I have a small house adj N -Position :before a noun and after the verb "to be". * While – reading(15') 2. Answer. Then write the answers in your exercise book. - T: gets ss to read the text 1- 2 times & checks their guess. - Ss: read & answer. - T: gets ss to read. - Ss: read. - T: corrects mistake . - T: introduces the structure in A2 & asks ss to practice in pairs & answer . - Ss answer the questions. - T: corrects mistakes. * Answer key. a. Yes, it is . b. No, it isn’t . c. It is in the country . d. No, it isn’t. * Post – reading(8') - T: repeats the possessive . - Ss: listen . -T: asks ss to practice in pairs with “ Yes / No” question answer drill. - Ss: practice. - T: asks Ss to practice about their school or their friend's school. - May be draw some schools on the board and gives information and asks 6.

(64) them to practice speaking. Eg: My school is small. It has eleven classes and 336 students. It is in the country. c. Consolidation(3'). - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and structure. - Do exercise 1,2,3 on page 35 and 36 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B3,4, 5*” before going to school. Date of preparing: 30/9/2010. Date of teaching:5/10/ 2010 class 6B 5/10/2010 class 6A. PERIOD 21 UNIT 4 BIG OR SMALL? LESSON 2: A/ WHERE IS YOUR SCHOOL (A3,4,5*) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students are able to ask and answer about quality with “How many …” + Structure: How many + Ns/es + are there? There is............................. There are .......................... + Vocabulary: - or (conj) : hay, hoặc b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately. 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. 6.

(65) b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5'). - Form : oral. Students’ activities. - Question: write again new words. *Answer: - small(adj)nhỏ, bé - country (n)nông thôn - big (adj) to, lớn - city (n) thành phố. *To revise the structure "There is ...../There are.............." to introduce something in somewhere , we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(5') - T: gives out the number (6,8,12,52,100, 200,400,900) & gets the ss to play game “ Bingo” - T: remarks the winner . - T: gets ss to guess What the numbers about ( with school) . - Ss: Play game - Ss: 8 class 400 students 20 desks in a class 20 teachers * Pre – reading(4') T: repeats "There is /There are". * While -reading(17') - T: gets ss to read the text & guess.. 3. Read. Then answer the questions.. - T: gets ss to read the text & check their guess.. - Ss: read in pairs . - Ss: answer .. - T: asks ss to answer the question .. - Ss: answer & compare .. - T: corrects mistakes . 6.

(66) * Post – reading(8') - T: asks ss to answer the questions in exercise A4 on page 46 about their school.. * Answer keys. a. There are 8 classrooms in Phong’s school. b. There are 400 students. c. There are 20 classrooms in Thu’s school. d. There are 900 students. 4. Answer. - Ss: answer .. - T: corrects mistakes. * Suggested answers. a. It’s in the country. b. There are 6 classrooms. c. There are 336 students. - T: asks ss to write a similar text with part A3 to talk about their school . - T: corrects mistakes.. - Ss: do & read in front of class . *5. Play with words. ( Optional). c. Consolidation(3'). - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask ss to practice asking answering about the quality with items of the class. - Do exercises 4,5 on page 37 and 38 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B1,2,3,4,5” before going to school.. 6.

(67) Date of preparing:30/9/2010. Date of teaching:4/10/2010 class 6A 4/10/2010 class 6B. PERIOD 22 UNIT 4 BIG OR SMALL? LESSON 3: B/ MY CLASS (B1,2,3,4,5) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students are able to ask and answer about the class and name of the class or grade; describe the school( classroom, class, & floors) know the ordinal numbers from first to tenth . + Structure: Which grade / class + be + S + in ? S + be + grade/ class.......... Which floor is classroom on ? it is on the second floor + Vocabulary:. - a floor(n)tầng - a grade(n) lớp(trình độ) - the first (adj) thứ nhất - the sixth(adj)thứ 6 - the second (adj) thứ 2 - the seventh(adj)thứ 7 - the third (adj) thứ 3 - the eighth (adj)thứ 8 - the fourth (adj) thứ 4 - the ninth (adj) thứ 9 - the fifth (adj) thứ 5 - the tenth (adj) thứ 10. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately. 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous. Students’ activities. 6.

(68) lesson(5'). - form : oral - Question: - Call 2 Ss to describe about their school.. *Possible answer. My school is in Thi Tran. It's small. It has 8 classrooms and there are two -hundred & fifty students.. To describe the school and know the ordinal numbers, we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(4') - T: hangs the picture on the board and asks students: (?) How many floors does the school have? - T: asks ss to remark the position of the class 7C. 1. Listen and repeat. Then practice * Pre – reading(8'). the dialogue with a partner. - T: Lets ss listen to the dialogue between Thu and Phong.( They are talking about the school).. - Ss: listen and repeat.. - T: introduces and explains some new words and structures.. - Ss: listen and write * New words. - floor (n) tầng - grade (n) khối - class (n) lớp - have (v) có * New structure. Which grade/ class are you in ? I’m in grade 6/ class 6A Which floor is your classroom? It’s on the second floor.. - T: asks ss to listen and repeat the words. Then give some examples using the structures. 6.

(69) - Ss: practice - T: ask ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Ss: practice in front of the class. - T: calls on some pairs to work it in front of the class and others listen and remark. - T: corrects their pronunciation if necessary. * While – reading(16'). 2. Complete the table.. - T: asks ss to read the dialogue of part 1 carefully and complete the table. - Ss: read and complete the table. - T: asks ss to compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: compare their answers. - T: calls some students go to the board to complete the table using the information from the dialogue and themselves. - Ss: go to the board to do exercise. - T: remarks and corrects if necessary.. * Answer key. Grade. Class. 7 6 6. 7C 6A 6B. Thu Phong You. - T: comes on asking ss to write three sentences about themselves.. 3. Write.. - T: calls on some students to go the board to write.. Ss: write. - T: remarks and corrects if necessary.. - Ss: write * Suggested answers. I’m in grade 6. I’m in class 6A. 6. Classroom’s floor. 2nd 1st 2nd.

(70) My classroom is on the first floor. - T: asks ss to look at the part 4. 4. Listen and repeat. - T: Lets ss listen and repeat the ordinal numbers from the “first” to “tenth” three times.. - Ss: look at the part 4.. - T: introduces the new words and calls some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation.. - Ss: listen and repeat.. * New words.. - T: Lets ss play “Rub out” and remember with the ordinal numbers.. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th first second third fourth fifth 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th sixth seventh eighth ninth tenth - Ss: play. * Post – reading(6') - T: asks ss to complete the dialogue. 5. Complete this dialogue. - T: asks ss to compare their answers - Ss: complete the dialogue. with a partner. - T: calls on some pairs to practice their completed dialogue in front of the class.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner.. - T: listens and remarks if necessary. - Ss: practice in front of the class. * Answer key. Thu: Is your school big ? Phong: No. It is small. Thu: How many floors does it have? Phong: It has two floors. Thu: Which class are you in ? Phong: I am in class 6A. Thu: Where is your classroom ? Phong: It’s on the first floor. c. Consolidation(3'). - Repeat the content of the lesson. 7.

(71) d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and the new lesson. - Do exercises in part B in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “C1,2,3” before going to school.. Date of preparing:30/9/2010. Date of teaching:4/10/2010 class6B 5/10/2010 class 6A. PERIOD 23 UNIT 4 BIG OR SMALL? LESSON 4: C/ MY CLASS (C1,2,3) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students are able to ask and answer about the daily activities ( habitual action). b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 7.

(72) 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5'). - Form: oral Question. - Do Exercise 4 in the workbook.. Students’ activities * Answer key. a. How many floors does your school have ? - There are two. / It has two How many floors does your school have ? - There are four/ It has four How many floors does your school have ? - There is one/ It has one How many floors does your school have ? - There are five/ It has five How many floors does your school have ? - There are eight hundred.. - T: Remarks. *To talk about the activities everyday , we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(4ms) T asks ss: -What do you do in the morning? afternoon? evening? Ss answer(in Vietnamese). 1. Listen and repeat. What do you do every morning?. * Presentation(8ms). - T: Presents new words by pictures/ 49.. -Ss look at the pictures and guess the meanings of them. * New words - get up: (v) - get dressed: (v) - brush: (v) - tooth: (n) - wash: (v) - have breakfast: (v) 7.

(73) - T: Reads and lets them read in chorus twice. - T: Calls some ss to read again. - T: Gets ss to play a game "slap the board". T.dậy. A.sán g. Đ.học. Đ.răng. M. quầ n áo R. mặt. - T: Guides ss to play the game. - T: Gives out examples with the present simple tense of the verbs. - T: Compares the verbs "conjugated" - T: Which verbs must add "es"? *Grammar. -The present simple tense of ordinary verbs. Eg1: I (you, we, they, Lan and Hoa) go to school. Eg2: He (she, it, Lan) goes to school - Notes: động từ đi với ngôi thứ 3 số ít ta phải thêm "s or es " còn các ngôi khác ta giữ nguyên. -Verbs end : sh, ch, o, x, ss, +es.. - T: Who can make the form ? - T: Plays the tape or reads part C1 and let them to repeat once.. * Form: S + V(s, es) + O - Ss: Listen and repeat.. *Practice(22ms).. 2. Practice with a partner.. - T: Lets them to practice with their friends( using the structure). - Ss: Practice with a partner. + What do you (we, they, Lan and Hoa) do every morning? + What does she (he, it , Lan) do every morning? Eg1: What do you do every morning? I get up .Then I get dressed .......... Eg2: What does she do every 7.

(74) morning? She gets up.......... 3. Write. - T: Calls some pairs to practice speaking. -T asks ss to write the sentences about Ba in their exercise books.. - Ss: write.. Begin with: Every morning, Ba gets up............... -T :Calls some Ss to read their writings.. -Ss read out the writing.. S1: S2: * Possible answer Every morning Ba gets up .Then he gets dressed .He brushes his teeth....... c. Consolidation(3ms). - Ask them to recall all content of this period. d. Guide the homework(2ms) - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and structures. - Write a short passage to talk about their daily activities in the morning. - Do exercise 1, 2 on page 41 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “C4,5,6,7”. Date of preparing:1/10/2010. PERIOD 24. Date of teaching: 5/10/2010 class 6B 7/10/2010 class 6A. . UNIT 4.BIG OR SMALL? LESSON 5. MY CLASS (C4,5,6,7). 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. 7.

(75) - By the end of the lesson, Students are able to ask and answer about time and the time of the daily activities. + Structure: What time is it? It’s + time What time do/ does + S + V? S + V(s/es) + at + time + Vocabulary:. - late( adj) muộn, trễ - half (n) 1/2, rưỡi. - a quarter (n)1/4, 15 phút - o’clock (adv) giờ. b. Skills - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately. 2TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5') Question - T: calls ss go to the board to match the English words in Column A with their Vietnamese meanings.. A 1. get up 2. wash the face 3. get dressed 4. have breakfast 5. brush teeth 6. go to school. Students’ activities. * Answer key. 1–d 2–e 3–f 4–b 5–a 6–c. B a. đánh răng b. ăn sáng c. đi học d. thức dậy e. rửa mặt f. mặc quần áo. 1. ....... 2. ....... 3. ........ 4. ....... 5. ....... 6. ........ - T: remarks and gets points. *To talk about time as well as time to do the activities , we study lesson today(1'). 7.

(76) b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(4') -What do you do in the morning?. Ss answer. 4. Listen and repeat. Then practice the dialogue with a partner.. * Presentation(8'). -T: asks ss to look at the picture: this is Ba & his friend . T asks ss : What does Ba do? Ss answer. - T: gets ss to read C4 & introduces new words.. - Ss: read new words & C4 in pairs * New words - time (n) thời gian - o’clock (adv)giờ - late (adj) muộn - Ss: answer * New structure which asking and answering about the time. What time is it? It’s + time. - T: Lets ss listen and repeat the tape twice.. - Ss: listen and repeat.. - T: calls some pairs to play the roles of Ba and Lan to practice the dialogue in front of the class.. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs. 5. Listen and repeat. “What time is it?”. - T: hangs the picture C5 and asks ss: -What time is it?. - Ss: answer.. - T: gets ss to read C5.. - Ss: read in choral & pairs .. -Which types of time we have?. - Ss: giờ đúng(chẵn) , lẻ. - T: gives example C5 & structure . 7.

(77) - Ss: write & read a. Giờ chẵn / đúng - Ss: gives out structure It’s + số đếm + o’clock b. Giờ lẻ It’s + số giờ + số phút * Giờ hơn It’s + số phút + past + số giờ * Giờ kém It’s + số phút + to + số giờ - T: ngoài cách nói giờ lẻ ở trên ta có 2 loại đó là giờ hơn & giờ kém. - T: gives out examples Ex: it’s ten o’clock. Ex: it’s ten fifteen. Ex: it’s fifteen past nine Ex: it’s twenty to one. (?) “ past, to” có nghĩa là gì ? (?) 1/4 của 1 giờ là bao nhiêu ? (?) 1/2 của 1 giờ là bao nhiêu ?. * Practice(15') - T: gets ss to practice in pairs part C5. - T: gives out clock in picture and gets ss to practice in pairs .. - Ss: answer + “ past” hơn, quá + “to” kém + fifteen = a quarter + thirty = half - Ss: practice in pairs . - Ss: practice in pairs S1: What time is it ? S2: It’s ten o’clock ........................... 6. Read. Ask sbd to do something at a point time. - T: corrects mistakes.. => Cta đã biết cách hỏi về giờ vậy muốn biết ai đó làm cv đó vào lúc mây giờ ta hỏi ntn ?. 7. Ss answer: Ex: What time do you get up ? I get up at six o’clock..

(78) What time do/ does + S + V? S + V(s/es) + at + time - T: gets ss to read silently C6.. - Ss: read.. - T: explain “at”.. - “at” là giới từ chỉ thời gian với nghĩa là “ vào lúc” mấy giờ.. - T: asks ss to repeat Ba’s activities.. - Ss: repeat C1.. - T: gets ss to read C6 and guides ss to do. - Ss: read and work in pairs .. - T: calls some pairs to practice in front of - Ss: practice in pairs . class. - T: corrects mistakes .. 7. Answer. Then write the answers.. * Production(7') - T: guides ss to do C7 about themselves.. - Ss: practice in pairs.. - T: calls ss to stand up to answer.. - Ss: answer. S1: What time do you get up? S2: I get up at 6 o’clock. S1: What time do you have breakfast? S2: I have breakfast at 6:30 S1: What time do you go to school? S2: I go to school at 6: 40.. - T: corrects mistakes. c. Consolidation(3'). - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and new structures which asking and answering about the time. - Do exercises 3,4,5,6 on page 41,42 and 43 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “UNIT 5: A1,2” before going to school.. 7.

(79) Date of preparing :13/10/2010. Date of teaching:18/10/2010 class 6A 18/10/2010 class 6B. PERIOD 25 . UNIT 5. THINGS I DO LESSON 1 MY DAY(A1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. -By the end of the lesson, Students are able to use the present simple tense to talk about daily routines . + Structure: What do/ does + S + do everyday? S + V(s/es) + Vocabulary:. - play( v ) chơi - do(v ) làm - day (n) ngày. - homework (n):bài tập ở nhà - every (det) mỗi - games (n) trò chơi. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5'). - Form: oral *Question: (?) What time do you get up / have breakfast/ go to school ? *To know the activities of a ss, we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson.. Students’ activities * Answer: I get up at ........../ have breakfast at........../ go to school at ..........?. 7.

(80) * Warm – up(5') - T: gets ss to play game “Slap the board” with the words.. - Ss: play game.. Go to school. Have breakfast. Get up. Get dressed. Wash face. Brush teeth. - T: remarks the winner . - T: asks some suggested questions to introduce the lesson. (?) Can you tell me your routines? (?) What about Nga ? and what she often does 1. Listen and repeat. then practice * Presentation(8') with a partner. - T: Asks ss to look at the pictures of part A1 and guess the meanings of new - Ss: listen and guess words. * New words. - play (v) chơi - game(n)trò chơi - homework(n) bài tập về nhà - do (v) làm - every (det) mỗi, mọi - T: Reads new words and letss ss to repeat twice.. - Ss: listen and repeat the words.. - T: Calls some Ss to read again.. - Ss: read the words again.. - T: Gives out 2 examples and explains. Ex1: What do you do every morning? -I get up. Ex2: What does she do after school? 8.

(81) - She plays games. - T: Shows them the difference of the verbs when the subject is the 3rd person singular.. - Ss: look at the board .. -T: asks ss: (?) Who can give out the form?. *Structures - Ss: give form. - Form: What do/ does + S + adv of time/ pre? S + V(s,es) + O.............. ->Do - you , we, they, (Lan and Hoa) ->Does - she, he, it, (Lan). + Adv of time : everyday, every morning, every afternoon, every evening. + Prep of time: after - Using: This structure is used to ask and answer about one's routines.. * Practice(13') - T: Plays the tape or reads part A1 and asks them to repeat twice.. - Ss: listen and repeat.. - T: Calls some Ss to read the text again.. - Ss: read the text again. 2. Look at exercise A1 again. Ask and answer with a partner.. - T:asks Ss to answer the questions in part A2.. - Ss work in pairs.. - T: Calls 2 Ss to give their answers on the board.. 8. - Practice in pairs. Eg a: S1:What does Nga do everyday ? S2:She gets up. -Pair 2.S1:What does she do every morning? S2:Every morning, she goes to school. - P3.S1:What does she does every afternoon? S2: Every afternoon, she plays game..

(82) - P4.S1:What does she do every evening? S2:Every evening, she does her homework. * Answers. a. She gets up. b. She goes to school. c. She plays games. d. She does her homework. - T: calls some others to check and correct. * Production(8') - T: asks Ss to write an essay on their daily activities.. - Ss: work in groups.. - T: calls some Ss to read their writings. - T: checks and corrects.. *Possible answer. I get up at six .Then I get dressed .I go to school at half past six.......... c. Consolidation(3'). - T: Let Ss to repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and reread the exercise 1 and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercises 1, 2 on page 44 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “ A3,4”.. Date of preparing:8/10/2010. Date of teaching:11/10/2010 class 6B 12/10/2010 class 6A. 8.

(83) PERIOD 26.. UNIT 5 THINGS I DO LESSON 2. MY DAY(A3,4). 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to talk about daily routines and activities after school . + Structure: What do/ does + S + do after school? S + V(s/es) + Vocabulary:. - watch( v )xem - housework (n) việc nhà - listen(v ) nghe - after (prep) sau , tiếp sau - read (v) đọc - music (n)âm nhạc. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately. 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5ms). *Question. - T: asks 2 Ss to do exercises 2,3 in workbook/ 44.. Students’ activities * Keys. Ex 2: b. brush g. have c. does h. watches d. do i. play e. play j. does f. go Ex3. b. What does she do? She play game. c. What does he do? He reads. d. What do they do? They play soccer. e. What does she do?. 8.

(84) She listens to music. *To talk about the activities of some ss and practice the listening and writing skills , we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(4ms) - T: asks ss some suggested questions: (?) What do you do after school? - Ss: I do my homework then I play games ,etc. * Presentation(8ms).. 3. Listen and repeat. Then practice the dialogue with a partner.. - T: Shows new words by pictures in part A3. - Ss guess the meaning of them. * New words. - watch (v) xem - housework (n) việc nhà - listen (v) lắng nghe - music (n) âm nhạc - read (v) đọc - after (prep) sau , tiếp sau - T: Reads new words and asks them to read in chorus twice. - T: calls 2 or 3 Ss to read them again. - T: lets ss play the game "Rub out and remember". - T: Cross out the words in English and ask Ss to look the words in Vietnamese and rewrite them in English. -Ss do as the teacher requests. * Pactice(16ms). - T: Playsthe tape or readspart A3 and asksSs to repeat twice. - T: asks ss to play the roles of Thu, Lan and Nam, Ba and talk about each person does after school. - T: shows the questions and the answers about activities after school. - T: asks Ss to look at the board and point out the differences between the 8.

(85) subjects and modal verbs in 2 examples. Ex1: What do you do after school? - I watch TV. Ex2: What does she do after school? - She watches TV. 4. Answer. Then write the answers in your exercise book. - T: asks Ss to do part A4. -Ss do part A4 (work in pairs) - T: gets 2 Ss to write their answers on the board. - T: lets other check and correct. - T: calls some pairs to do. - T: checks and corrects. - Pair 1. S1:What does Lan do after school? S2:Lan does the housework. S1:What does Ba do after school? S2:He watches television. - Pair 2. S1:What does Thu do after school? S2:She reads. S1:What does Nam do after school? S2:He listens to music. *Answer keys a. Lan does the homework after school. b. Ba watches TV after school. c. Nam listens to music. d. Thu reads book. - T: asks ss some questions: (?) What do you do after school? - S1: I do the housework. S2: I play soccer. Production(6ms) - T:asks ss to write 5 sentences about their daily activities. - T: cal some Ss to read their writings in front of the class. - T: checks and corrects their mistakes. 8.

(86) - Possible answer. Everyday, I get up at five then I get dressed .I have breakfast .I go to school in the morning .In the afternoon, I play soccer and I go home at five thirty...... c. Consolidation(3ms). - T:asks Ss to repeat all content of this period. d. Guide the homework(2ms). - Ask ss to learn by heat the new words - Do exercises 3,4 on page 44 and 45 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “A5,6” before going to school.. Planning date: Period 27 .. Teaching date: UNIT 5. THINGS I DO LESSON 3. A( 5, 6 ). 1.Objectives: a. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson ss are able to describe everyday routines using yes /no questions +Structure do/ does + S + V ? yes, + S + do/ does no, S + don’t /doesn’t +Vocabulary volleyball( n ) bóng chuyền soccer(n ) bóng đá sport (n) thể thao a girl (n) con gái a boy (n) con trai b. Skills: - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education: - Educate ss know to use language accurrately 2. Teaching aids a.T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson b.Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare lesson 8.

(87) 3. Teaching proceduces Teacher's activies a.Check the old lesson (5ms) -form: oral *Question: write again new words. Students' activities. *To describe everyday routines (using yes /no questions) , we study the lesson today (1m) b. The new lesson * Warm up - Who’s absent today? T: gets ss to play the game slap on the board with the new words in part A1, A2, A3, A4 - unit 5. *Answer to watch( v )xem housework (v)việc nhà to listen(v )nghe after (prep) sau to read (v) đọc television (n)tivi music (n)âm nhạc Play game. Ss: play game T: remarks the winner Play games watch TV Do the homework Play soccer read Do the housework go fishing Listen to music * Presetation(8ms) T: asks ss to look at the picture A5-54 ? what are they doing ? Ss: answer T: introduces new words by pictures Ss: write & read in choral & single +Vocabulary - volleyball( n ) bóng chuyền - soccer(n ) bóng đá - sport (n) thể thao - a girl (n) con gái - a boy (n) con trai ? muốn biết ai đó có làm or chơi cái gì đó k ta hỏi ntn ? 8.

(88) T: gives out example Ss: write Ex: does she play volleybal? Yes, she does = do / does + S + V + .....? yes, + S + do/ does no, S + don’t /doesn’t 3.Practice T: gets ss to read the dialogue Ss: read in choral & single T: calls ss to read in pairs Ss: read in pairs T: reads all the questions in A6-55 Ss: listen & answer T: calls ss to answer the questions in pairs Ss: answer T: corrects mistakes b. answer the question a. yes, I do / no, I don’t b. yes, I do / no, I don’t. c. yes, I do / no, I don’t. d. yes, I do / no, I don’t. e. yes, I do / no, I don’t f. yes, I do / no, I don’t g. yes, I do / no, I don’t Ss: play Ss: listen * Production(8ms) T: gets ss to play game “ matching”. Ss: read. T: remarks. T: gets ss to read again new words c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d. Homework (2ms) - Learn by heart vocabulary & structure - Do exercise 4, 5, 6 - p45,46 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 5 B 1, 2, 3 ” 8.

(89) ____________________________________________ Planning date: 02/11/08 Period 28.. Teaching date:. UNIT 5. THINGS I DO LESSON 4 . ( 1, 2, 3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about someone’s daily routines Ask for & say the time ofthe daily routines - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What time + do/ does + S + V ? S+ V+at (time ) To take a shower (v) tắm 2.Vocabulary To eat( v ) ăn To start (v ) bắt đầu To finish (v) kết thúc To have lunch (v) ăn trưa To go to bed (v) đi ngủ III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces. 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : -form: oral Question: write again new words c. introduce: T: gets ss to play game “ jumbled words” with words “ sehouekr ,tiseln, eard, mohework, awthc” 8. Writing. Answer: - volleyball( n ) bóng chuyền - soccer(n ) bóng đá - sport (n) thể thao - a girl (n) con gái.

(90) 10’. 15’. 10’. (3’). Ss: play - a boy (n) con trai T: the remark & the winner Play game 2. Pre- reading Housework, listen, read, homework, T: ask ss talk again about activities in day & watch time do these activities Ss: answer 1. Vocabulary T: ask ss look at the picture B1-56 - To take a shower (v) tắm ? what is he doing / are they doing ? - To eat( v ) ăn Ss: answer - To start (v ) bắt đầu T: give out new words ,structures & gets ss - To finish (v) kết thúc read - To have lunch (v) ăn trưa Ss: write & read in choral & single - To go to bed (v) đi ngủ T: correct mistakes = What time + do/ does + S + V ? T: gets ss guess about the time of Ba’s action S+ V+at (time ) 3. While-reading 1. complete the table T: read the diloague 1 time Ss: read action time time T: ask ss to give ouy the correct answer for Ba Me table in part B2-57 Get up 6:00 T: gets ss read the diloague Go to school 6:45 Ss: read in choral & single Classes start 7:00 T: gets ss practise complete the information of Classes finish 11:15 themself Have lunch 11:30 Ss: complete Go home 5:00 4. Post- reading Go to bed 10:00 T: ask ss to practise in pairs complete the information B2,3 Ss: practise 3. Practice T: call some pairs practise in front of class Ss: practise T: correct mistakes 5. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary - Do exercise 1, 2, 3-47, 48 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 5 C 1 ”. Planning date : 03/11/08 Period 29 :. Teaching date :. UNIT 5: THINGS I DO LESSON 5 : C ( 1 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to discrible school timetable & talk some subject at school - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 9.

(91) 1.Structure What do we have today ? - we have E We have E from 7:00 to 7:45 We have E at 7:00 2.Vocabulary. a class( n ) tiết học A time table (n )thời khoá biểu monday (n) thứ 2 math(n )môn toán literature(n) môn văn history (n) môn lịch sử geography (n) môn địa lý. III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 12’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : -form: 10’ *Question: write the number into letter in your paper 10’? 7:00. 7:45 8:35. 9:25 10:20. 7:50 9:35 7:50 c. introduce: T: gets ss play game “ slap the board” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 8’. 2. Presentation T: give out a timetable & ask ss ? what is this ? Ss: answer T: ask ss look at the picture -58 & introduce new words Ss: answer T: gets ss read Ss: read in choral & single T; để biết hôm nay cta có những môn học nào hỏi & trả lời ntn ta có vd sau 9. Writing * answer: - seven o’clock -seven forty- five - nine twenty- five - eight thirty- five - ten twenty - seven fifty - nine thirty - five - seven fifty Play game: - To take a shower (v) tắm - To eat( v ) - To start (v ) bắt đầu - To finish (v) kết thúc - To have lunch (v) ăn trưa - To go to bed (v) đi ngủ 1. Vocabulary - a class( n ) tiết học - A time table (n )thời khoá biểu - monday (n) thứ 2 - math(n )môn toán - literature(n) môn văn - history (n) môn lịch sử - geography (n) môn địa lý.

(92) Ss: write example & give out structure Ex: what do we have today ? We have E , math T: cta có thể hỏi có môn học đó khi nào ta = what +do /does+ S + have + on có vd sau Today ? Ss: write & give out structure S + have/ has+ name of subject Ex: when do we have math? We have math from 9:5 to 10:50 We have math at 9:5 = when + do/ does + S + have + name of subject S + has/ have + name of subject + from.......+ to...... S + has/ have + name of subject 3. Practice Ex: S1: what do we have today ? S2: We have E , math S1: when do we have math? S2: We have math from 9:5 to10:50 S2 We have math at 9:5. 12’ 3. Practice T: gets ss listen part C1 Ss: listen & read in choral T: call some ss read in single Ss: read in single T: correct mistakes T: gets ss practise seaking using words cue-drill E: 1:15 – 2:00 Math 2:5 - 2:50 History 3:5 – 3:50 Literature 3:55 -4:40 Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes 10’ 4. Production T: gets ss play game “slap the board” Play game Ss: play Timetable history T: the remark & the winner Literature today T: ask ss to make a timetable then ask Math Monday answer about the timetable Geography English Ss: practice in pairs T: call ss to atand up to answer Ss: answer (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary & structure - Do exercise 1, 2- 50, 51 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 5 C 2, 3 ”./. ___________________________________________. 9.

(93) Date of planning :28/10/2010. Period 31 :. Date of teaching :1/11/2010 class 6A 1/11/2010 class 6B GRAMMAR PRACTICE. 1. Objectives a. Knowledge By the end of the lesson, Ss are may be to practice th learned grammar. - Vocabularies : Review - structure : - Review present simple of tobe and ordinal verb - Wh- questions b. skills : - practice writing , doing exercise - Help develop the student’s language. -Practice the ways to do some exrcises c. Education - teach Ss to love subjects they learn at school.. 2. Teaching aids. a.Teacher : book , lesson plan, reference book, board. b. Students : book ,workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3.Teaching procedure Teacher'activities Students'activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question :Ss write days of week * Answer: - Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, thursday, Friday, saturday, * Today we learn grammar Sunday practice.This lesson help you review what we learnt in Unit 4 & 5(1'). b.The new lesson * Warm up (5' ) T asks Ss some questions ? What time do you get up? ? What do you do every morning ? ? What do you do after school ? ? What do you have today ?. Ss answer I get up at..... I do my homework. I play games. I have English, math, .... * Practice (30' ) T asks Ss to do exercise. 9.

(94) T repeats the present simple with ordinary verbs.. Exercise 1 Ss write on notebook. I / you / we / they- get up she / he / Ba -gets up I / you / we / they- have she / he / it /- has I / you / we / they- wash she / he / it -washes ………………. Ss do exercises a, get up What time do you get up ? + I get up at six. What time does he get up ? + He gets up at six . What time do they get up ? + They get up at six . b, Have What time do you have breakfast ? + I have breakfast……. What time does she have breakfast ? + She has breakfast….. What time do they have breakfast ? + They have breakfast ….. c, Go What time do you go to school ? + I go to school ….. What time do they go to school ? + they go to school ….. What time does he go to school ? + He goes to school…….. d. wash Do you wash your face in the morning? Yes. I wash my face. Does he wash his face in the morning? Yes . He washes his face .. T Calls Ss to give answers . T corrects mistakes. T reviews the ways to say time.. Exercise 2. + Half : nửa giờ + a quarter : 1 phần tư giờ. Ss practice to ask and answer. Example exchange What time is it ? a, It’s seven o’clock. b, It’s a quarter past nine. c, It’s halp past four. It’s four twenty. d, It’s twelve o’clock . e, It’s one fourty – five. f, It’s nine – fifty.. T Calls Ss to ask and answer . T Listens and corrects. 9.

(95) Exercise 3 Is your school big ? + yes, it is. Is your school small ? + No, it isn’t. T Asks Ss to review Question- words.. Exercise 4 Ss do exercise Example exchange a, Where is your house ? + It’s on ……………………… b, How many floors + It has two. c, What is your name ? My name’s Nga . d, How do you …. e, Which / what school………. + I go to……. f, Which grade are …….. + I’m in ……... T reviews. Exercise 5 Ss ask and answer . a, When do we have literature ? We have it on ........... b, When do we have Math ? + We have it on…..... c, When do you have geography ? + We have it on…..... d, Which classes do you have on Friday ? + We have English,….... e, Which classes do you have on Monday ? + We have Math,…...... T asks Ss to practice asking and answering about themselves.. Exercise 6 a. What time do you get up ? + I get up at six. b. What time do you go to school ? + I go to school at …. c. What time do classes start? + Classes start at…. d. What time do slasses end? + Classes end at… e. What time do you have lunch? + I have lunch at twelve. f, yes, I do. g, No, I don’t. h, I go to bed at… T calls some Ss to ask and answer. Listens and corrects .. Exercise 7 a, gets 9. d, has.

(96) b, takes c, brushes. c. Consolidation(2') T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2' ) -T asks Ss to do the exercises - review new words and structures. -prepare new lesson.. Date of planning:28/10/2010. e, goes. Date of teaching 1/11/2010 class 6B 2/11/2010 class 6A. Period 32 . UNIT 6 . PLACES Lesson 1 . Our House ( A1, 2,3 ). 1. Objectives a. Knowledge: After lesson ss are able to introduce themshelves,discribe the place they live. - Vocabularies : lake, river, hotel, yard, park, rice paddy, tree, near - structure : There is a hotel near the park There are trees and flowers….. b. skills : - practice reading , speaking, and writing . - describe the place they are living, ask and answer about the place. -develop the students language and their ability to discribe a place… c. Education - teach Ss to love the place they live , take care of their neighbor hood. 2. Teaching aids a.Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, tape, stereo. b. Students : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3.Teaching procedure Teacher's activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : T asks Ss to go to the board and answer the questions : a, What time do you get up ? b, When do you have English ?. Students' activities *Answer a, I get up at six b, I have English on Monday, Wednesday and Thursday c , yes , I do.. c,Do you play soccer after school ? * Today we learn Unit 6. This lesson will help us how to describe the place you live(1'). b. New lesson *warm up ( 2ms) T asks Ss some questions : ? What are there near your house ? *presentation (8ms) T asks Ss to look at the pictures and describe. 9. a hotel, a lake, a restaurant,.

(97) Ss look at the picture.. T introduces new words. *new words Ss write in the notebook yard (n) : cái sân lake (n) hồ hotel (n) khách sạn park (n) công viên river (n) sông tree (n) cây flower (n) hoa rice paddy (n ) đồng lúa near ( adv ) gần , cạnh. T presents model sentences. *practice (15') T asks ss to listen and repeat.. There is a hotel. There are flowers and trees. 1.Listen and read. Then ask and answer. T calls some ss to read loudly.. Ss listen.. T asks ss to answer the questions: a, How old is Thuy ? b, What does she do ? c, What’s her brother’s name ? d, How old is he ? e , Where does Thuy live ? f , What’s there , near the house ?. Ss practice reading the text.. Ss practice reading and answer. *Answer  She is twelve years old .  She is a student.  her brother’s name is Minh .  He is twenty. T asks ss to look at the picture then ask  She lives in a house near the lake . and answer.  There is a river ,a lake, a hotel, a park, and T repeats the structures. rice paddy. ? What is that ? – It’s a hotel. ? What are those ? – They are trees . 2.Practice T calls some ss to practice. Listens and checks. Ss work in pairs. What is that ? It’s a park. What is that ? It’s a river. What are these ? They are trees.. *production (10') T asks ss to describe the sights around their house. 9.

(98) USE : there is ………./ There are……. What is that ? It’s a lake. 3.Write. Complete the sentences. T asks Ss to look at the picture and write Ss write . There is a yard. There is a river near my house. There is a rice paddy near the river. Our house has a yard . It’s near the rice paddy . There is a hotel near the lake . There is a river and a park . There are trees and flowers in the park.. T calls some ss to write on the board. T corrects. c. Consolidation(2') -T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2') -T asks Ss to learn lesson . -D1,2 page 60,61in the wb. -prepare new lesson .. Date of planning:28/10/2010. Date of teaching :2/11/2010 class 6B 4/11/2010 class 6A. Period 33. UNIT 6. PLACES Lesson 2 . Our House (A4,5,6 ) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge - Vocabularies : town, village. - structure : There is a….. there are….. b. skills : - practice listening and writing the words. - Practice writing about the place they live . - Help develop the students’ language and their imagine. c. Education - teach ss to take care of place they live. 2. Teaching aids a.Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, tape, reference book. b. Students : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure a. Checking the 9.

(99) previous lesson (15') * Question : Write sentences using there is / there are a, a river/ near / house b, a park / near / house c, trees and flowers / in the park d, a rice paddy / near / river * Today we continue to learn Unit 6- A 4,5,6,7 to describe something near your house(1').. * Answer: a, There is a river near my house . b, There is a park near my house. c, There are trees and flowers in the park. d,There is a rice paddy near a river .. S answer. Yes, I do No, I don’t There is a....... 4.Listen. Write the words you hear.. Ss write in the notebook *new words b .The New lesson town (n) thị trấn, thị xã *warm up (2') village (n) làng, quê ? Do you live in the country? ? Do you live in the City ? Ss listen and write. ? What are there near a, hotel your house? b, county *Prec, rice-paddy / river Listening(5') T explains the Ss write. requirement and present some new words. Ss write. There is a……. There are …….. Ss work individually. *Practice(10') T asks ss to listen and write the words they hear. a, There’s a hotel near the park. b, We live in the country. c, the rice- paddy is on MeKong river. T calls some ss to write on the board. T presents thepictures. Then T helps ss review model. a, there is a hotel near our house. b, There are trees near my house. c, There is a river near my house. d, There is a lake near my house. e, There is a school near my house. f, There is a rice –paddy near my house .. 5.Write sentences Ss practice writing. There are trees near my house. There is a river near my house. ...................................................... ....................................................... 6. Play with words 9.

(100) sentences.. Ss read.. T calls some ss to write on the board. T asks the rest to correct. T corrects. *Production (8') T asks ss to describe their house or place they live.. Calls some Ss to read their writing Listens and corrects. T asks ss to read the text. T calls some ss to read. Corrects mistakes. c.Consolidation(2') T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2') -Do exercise 3,4 page 62 in workbook. -Learn all new words. -Prepare new lesson.. Date of planning: 3/11/2010. Date of teaching :8/11/2010 class 6A 11/11/2010 class 6B. Period 34 . UNIT 6 .PLACES Lesson 3 :In the city (B1,2,3 ). 1. Objectives a. Knowledge: After lesson ss maybe describe the place where they live(in the city). + Vocabularies : restaurant,bookstore, temple, hospital, factory, museum, stadium, neighborhood, work, look, next to 1.

(101) +prepositions : in, on, near, next to......... + structure : Their house is next to a store. There is a………/ There are ….. b. skills : - practice reading and talking about place ask and answer the question about the place. - describe a place / neighborhood. - develope the students’ language and their imagine. c. Education - teach Ss to take care of the place they live. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book. b. Students : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure Teacher's activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') *Question : describe your house.. Students' activities *Answer My house is beautiful. It has a yard. There is a lake and a park near my house.. * Today we continue to learn Unit 6- B1,2,3, know to describe the places near your house(1'). b. New lesson *warm up (2') T asks : ? Where do you live ? ? What is there , near your house?. Ss answer.  I live in the city  There is a park, a hotel… 1. Listen and read.Then answer the questions Ss look at the picture.. * presentation (8') T asks ss to look at the picture . T presents new words .. Ss write in the notebook. * new words neighborhood (n) hàng xóm, khu vực store (n) cửa hàng restaurant (n) nhà hàng ăn uống temple (n) đình , miếu bookstore (n) hiệu sách hospital (n) bệnh viện factory (n) nhà máy museum (n) bảo tàng stadium (n) sân vận động work (v) làm việc next to (adv) gần sát , cạnh. 1.

(102) T asks ss to play the game: rub out and remember . T reviews the structure. * Practice(17') T asks ss to listen to the text.. Ss practice. -There is a hotel near the restaurant. -There are some stores. Ss listen . Ss work in group.. T asks ss to practice reading the text.. a, Minh lives in the country . (F) bThere are four people in his family.(F) T asks ss to write true (T) or c, Their house is next to a bookstore (F) false (F) d,There is a museum near their house.(T) statements. e,Minh’s mother works in a factory. (F) f, Minh’s father works in a hospital. (F) 2. Read Ex B1.Then complete the sentences. T calls some ss to answer . Listens and checks.. Ss answer .  He lives in the city  There are four…... T asks some questions and calls ss to answer. ->Yes, there is . ->He is a... ->................................. ? Where does Minh live ? ? How many people are there in his family ? ? Is there a bookstore near his house ? ? What does his father do ? ? Does his mother work in a factory? T asks ss to complete the statements(using the information in B1).. Ss work individually. a, Minh and his family live in the city. b, On the street, there is a restaurant , a bookstore and a temple. c, His mother works in a hospital. d, Minh’s house is next to a store . e, His father works in a factory. Ss practice reading the word by word in the list. 3. Listen. Ss listen and write ..  museum T calls some ss to read their  bookstore writing. T listens and corrects. T asks ss to look at the list  river and read.  street 1.

(103) T helps ss to remember the pronunciation Ss work in pairs. and meaning of each words. T asks ss to listen and write the words they hear……. TAPE a, There are three museums in the city. b,The bookstore is on the other side of the street. c, She walks a long the river every morning . d, Children can’t play soccer on the street.. Answer:  I live in the country .  There is a river , a rice paddy.......  He is a teacher ,etc. ………………............ ..................................... T calls some ss to answer . T listens and corrects. *Production (8') T asks ss to practice asking and answering about themselves . ? Where do you live? ? What is there , near your house ? ? Where does your father work ? ? What does your mother do ? ? Where does she work ………?. T calls some ss to practice in class . T listens and checks. c. Consolidation(2') -T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2') -learn new words. -practice reading the text. -do exercise 1,2 page 63 in the workbook. -prepare new lesson.. 1.

(104) Date of planning3/11/2010. Date of teaching 8/11/2010 class 6B 9/11/2010 class 6A. Period 35. UNIT 6 . PLACES Lesson 4 . Around the house (C1,2 ). 1. Objectives. a.Knowledge:After lesson ss maybe describe something aruond the house, ask and answer about the places. + Vocabularies : mountain, well, in front of, to the left, to the right...... +structure : there is …… there are….. b. skills : - practice reading and answer the questions - ask and answer about things around the house - develope the students’ language and their imagine. c.Education - teach ss to know how to take care of their house and the place they live.. 2. Teaching aids. a.Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book. b. Students : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson.. 3. Teaching procedure. Teacher's activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') *Question : T asks ss to write new words.. Students' activities *Answer neighborhood factory store museum restaurant work temple bookstore hospital. * Today we continue to learn Unit 6 with the topic: Something is around the house(1'). b.New lesson *warm up (3' ) T asks ss to answer : - Is your house big or small? - How many rooms are there in your house? - What are there, around your house ?. It is big/ small. There are.... There is a ..... *presentation (8' ). 1.Listen and read.Then ask and answer. T asks ss to look at the picture and describe.. Ss do.. T presents new words.. Ss write in the notebook. 1.

(105) * new words mountain (n) núi behind (prep) phía sau well (n) cái giếng to the left (prep) bên trái to the right (prep) bên phải in front of (prep) phía trước between (prep) ở giữa. T reads the words. T presents the model sentences:. Ss repeat. Where is the house ? Where are flowers ? They are in front of the house.. *practice (16') T asks ss to read the text. T asks ss to practice reading and answer :. Ss practice reading.. a, Where is the yard ? b, Where are the tall trees ? c, Where are the mountain ? d,Where is the well ? e, Where are the flowers ? f, Where is the house ? T calls ss to practice asking and answering.. Ss answer the questions. a, It is in front of the house . b, They are behind the house . c, They are behind the tall trees . d, It’s to the left of the house. e, They are to the right of the house. f, It’s between the well and flowers.. T checks and corrects .. Ss practice asking and answering in pairs.. T asks ss to look at the picture in A2. T explains the requirement. T asks ss to listen and choose.. 2. Listen and find........ TAPE a, Ba’s house is beautiful.There are flowers in front of the house . b,There is a tall tree to the right of Lan’s house. c, There is a well to the left and some flowers to the right of Tuan’s house.. Ss listen carefully and choose. a–A b–B c–B. T calls some ss to answer . Correts mistakes. *production (8') T asks ss to describe their house : big/small house What is there : - In front of - to the left - to the right..... Ss describe. My house is small. In front of my house there is a yard. To the left of the house, there is a well. To the right of the house, there are some 1.

(106) fruit trees. Behind the house, there are mountains........... T calls some ss to talk about their house . T listens and checks. c.Consolidation(2') T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2') - learn new words . - practice reading the text and describe your house. - do the exercise 1 page 64,65 wb. - prepare new lesson.. Date of planning: 3/11/2010. Date of teaching: 9/11/2010 class 6B 11/11/2010 class 6A Period 36 . UNIT 6 . PLACES Lesson 5. Around the house (C3,4,5,6). 1. Objectives a.Knowledge After lesson ss maybe: describe something on the street. Ask and answer the place they live. + Vocabularies : drugstore, bakery, movie theater, police station, toystore, + structure : There is a……. There are ……. b. skills : - practice reading , ask and answer the questions, describe a street or something around the house. - develop the students’ language . c. Education - teach Ss to take care of the nature and the place they live. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book. b. Students : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure Teacher's activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : Calls ss to go to the board to describe their house. * Today we continue to learn Unit 6- C 3,4,5,6 to describe something on a street(1') . b. new lesson *warm up ( 2') T asks Ss some questions : ? Where do you live? ? What’s there , in your. Students' activities *Answer My house has a yard. In front of the yard , there are flowers. To the left of the house there is ….. Ss answer I live in / on…. There is a/an…… 3. Listen and read. 1.

(107) neighborhood? *presentation (8') T introduces the picture . T presents new words :. Ss look at the picture and write new words in the notebook. * new words drugstore (n) hiệu thuốc movie theatre (n) rạp chiếu phim bakery (n) tiệm bánh mỳ photocoppy store (n) hiệu phô tô cop py police station (n) đồn công an toystore (n) cửa hàng đồ chơi opposite (prep) đối diện Ss listen and repeats.. T reads. T calls ss to read. Corrects mistakes. T asks ss to play "rubout and remember". *practice (17'). Ss play. 4.Practice a, Ask and answer Ss listen to the tape.. T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape.. Ss practice reading.. T asks ss to practice reading.. Some ss read.. T calls some ss to read loudly in class. T listens and corrects. T asks ss to practice asking and answering the questions: * Where is the..........? It is next to the.......... It is opposite the ...... T does model with some Ss. Tasks ss to work in pairs.. Ss listen to the teacher. Ss work in pairs. - Where is the photocoppy store ? + It’s next to the bakery. - Where is the bakery ? + It’s between the photocoppy and movie theatre. - Where is the drugstore ? + It’s opposite the restaurant. - Where is the police station ? + It’s next to a toystore.. b,Play the guessing game T calls some pairs to practice in class. Ss listento the teacher. Listens and corrects. T asks ss to play guessing game. 1.

(108) T explains the requirement. T asks Ss to play. - It’s opposite the movie theatre . What’s this ? + It’s the police station. T asks Ss to practice in pairs .. Ss practice in pairs . 1, It’s opposite the bakery. What’s this ?  It’s a toystore. Yes, that’s right. 2, It’s between the bakery and the drugstore . What’s this ? 3, It’s next to the bakery . 4, It’s opposite the bookstore. ...................................... Ss ask and answer about their own house.. Calls some pairs to practice . Listens and corrects . *production (8') T asks ss to answer the questions about their house(part 5). - What’s in front of your house ? - What’s behind your house ? T listens and corrects.. It is a yard. There are tall trees.. c. Consolidation(2') T repeats the lesson by remember part 6. d. Homework (2') - Learn new words. - Practice reading the text and ask and answer the questions. - Do the exercise 3 page 65 wb. - Review and prepare for the test.. Date of planning:10/11/2010. Date of teaching:15/11/2010 class 6A 15/11/2010 class 6B TEST 45 minutes. Period 37. 1 . Objectives a. Knowledge : -Use the learned knowledge to do the test 45 minutes. b. Skills: - practice writing , reading and listening. c.Education: -Enjoy English, strict to do the test. 2. QUESTIONS 1.

(109) QUESTION 1 I. Listen and choose the word you hear (2 points) 1. We live in the city/ country. 2. There is a well to the left/ right of the house 3. There is a museum/ stadium near my house. 4. She goes to the bookstore/ store. II. Use the correct form of the verbs(2points) 1. She ..................an engineer. (be) 2. They .................. soccer. ( play) 3. Nam ...................a big breakfast. (eat) 4. Mr Ha....................in a factory. (work) III. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B (2 points) A B 1. Do you play soccer ? a. She gets up at six. 2. Which grade are you in ? b. Yes, I do. 3. What time does she get up ? c. He listens to music. 4. What does Nam do after school ? d. I am in grade 6. IV. Read and write the statements true (T) or False (F) (2points) Thuy is a student . She is twelve years old . She lives in the city with her father, mother , and brother . Her house is next to a hotel . On the street , there is a restaurant , a store and a toystore. Thuy’s father is a doctor . He works in a hospital . Her mother is a teacher. She works at school . Everyday Thuy gets up at 6.00 and she goes to school at 6.30. 1. ...............Thuy lives in the city. 2. ...............There are five people in her family. 3. ...............There is a restaurant next to her house. 4. ...............Her mother works in a school. V. Complete the sentences( 2 points) 1. The yard/ in front of / the house/is. 2. time/do/What/go/you/school/to/? 3. There/ a well/ left /the house/is/the/to/of. 4. There/ mountains/ behind/the house/are. QUESTION 2 I. Listen and choose the word you hear (2 points) 1. a teacher b. doctor 2. a near b. opposite 3. a house b. hotel 4. a street b. tree. c. nurse c. next to c. store c. rice paddy. II. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B (2 points) A B 1. Do you play soccer ? a. She gets up at six. 2. Which grade are you in ? b. Yes, I do. 3. What time does she get up ? c. He listens to music. 4. What does Nam do after school ? d. I am in grade 6. III. Use the correct form of the verbs(2points) 1. She ..................an engineer. (be) 2. They .................. soccer. ( play) 3. Nam ...................a big breakfast. (eat) 4. Mr Ha....................in a factory . (work) IV. Read and answer the questions (2points) 1.

(110) Thuy is a student . She is twelve years old . She lives in the city with her father, mother , and brother. Everyday, Thuy gets up at six. She eats breakfast and she goes to school at six thirty. Her house is next to her school . On the street , there is a restaurant , a store and a toystore. Thuy’s father is a doctor . He works in a hospital . Her mother is a teacher. She works at school . 1. Where does Thuy live ? 2. What time does she go to school ? 3. What does Thuy’s father do ? 4. Where does her mother work ? V. Complete the sentences( 2 points) 1. The yard/ in front of / house. 2. The movie theater/ opposite / police station. 3. There/ a well/ left /the house. 4. There/ mountains/ behind/ house.. 3.Answer ANSWER 1 I. Listen and choose the word you hear (2 points) 1. city 2. left 3. stadium 4. store II. Use the correct form of the verbs(2points) 1. is 2. play 3. eats. 4. works. III. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B (2 points) 1+ b 2+ d 3+ a 4+ c IV. Read and write the statements true (T) or False (F) (2points) 1–T 2–F 3–F 4–T V. Complete the sentences( 2 points) 1. The yard is in front of the house 2. What time do you go to school? 3. There is a well to the left of the house. 4. There are mountains behind the house.. Answer 2 I. Listen and choose the word you hear (2 points) 1. She is a nurse. (c) 2. The toystore is opposite the bakery. (b) 3. My house is next to a hotel. (b) 4. We live on Le Loi street. (a). 1.

(111) II. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B (2 points) 1+ b 2+ d 3+ a 4+ c III. Use the correct form of the verbs(2points) 1. is 2. play 3. eats. 4. works. IV. Read and answer the questions (2points) 1.Thuy lives in the city. 2.She goes to school at six thirty. 3.He is a doctor. 4.She works in a school.. Date of planning:10/11/2010. Date of teaching: 15/11/2010 class 6B 16/11/2010 class 6A Period 38. CORRECT THE TEST. 1. Objectives a.Knowledge: - correct all the test b.skills: - help Ss to remember the grammar and vocabulary c.Education: - show the ss the mistakes they often make. 2.Teaching aids a. Teacher: English book, WB, Teaching plan. b.Students: Prepare lesson. 3.Procedure: a. Check the old lesson:(no) * To know the mistakes of the test , we study the lesson today(1').. b. The new lesson(35'). ANSWER 1. I. Listen and choose the word you hear (2 points) 1. city 2. left 3. stadium 4. store II. Use the correct form of the verbs(2points) 1. is 2. play 3. eats. 4. works. III. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B (2 points) 1+ b 2+ d 3+ a 4+ c IV. Read and write the statements true (T) or False (F) (2points) 1–T 2–F 3–F 4–T V. Complete the sentences( 2 points) 1. The yard is in front of the house 2. What time do you go to school? 3. There is a well to the left of the house. 11.

(112) 4. There are mountains behind the house.. Answer 2 I. Listen and choose the word you hear (2 points) 1. She is a nurse. (c) 2. The toystore is opposite the bakery. (b) 3. My house is next to a hotel. (b) 4. We live on Le Loi street. (a) II. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B (2 points) 1+ b 2+ d 3+ a 4+ c III. Use the correct form of the verbs(2points) 1. is 2. play 3. eats. 4. works. IV. Read and answer the questions (2points) 1.Thuy lives in the city. 2.She goes to school at six thirty. 3.He is a doctor. 4.She works in a school. V. Complete the sentences( 2 points) 1. The yard is in front of the house. 2. The movie theater is opposite the police station. 3. There is a well to the left of the house. 4. There are mountains behind the house. 3. Teacher's remark(8') *Knowledge: ........................................................................................................................................ ...………………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................ *Skills: ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ *Attitude ........................................................................................................................................ .... ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ -T calls marks. * Homework(1m): Prepare new lesson:Unit 7 (A1,2).. 1.

(113) Date of planning:11/11/2010 Period 39.. Date of teaching 16/11/2010 class 6B 17/11/2010 class 6A UNIT 7. YOUR HOUSE Lesson 1 . Is your house big ? (A1,2). 1. Objectives a. Knowledge: -After lesson ss maybe describe their house and everything near the house. - Vocabularies : . - structure : Is your house big ? yes, it is Is there a yard ? yes, there is Are there any flowers ? yes, there are b. skills : - practice reading , listening , ask and answer about the house . - develop the students’ language and enjoy to study English. c. Education - teach Ss to take care of their house . 2Teaching aids a. Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book. b. Students : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3 Teaching procedure a. Checking the previous lesson (No) * Today we learn Unit 7. the topic is your house(1m). b. New lesson *warm up ( 4') T asks ss to play the Network hospital yard trees garden Around the house well flowers *Presentation(8') T presents the picture.. hotel Ss look at the picture in the book and answer the questions. - It is a house. - They are flowers. - There are two.. ? What is this? ? What are these? ? How many people are there? ? What are they talking about?. - Ss guess. Ss write in the notebook. Is there a yard ? Yes, there is. No, there isn’t.. T introduces the model:. 1.

(114) Are there any flowers ? Yes, there are. No, there aren’t.. T asks ss to listen to the dialogue. * Practice(18') T asks ss to listen and repeat.. Ss listen .. Tasks ss to practice reading the dialogue.. Ss listen and repeat.. T calls some pairs to read. T asks ss to practice asking and answering the questions: Is your house big ? No, it isn’t. Is there a yard ? Yes, there is.. Ss practice reading in pairs.. Ss answer. Is your house small ? Yes, it is. Is there a well ? yes, there is. is there a yard ? Yes, there is . Are there any flowers ? yes , there are . Are there any trees ? No, there aren’t.. T calls some pairs to practice . T listens and corrects. T asks ss to look at the picture.. 2. Listen.and read.Then match. T presents the letter. T read the letter.. Ss look at and listen. T asks ss to read the letter in silence and do exercise .. Ss match the questions with suitable answers.. T calls some pairs to read the answer. T listens and corrects.. a–D b–A c–E d–B e–C. * production (10' ) T asks ss to write the same letter (describe their own house). Ss practice writing.. T calls ss to read their letter. T listens and checks.. Dear Nga, Thank you for your letter. I live in the 1.

(115) country . My house is small but it is beautiful , there is a yard in front of the house . There are some flowers to the left and ……. c. Consolidation(2') -T repeats the lesson. d.homework (2') -T asks ss to practice asking and answering the questions. - Practice asking and answering the questions . - Do the exercise 1page 66 WB. - prepare new lesson.. Date of planning:17/11/2010. Date of teaching :22/11/2010 class 6A 22/11/2010 class 6B Period 40 . UNIT 7. YOUR HOUSE Lesson 2 . Is your house big ? (A 3,4,5,6 ). 1Objectives a.Knowledge:After lesson ss may reach: -Describe places around their house. -Ask and answer about the places. - Vocabularies : supermarket , bank , post office - structure : + Is there a ….? + Are there …..? b. skills : - practice speaking , describe a house and around the house . - Ask and answer about the house c. Education: - teach ss to take care of things in their house /livingroom. 2Teaching aids a.Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, tape, stereo. b. Students : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching pocedure a. Checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : Ask and answer - Is your house big ? - Is there a yard ? -Are there flowers? * Last period we knew how to ask and answer about the things around us. This lesson we review these questions(1m). b. New lesson *warm up (3ms) T asks ss to play chain game.. Ss answer.. Ss play this game. S1: My house has a yard. S2: My house has a yard and a well. 1.

(116) * Presentation(8') T asks ss to look at the pictures( say the name of the places). T introduces new words.. T asks ss to review the questions:. S3: ........................... Ss look at the picture. Ss write in the notebook. new words bank (n) ngân hàng supermarket (n) siêu thị post office (n) bưu điện What is this/ that ? It is a/ an.... What are these/ those ? They are......... *Practice(16ms) T asks ss to practice in pairs. T calls some ss to practice.. Calls some Ss to answer. Listens and corrects. Helps Ss to review these questions.. T:asks ss to ask and answer in pairs using the pictures in the book or the places they learnt in last periods.. T Calsl some Ss to ask and answer in class Listens and corrects.. Ss practice in pairs. What are these ? They are flowers. What is this ? It is a bank. What is this ? It’s a supermarket. What is that ? It is a restaurant. What is that ? It is a hospital. ............................ Ss write in the notebook. -Is there a hotel near your house ? -yes, there is/ No, there isn’t. -Are there any flowers near your house ? -Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t.. Ss work in pairs. -Is there the bank near your house ? -yes, there is -s there a restaurant near your house ? -No, there isn’t -Are there any mountains near your house ? -Yes, there are. -Is there a bookstore near your house / -Yes, there is. Ss practice. 1.

(117) T asks ss to look at the pictures(A4) and choose one of three houses. Don’t tell the partner then ask questions to find the house. *production (8ms) T asks ss to listen to the tape and find the house .. 4. Choose one of the house Is there a…….? Are there any mountains ……………? Ss choose.. Ss listen carefully and choose.. “ There are some mountains behind the house . There are some trees to the right . There is a lake to the left ”. T asks ss to describe one of the house in the book. - Calls ss to read their writing. T asks ss to practice reading in "play with words" . c. Consolidation(2ms) T repeats the grammar in this lesson. d. homework (2ms) -practice asking and answering about the house . -Do exercise 4.5 page 66,67 Wb. -Prepare new lesson: B1,2,3..  This is a house in picture a Ss write in the notebook. Date of planning17/11/2010. Date of teaching : 22/11/2010 class 6A 23/11/2010 class 6B. Period 41 . UNIT 7 . YOUR HOUSE Lesson 3. Town Or Country ? (B1,2,3 ) 1. Objectives After lesson ss may reach: a. Knowledge: -Describe the streets. + Vocabularies : apartment, block, clinic, zoo, noisy, quiet. + structure : -Do you live in town ? - Yes, I do/ No, I don’t - Does she live in town ? -Yes, she does/ No, she doesn’t b. skills : - practice reading; ask and answer the questions; - describe a street / village - Help develope the students’ languague and their imaginary. c. Education: - teach ss to take care of the place they live. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, radio, reference book. 1.

(118) b. Students : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3 Teaching procedure a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : complete the sentences a , there / lake / near / Answer house a .there is a lake near the house b, there / trees / behind / b.there are trees behind the house house. * Do you live in the city or in the country ? How are the differences between the city and the country ? This lesson will Ss write the words. help you know(1'). b. New lesson *warm up (3' ) T asks ss to play net work stadium. supermarket 1.Listen and read. Then choose the correct answer.. hospital park. hotel. bank. City. factory. *presentation (7') T asks ss to look at the picture. T introduces the picture and new words .. Ss write on the notebook new words apartment (n ) căn hộ clinic (n) phòng khám market (n) chợ zoo (n) vườn thú noisy (adj) ồn ào quiet (adj) yên tĩnh block (n) khối, toà nhà lớn Ss do. *Do you live in town ? yes, I do. / No, I don’t. * Does Nam live in town ? yes, he does. / No , he doesn’t. * Do Ba and Nam live in town ? yes, they do. / No they don’t.. T asks ss to rub out and remember. T presents model sentences. Ss listen. Ss listen and repeat.. 1.

(119) Ss practice reading. Ss work in pairs . *practice (17') T asks ss to listen to the tape. T asks ss to listen and repeat. T asks ss to practice reading the text. Calls some ss to read . Listens and corrects. T asks ss to read the questions and choose the correct answers.. a, Does Ba live in town ? yes, he does. b, Does he live in a house ? No, he doesn’t. c, Is it noisy ? Yes, it is . d,Does Chi live in town ? No, she doesn’t. e , Are there any stores ? No, there aren’t. f, Is it quiet ? yes, it is . 2.Read about Ba.Then write sentences about Chi 's house. Ss read . -He lives in town. -yes, there is. Ss write in the notebook. Chi lives in a house in the country . Near her house there aren’t any stores . It’s very quiet. 3. Listen. Then complete the table.. Calls some Ss to read their answer . T listens and checks. T introduce the text. T asks Ss to read. T asks Ss to answer the questions . ? Where does Ba live ? Is there a zoo near his apartment? T asks Ss to write about Chi .. Ss listen and check.. city Minh √ Tuan Nga √. town. country. √. Ss answer.. Calls some Ss to read . T listens and corrects. T asks Ss to look at the table. T explains the. Ss work in pairs. Does Tuan live in the country ? No, he doesn’t. 1. apartment √. house √ √.

(120) requirement. T turns on the radio.. Does he live in town ? yes, he does .. T asks Ss to listen and check the tape. TAPE Minh lives in an apartment in the city. Tuan lives in a house in a town. Nga lives in a house in the city. Calls ss to answer. T listens and checks. *production (8') T asks ss to use the table to ask and answer: Does Minh live in town ? No, he doesn’t.. Calls some pairs to practice. c.Consolidation(2') T repeats the lesson. d. homework (2') -Learn all new words. -Practice ask and answer -Do exercise 3,4,5 page 69,70 WB. -prepare new lesson.. Date of planning18/11/2010. Date of teaching 23/11/2010 class 6B 25/11/2010 class 6A Period 42 . UNIT 7. YOUR HOUSE Lesson 4 .On the move (C1,2,3) 1. Objectives: After lesson ss may reach: a. Knowledge: -talk about the moving. -ask & answer the transports. + Vocabularies : bike, motobike, bus, car, walk, train, plane, travel + structure : How do you go to school ? I go to school by bike. b. skills : - practice reading -ask and answer the questions about the mean to some where. - Help develop the students’ languague and their communicate. c. Education 1.

(121) - teach ss to take care of yourselves and everybody. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book. b. Students : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : Ss write about your house.. Answer: I live in a house in town. Near my house, there is a market , a store and a restaurant. It is very noisy.. * How do you go to school ? How does everyone go to school everyday ? Today we learn about this(1'). b.New lesson *warm up (2') T asks ss some questions : ? How do you go to school ? ? Can you say the name of these?. walk, by bike… 1.Listen. *presentation (7') T presents : On the move ( việc đi lại ). T asks Ss to look at the picture. T presents new words .. new words bike (n) = bicycle(n): xe đạp motobike (n) xe máy bus (n) xe buýt car (n) xe ô tô train (n) tàu hoả plane (n) máy bay walk (v) đi bộ travel (v) đi. T presents model sentences. T asks ss to practice new words and structure.. * How do you go to school ? I go to school by bike. * How does Lien go to school ? She goes to school by bike.. *practice (18') T asks Ss to listen.. Ss listen and repeat.. T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss listen.. T asks Ss to practice reading.. Ss listen and repeat.. T ask Ss to practice reading and answering in pairs . Eg: How does Lien go to school ? She goes to school by bike.. Ss practice reading. Ss practice in pairs .. 1.

(122) a.How does Thu goes to school ? + She goes to school by motorbike. b.How does Tuan go to school ? + He goes by bus. c.How does Hoa go to school ? + She goes by car. d.How does Huong go to school ? + She walks to school .. T calls some pairs to practice. T listens and checks. T asks Ss to look at these pictures in part 2/79 to practice asking and answering.. 2. Listen Ss practice in pairs .. a.How does Mr Ba travel to work ? + He travels by motorbike. b.How does Mr Hai travel to work ? + He travels by train. c.How does Miss Hoa travel to work ? + She walks. d.How does Mr Kim travel to work ? + He travels by train. *production (8') e. How does Mrs Dung travel to work ? T explains the requirement. + She travels by car. T asks Ss to listen and write short answer. T turns on the radio. a, Ba goes to work by motorbike. b, Lan often travels to Ha Noi by plane. c, Nam sometime goes downtown by bus. d,Nga goes to school by bike. e, Tuan alwaysgoes to school by bus. f, Mrs Huong goes everywhere by car. g, Mr Ha goes to central VN by plane. h, Miss Chi is a teacher . She always walks to her school. T calls some Ss to write their answer T corrects. c. Consolidation(2') T repeats the lesson. d. homework (2') - learn new words and structure. - Practice asking and answering the questions. - Do the exercise 1, 2 page 70 ,71 WB. - prepare new lesson.. Date of planning :23/11/2010. Ss listen and write. a, Ba – motorbke b, Lan – plane c, Nam – bus d,Nga – bike e, Tuan – bus f, Mrs Huong – car g, Mr Ha – train h, Miss Chi – walks. Date of teaching : 29/11/2010 class 6A 29/11/2010 class 6B. Period 43. UNIT 7 . YOUR HOUSE Lesson 5. On the move (C4,5,6 ) 1.

(123) 1. Objectives. a.Knowledge:After lesson,Ss may reach: -Know the activities of a student everyday -Talk about their activities b. skills : - practice reading , ask and answer the questions . Talk about daily activities. - Help develop the students’ language and their imaginary. c. Education - teach Ss to take care of their activities every day . 2. Teaching aids a. T : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book. b. Ss : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure Teacher's activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') *Question : Use the correct form of the verbs. a, Huong….. to school by bus. (go) b, They …….to work by car. ( travel ) c, How ………Minh …….to school? (go ) d, Ba……….to school .(walk) * Today we learn Unit 7(C4,5,6)- talks about daily activities of a student(1'). b.The new lesson *warm up (5') Tell the things you do every day.. Students' activities * Answer a, goes b, travel c, does , go d,walks. Ss give the list. get up have breakfast do housework have lunch go to school ………………………………….. *Pre- reading(8') T reviews activities every day and reviews questions.. Ss ask and answer. What time do you get up ? What time does he get up . Does he go to school by bike ? yes, he does.. *While - reading(14'). 4.Listen and read. Then answer.. T asks Ss to listen and read.. Ss read.. T asks Ss to practice reading.. Ss practice reading .. T asks Ss to answer the questions :. Ss answer the questions .  He gets up at 5.30.  he goes to school at 6.30.  No, he doesn’t.. a, What time does Hoang get up ? b, What time does he go to school ? c, Does he go to school by car ? d,Does he walk to school ? 1.

(124) e, What time do classes start ? f, What time do they end ? Calls Ss to answer . Listens and corrects . Ask Ss to write in the notebook..  yes, he does .  Classes start at 7.00.  They end at 11.30.. T asks Ss to practice in pairs .. Ss write in the notebook.. * production (8') (Post – reading) T asks Ss to talk about themselve. Ss practice. My name is……………I’m a student . I get up at………………. I have breakfast at ………I goes to school . My classes start……………they end at………….. Calls some Ss to practice . Listens and checks. T asks Ss to practice “ play with words". c.Consolidation(2') -T repeats the lesson. d.Homework (2') T asks Ss to practice reading. -Do the exercise 3,4 page 71 . -Prepare new lesson.. 5.Play with words. Ss practice reading.. Date of planning:24/11/2010. Date of teaching 29/11/2010class 6B 30/11/2010 class 6A Period 44 . UNIT 8 . OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 1. What are you doing ?(A1,2,3). 1. Objectives a. Knowledge:After lesson ss maybe reach: -Talk about the activities are happening. -Ask and answer about activities. - Vocabularies : vedio game, ride, drive, wait - structure : What are you doing ? I am playing vedio games b. skills : - practice reading , speaking activities, ask and answer - Help develope students’ imaginary c.Education - teach Ss to take care of their friends - know the activities happening everyday. 2Teaching aids a. T : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book b. Ss : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure Teacher's activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5'). Students' activities. 1.

(125) *Question : ask and answer a, what time do you go to school ? b. How do you go to school ? c, Do you walk to school ?. Answer:. * Today we learn Unit 8- Talks about the actions are happening in the present(1'). b. New lesson *warm up (3') Tasks to ask and answer : ? What is teacher doing? ? What are you doing? *presentation (7') T asks Ss look at the picture .. a, I go to school (at 6.30). b, I go to school( by bike). c, yes , I do/(no,I don't).. Ss answer in their language. -Teacher is teaching. -I am listening . Ss look at the picture.. T presents new words .. Ss write in the notebook. video games (n) trò chơi dien tu ride (v) đi xe đạp drive (v) lái xe wait for (v) đợi, chờ. T presents model sentences.. * What are you doing ? - I am playing video games . * What is Nga doing ? - She is reading. * What are they doing ? - They are playing soccer.. T explains the grammar. T asks Ss to practice.. Note: S + am/is/are + V- ing.... *Practice (17'). Ss listen.. T asks Ss to listen.. 1.Listen and repeat. T asks Ss to listen and repeat.. Ss listen and repeat.. T asks Ss to practice reading.. Practice reading. 2.Ask and answer. T asks Ss to practice to ask and answer.. Ask and answer in pairs . - What is she doing ? She is riding her bike. - What is he doing ? He is driving his car. - What are they doing ? They are walking to school. - What are they doing ? They are travelling to school by bus.. Calls some pairs to practice. Listens and checks. * Production (8') T asks Ss to look at the picture and write the answers (part 3). 1.

(126) Ss work in pairs . a, What are you doing ? I am learning English. b, What is she doing ? She is riding her bike . c, What is he doing ? He is driving his car. d, What are they doing ? They are waiting for the bus.. T calls some pairs to practice in class. Listens and corrects. c. Consolidation(2') -T repeats the lesson. d. Homework ( 2') T asks Ss to learn new words and do the exercises in the workbook. Ex 1/72: Complete the sentences using: Am/ is/ are + V- ing E x 2/72 Describe the pictures. -Prepare new lesson.. Date of planning:24/11/2010. Date of teaching : 30/11/2010 class 6B 2/12/2010 class 6A Period 45 . UNIT 8 . OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 2 . What are you doing ? (A4,5,6 ). 1. Objectives After lesson ss maybe reach : a. Knowledge -Practice the present progressive tense -Practice Wh -questions - Vocabularies : bussiness - structure : Wh- questions b. skills - Practice listening and number the pictures. - Read , ask and answer the questions. - Develope the students’ language and their ability to learn English. c. Education - teach Ss to take care of their friends and know to talk about the activities happening . 2. Teaching aids a. T : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book. b. Ss : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure Teacher's activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : Complete the sentences : a, Ba........... ( watch ) T.V.. Students' activities Answer: a, Is watching b, are waiting c, am doing. 1.

(127) for the bus.. b, They......... ( wait ). c, I ...........(do) the housework . * Today we continue to learn Unit 8- (A4,5,6) to practice the Wh-questions with the present progressive tense(1'). b. New lesson *warm up (3') T asks ss: ? What are you doing ?. Ss answer. Ss work in pairs I’m reading I’m writing …… Ss write new words in the notebook Businessman(n) : thương nhân. * Pre –listening(5') T explains the requirement,(Ss practice with pictures). b. What is she doing ? c. What is he doing ? d. What is she doing ? * While –listening(8') T asks Ss to listen and number the picture as they hear . TAPE 1, Mr Tam is a bussinessman . He is driving home from work. 2, Mrs Thanh is waiting at the station , the train is late and she is very angry. 3, Nam and Quang are going around the city by motorbike. 4, Viet is a student . he is riding his bike to school. 5, Mai lives near her school . She is walking to school. 6, The boy is waiting for the bus downtown. * Post –listening(3') T asks Ss to answer. Listen and corrects. * Pre –reading (4') T asks Ss to review some questions .. She is riding her bike. He is driving his car. She is walking. Ss practice. Ss listen and number 1–b 2–f 3-d 4- a 5–c 6–e Ss answer. Who is that / this ? That is Lan. What does she / he do ? He is a teacher . Where is she / he going ? He is going to …… How is he traveling ? He is traveling by ……. Review present progressive S + am / is / are + Ving. Ss listen. 1.

(128) * While- reading(7') Asks Ss to listen to the teacher. Asks Ss to listen and repeat. Calls some Ss to read. Asks Ss to practice asking and answering the questions.. Ss listen and repeat. Some Ss to practice. Ss work in pairs. - Who is this ? -This is Mr Ba . - What does he do ? - He is a businessman. - Where is he going ? - He is going to Hnoi. - How is he traveling ? -He is traveling by plane. * Who are these ? they are Mr Tuan and Mrs Vui . What do they do ? They are doctors …. - Where are they going? They are going to the hospital. .................................... 5.Play with words T call some pairs to practice . Listens and corrects. *production (5') T asks Ss to answer with a partner Who is this ? This is Van. What is she doing ? She is reading. T asks Ss read "play with words". Ss practice reading.. c. Cobsolidation(2') T repeats the lesson. d. homework (2' ) -Review structures. -Practice asking and answering the questions. -do the exercise 3,4 page 73. -prepare new lesson.. Date of planning:1/12/2010. Date of teaching : 6/12/2010 class 6A 6/12/2010 class 6B 1.

(129) Period 46 .UNIT 8 . OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 3 . A truck driver (B1,2) 1.Objectives: a.Knowledge : After lesson ss maybe: -Know the activities every day of Mr. Quang . -Ss can talk about rhe activities which are hapeing in the present progressive tense. - Vocabularies : truck, driver, farm, vegetables, load, unload......... - structure present continuous b. skills : - practice reading and answer the questions - Help develope the students’ language and their imaginary c. Education - teach Ss to know about farmer’s work. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher : book , lesson plan, pictures. b. Students : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure Teacher's activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : Make question and answer: Van/teacher/travel to school. Students' activities - Key : a, Who is that ? b, What does she do ? c, Where is she traveling ? – That is Van. – She is a teacher. – She is traveling to school.. * Today we continue to learn Unit 8about the activities of a truck driver(1'). b. The new lesson *warm up (3') T asks Ss some questions: ? What does your mother do ? ? Is she a farmer ? ? What time does she get up? *Pre –reading (8') T introduces the topic .. Ss answer She is a( teacher). No(Yes). She gets up at (five). Ss listen.. T presents new words.. Ss write in the notebook. farmer ( n) nông dân farm (n) nông trang truck (n) xe tải truck driver (n) người lái xe tải vegetable (n) rau foodstall (n) quán ăn nhỏ load (v) chất lên unload (v) dỡ hàng xuống arrive (v) đến *Review S + am / is / are + V-ing + O eg :He is eating his breakfast.. *While –reading(16') T asks Ss to read the text. 1.

(130) T Calls some Ss to read . T Asks Ss to answer some questions and write the answer on the board.. Ss read the text.. a, What does Mr Quang do ? b , Where is he going out at five in the morning ? c, Who is wait for him? d,Where is he taking vegetables ? e, What is he doing at 7 o'clock?. Ss answer and write the answer in the notebook. -He is a truck driver. -He is going to a farm.. T Calls some pairs to ask and answer.. -A farmer is waiting for him. -he is taking vegetables to the market. -he is eating at a foodstall.. Listens and corrects. T presents model:. Ss write in the notebook. Are you watching T.V? yes, I am ./ No I’m not . Is she watching T . V? yes , she is. / No she isn’t. Are they playing soccer? yes, they are. / No , they aren't.. T asks Ss to listen to the dialogue . T asks Ss to listen and repeat.. Ss listen.. Asks Ss to practice reading in pairs.. Ss listen and repeat.. Calls some pairs to practice. T listens and corrects. T asks Ss to answer the questions.. Ss practice reading in role.. a, What is Ba doing ? b, Is he doing his math ? c, Is he copying Nam’s work ? d,What is Tuan doing ? e, Are Nga and Huong working ? Calls some pairs to ask ans answer .. Ss answer and write the answers in the notebook. Ba is doing his homework. yes , he is. No , he isn’t. He is playing soccer. No, they aren’t.. Listens and corrects. * production (8')(-post) Asks Ss to practice reading part 3" play with words".. Ss practice asking and answering in pairs.. T asks Ss to complete the sentences .. Ss practice reading.. a, Mr Ba / travel / by motorbike b, They / wait for / a train c, Thuy / walk / to school T repeats the model.. Ss write in the notebook.  Mr Ba is traveling by motorbike.  They are waiting for a train.  Thuy is walking to school.. ? Are you reading? ? Are they playing? ? Is she watching TV? c. Consolidation(2'). Ss answer. Yes, I am. 1.

(131) T repeats the lesson. d. homework (2') -Learn by heart all new words. -Practice reading . -do the exercise 1,2 page 74. -prepare new lesson(C1,2).. Yes, they are. No, she isn’t.. Date of planning:1/12/2010 Period 47 .UNIT 8 . OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 4 . Road signs (C1,2). Date of teaching: 6/12/2010class 6B 7/12/2010 class 6A. 1. Objectives a. Knowledge : After lesson ss may: -Know some road signs to join traffic. -Practice can/can't. + Vocabularies : go ahead, slow down, turn, warn, sign + structure : you can park here / you can’t part here b. skills : - practice reading , ask and answer about the questions - teach Ss to talk about the mean of traffic and know some road sign c.Education - teach Ss to know some road signs - teach Ss to obey the traffic law 2. Teaching aids a. T : book , lesson plan, pictures, reference book. b. Ss : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure a. Checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : Ss write question a, she / ride / bike / yes b, they / walk / No. *Answer a, Is she riding her bike ? yes , she is . b, Are they walking ? No, they aren’t.. * Can you see the road sign when you are on the road? Do you know the meaning of these road signs? This lesson will help you(1') b. The new lesson *warm up (2') Talk about the road sign. Traffic lights : red, yellow, blue............ 1.Listen and read. *presentation (8') T asks Ss to look at the pictures. Present topic and new words.. Ss look at the pictures. road sign (n) biển báo giao thông can có thể can’t không thể 1.

(132) park (v) đỗ xe turn left rẽ trái turn right rẽ phải go ahead đi thẳng difficult (adj) khó khăn. T present model sentences. *practice (15') T asks Ss to listen.. you can park here. you can’t turn left.. Asks Ss to listen and repeat. T asks Ss to practice reading.. Ss listen.. T asks Ss some questions : ? What does Huan do ? Is his job difficult ? What does this sign say. Ss listen and repeat. Ss practice reading.. Asks Ss to look at the signs in the book and add can or can’t in the blank.. Ss answer. He is a policeman. yes, It is. This sign say “ one way ”.. Call Ss to write on the board. Ask the rest to check and correct. T asks Ss to practice asking and answering in pair.. Ss work in group.. Call some pairs to ask and answer Listen and check. a. You can turn left. b. You can’t turn right. c. You can go ahead. d. You can’t ride a motorbike. Ss write the answer in the notebook. 2.What do the road signs mean?...... * production (10') T asks Ss to look at the signs and write using can or cannot (can’t). ( T prepare some road signs).. Ss work in pairs What does this sign say ? This sign say “ you can park here” What does this sign say ? This sign say “ you can’t park here ”. What does this sign say ? This sign say “ you can turn left ”.. Call some Ss to write on the board T corrects. T expains the meaning of each signs) color and shape of signs ). Teach Ss to obey the traffic law.. 1.

(133) Ss write You can turn right. You can park here. You cannot go. You cannot ride a motorbike. You can turn left. Ss listen and remmember.. c.Consolidation(2') T repeats the lesson. d. homework (2') -learn by heat new words and structures. -Practice reading the text. -do the exercise 1 page 75. -prepare new lesson: find some road signs.. Date of planning: 2/12/2010. Date of teaching:7/12/2010 class 6B 9/12/2010 class 6A. Period 48 . UNIT 8 .OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 4 . Road signs (C3,4,5) 1. Objectives a.Knowledge: After lesson ss may reach -Know some roads signs to join the traffic. - practice :can/can't,must/ mustn't + Vocabularies : go ahead, slow down, turn, warn, sign + structure : You must slow down You mustn’t go fast b. skills : - practice reading , ask and answer about the questions. - teach Ss to talk about the mean of traffic and know some road signs. c. Education - teach Ss to know some road signs - teach Ss to obey the traffic law 2.Teaching aids a. Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, some road signs, reference book, b. Students : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure a. Checking the previous lesson (5') *Question : Ss write question a, she / ride / bike / yes b, they / walk / No. * Answer a, Is she riding her bike ? yes , she is. b, Are they walking ? No, they aren’t.. * you can see the road signs when you are on the road. Do you know the meaning of these road signs? This lesson will help you(1') b. new lesson *warm up (2') 1.

(134) Talk about the road signs.. You can park here. You can go ahead. You cannot turn left. 3.Listen and read. *presentation (8') T asks Ss to look at the pictures.. Ss look at the pictures.. T Presents the topic and new words.. Ss write new words in the notebook. must phải musn’t không được intersection (n) giao lộ warn (v) cảnh báo accident (n) tai nạn giao thông traffic light (n) đèn giao thông slow down (v) giảm tốc độ stop (v) dừng lại. T presents the model sentences.. you must slow down. You must not go fast. you mustn’t park here.. *practice (15') T asks Ss to listen. Asks Ss to listen and repeat. T asks Ss to practice reading.. Ss listen.. T asks Ss some questions.. Ss listen and repeat.. ? What is this ? What must we do ? What does this sign mean. Ss read the text. Ss answer This is an intersection. We must slow down / we mustn’t go fast. we must stop. 4.Listen. Which signs?Number.......... T asks Ss to look at the part 4 . T help Ss review the meaning of these signs. T explains the requirement. T asks Ss to listen and number the pictures.. Ss listen.. TAPE 1. You can’t turn right here . 2. There is a stop sign . We must stop 3. you can park here. 4. You mustn’t slow down. 5. you can enter that road look at the sign. 6. you can turn left here. 7. you can’t ride a motorbike on that street. T calls Ss to answer. T asks the rest to check and correct.. Ss listen and do. c–d–h–a–g–b–f. *production (10') 1.

(135) T reads the part Play with words. Ss listen and read.. T asks ss to look at the signs and write.. Ss write the sentences in the notebook. a. There is an intersection. b. You can turn left. c. You cannot turn right. d. You mustn’ go. e. You cannot park here. f. You cannot ride a motorbike. g. You can go ahead.. T calls some ss to write on the board. T corrects. T expains the meaning of each signs (color and shapes of signs ). c.Consolidation(2') -T repeats the lesson. -Teach Ss to obey the traffic law.. Ss listen and remember. d.homework (2') -learn by heat new words and structures. -practice reading the text. -Find some more road signs. -do the exercise 2/75. -prepare new lesson. Date of planning :8/12/2010. Date of teaching :13/12/2010 class 6A 13/12/2010 class 6B. Period 49 , GRAMMAR PRACTICE 1. Objectives: a.Knowledge: - Use the learned knowledge to do Exs. + Vocabularies : review + structure : the present simple, present progressive, prepositions, question words. b. skills : - practice writing,ask and answer. - Help develope the students’ memory and their habit of learning English. c. Education - teach Ss to love English. 2Teaching aids a. Teacher : book , lesson plan, pictures. b. Students : book ,workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question: Ss answer the questions a, What does this sign mean ? b, What does this sign mean ? *To practice the learned knowledge , we study lesson today(1'). b.The new lesson *warm up (4') T asks ss to ask and answer :. * Answer. a, You can park here. b, You can not go ahead.. 1.

(136) ? What time do you get up ? What time do you go to school ? How do you go to school *practice (26') T asks Ss to do the exrcise 1.. T reviews the present simple. I get up at 6. I go to school at.............. I walk to school.. 1. Ex 1 Ss work in pairs. a, go How do you go to school ? I go to school by bus b, travel How does he travel to Ha Noi ? He travels by plane c, Walk Do you walk to school ? No, I don’t walk to school Does she walk to school Yes, she walk to school She he Nam. travels goes. I we they you. to school. travel...................... -negative : She / doesn’t walk. He they we don’t walk to school . I -Question : Does she walk to school ? yes, she does. / No she doesn’t. Do you walk to school ? yes, I do ./ No, I don’t. Exercise 2 T asks Ss to do exercise. T reviews the present progressive.. T asks Ss to do execise.. S + am/ is / are + V-ing + O eg . I am watching T.V. she is watching T .V. he is watching . they you are we. watching T.V.. Ss do exercise . a, Minh is riding his bike. b, they are waiting for a bus. c, She is watching T.V. d, we are playing soccer. 1.

(137) Tasks Ss to review some prepositions of place. T asks Ss to do exercise.. e, She is listening to music. f , they are walking to school. g , He is traveling to Ha Noi. 3.Exercise 3. A boy is in the store. A boy is waiting in front of the store. There are mountains behind and some house opposite the store. There are some trees to the right of the store. There is a truck to the left of the store. 4.Exercise 4 T Reviews Wh- questions. What Where Who Which How Ss do ex. a , Where b , Who T asks Ss to do exercise.. c , What d , What. 5 .Exercie 5 Ss write in the book. b, She rides her bike to school. She is riding her bike to school. c, We go to school by bus every day. We are going by bus today. d I walk to school everyday. I am walking to school now. e , he drives his truck. He is driving his truck at the moment.. T asks Ss to repeat model verbs.. c.Consolidation(2') T repeats the grammar.. 6. Exercise 6 Can/can't/must/mustn't you must slow down. you mustn’t go fast. b, you can turn left. you mustn’t turn right. you mustn’t go straight on. c, you must stop. you mustn’t go straight on. 7 Exercise 7 you can’t park. you can park. you can ride a motorbike. Ss listen and remember. - The present simple 1.

(138) - The present progressive - Wh- questions - Modal verb: can, must. d. homework (2') -T asks Ss to do the exrcise and review grammar. -prepare new lesson.. Date of planning :8/12/2010 Period 50.. Date of teaching :13/12/2010 class 6B 14/12/2010 class 6A CONSOLIDATION. 1. Objectives aKnowledge review the learned knowledge. - Vocabularies (review) - structure (review) b. skills : - practice doing exercise - Help Ss to know how to improve their English c. Education - teach Ss to love English and use the learned to do the test. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher : book , lesson plan ,reference book. b. Students : book. workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure a. Checking the previous lesson (5') ? Question : Ask questions a, What are you doing ? b, What is she doing ? c, What are they doing ? * Today we review what we learnt and prepare for the first term test(1'). b.The new lesson. *Answer a, I am reading. b, She is listening to music. c, They are playing soccer.. *warm up (2') T asks ss to do the play Matching game.. Ss match. a, She travel by plane. b, They are watching T.V. c, I get up at 6. d,yes, I do.. 1, What time do you get up ? 2, How does she travel to Ha Noi 3, Do you play soccer ? 4, What are they doing ? *practice (30') T asks Ss to do exercise.. 1, goes 3, is waiting. 1.Exercise 1 1, My teacher (go)…..to school on foot. 2, They ( watch )……T.V now. 3, She ( wait )…..for a bus at the moment. 4, Ba ( travel)….to work by car.. 2 , are watching 4 , travel. 1.

(139) 1, Where 2 , live 3 , big 4 , is. Exercise 2 Complete the dialogue Ba (1)….do you live ? Nam I (2)….in the country. Ba Is your house (3)…..? Nam No, It isn’t . It (4)…. Small. Ba Where (5)….your father work ? Nam He (6)…..in a factory. Ba (7)…..does he go to work ? Nam (8)…..bus.. 5 , does 6, works 7, how 8 , by. Exercise 3 Complete the sentences 1, we / English / Monday 2 , There / a river / left / my house 3 , We / listen / music now. 1 , We have English on Monday. 2, There is a river to the left of my house. 3 , We are listening to music now. c. production (5') T repeats the grammar.. Ss listen and remember. - the present simple - Wh- questions - The present progresive. d. homework (2') -T asks Ss to review grammar and do the exercise again . -prepare new lesson.. Date of planning: 8/12/2010 class 6B 6A. Date of teaching : 14/12/2010 16/12/2010 class. Period 51 .CONSOLIDATION. 1. Objectives After lesson ss may reach a. Knowledge + Vocabularies : (review) + structure :(review) b. skills : - practice doing exercises - Help students to know how to improve their English. c. Education - teach Ss to love English and use English to do the test. 2. Teaching aids 1.

(140) a. Teacher : book , lesson plan, picture, tape, stereo. b. Students : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : a , What is your name ? b , How old are you ? c , How do you spell your name ? * Today we continue to review some exercises(1') b.the new lesson *warm up (3') "Matching" 1, I have breakfast at....... 2, I go to bed at.............. 3, I have a............... * Answer: a, My name is… b, I’m twelve years old . c, L-A-N, …... a, pen b, 6.15 c, 11.00. *practice (30') T asks Ss do exercises.. Exercise 1. T helps Ss to know how to do. 1, Hanh : This ….Phuong , my new classmate. 2, Hi, I'm Thuy. What is your ………? - My name …..Duc. 3, Good morning , Mr Minh…….are you ? 4, How…….. you go to school ?. 1, is 2 , name , is 3 , How 4 , do. Exercise 2 Complete the sentences with the verbs. T calls Ss to do the ex. Then T corrects.. 1, What time / you / get / up ? 2, My / sister / ten / old 3, There / many / books / are / table 4, I / live / a / small house / Ha Noi. 1, What time do you get up ? 2, My sister is ten years old . 3, There are many books on the table . 4, I live in small house in Ha Noi.. Exercise 3 Answer the questions 1, What is your name ? 2, How old are you ? 3, What grade are you in ? 4, How many people are there in your family ? What time do you go to school ?. 1, My name is … 2, I am ……. 3, I’m in grade…… 4 , There are ….people in my family 5, I go to school at …… 1.

(141) c. consolidation (5') T helps Ss remember the grammar. Ss write in the notebook - Wh – questions - Practice the dialogue - Comlpete the sentences. d.homework (1') T asks Ss to learn lesson and do the exercise again. -preparenew lesson.. Date of planning :14/12/2010 class 6A. Period 52. Date of teaching 20/12/2010 20/12/2010 class 6B. CONSOLIDATION. 1. Objectives a.Knowledge: review the learned knoledge. +Vocabularies : review. + structure : Present progressive tense present simple prepositions b. skills : - practice doing exercises - Help students to know to improve their English c.Education - teach Ss to love English and use English in communitive 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher : book , lesson plan. b. Students : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : Fill in the blank a, My sister …. very tall. b, What … she do ? c, She …..a teacher in a school. * Today we continue to review grammar and do exercises(1'). b. NEW LESSON *warm up (2') T gives some modal verbs you ….turn left , you can’t turn right. you …..not go fast. you … park here.. * Answer: a, is b, does c, is. can must can. *practice (30') T asks Ss to do some exercises. 1.

(142) 1.Exercise 1 : Match A with B A 1, What is you favorite book ? 2, How do you get to school ? 3, Is your house near your school ? 4, When do we have English ? 5, Do you like watching T.V ? B a, Friday b, yes, please c, by bike d,picture book e, yes , I do. 1+d 2+c 3+b 4+a 5+e. 1, get 2, have 3, leave 4, start 5, go. 2.Exercise 2 : correct the verbs in bracket My name is Hoa . I …….(get) up at six. I ……(have) breakfast at 6.30 and I …… (leave) home at 6. 45. My classes …………(start ) at 1.30 ,so I ……….(go) to school at 1.00 . My classs …………(finish) at 5. 35 . I ……… (come) back home at 6.p.m . I ………… (take) a shower and have dinner at 7. p. m . I …… (go) to bed at 10.00.. 6, finish 7, come 8, take 9, go. 1, they 2, he 3, It 4, she 5, She. 3. Exercise3.Replace words into the suitable words 1, Mai and Lan play football. 2, Nam lives in a very big house. 3, My house has got a garden . 4, My sister Laura plays the guitar every day. 5, Lan likes playing games.. c. consolidation (5') T helps Ss to know to do exercises. d.homework (2') -Ss learn old lesson. -Prepare new lesson. -Do the exercise again .. Date of planning:15/12/2010. Date of teaching: 20/12/2010 class 6B 21/12/2010 class 6A. Period 53. CONSOLIDATION. 1.Objectives a. Language content - Vocabularies : Review. - structure : The present simple Question words b. skills :. 1.

(143) - practice doing exercises - Help develope students’ imaginary, help them to improve their English c. Education - teach Ss to love English, prepare to do the test term 1. 2 . Preparation a. T : book , lesson plan. b. Ss : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3.Teaching procedure a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : T asks Ss to complete the *Asnswer sentences. a, She is from Ha Noi. a, from / she / HaNoi / is b, Peter and George are my b, friends / peter / are / george / and / my friends. c, you / how / are / old ? c, How old are you ? * Today we continue to review grammar and do exercises(1') b. new lesson *warm up (2') T asks Ss some questions : Ss answer How are you today ? How many subjects do you have today ? *practice (30') T asks Ss do exercises.. 1, is 2, are 3, is 4, are 5, is. 1 , Complete the sentences with the correct verbs “ tobe” 1, My father…..a doctor. 2, Mai and lan ……football players. 3, My sister Laura …..in the kitchen with my mother. 4, They …..English teachers . 5, The Board in my classroom ….black.. 1+d 2+e 3+c 4+b 5+f 6+a 7+i 8+j 9+h 10 + g. 2. Match A with B A 1, Good afternoon 2, Nice to meet you 3, Who’s that 4, How are you ? 5, What time is it now ? 6, How old is your daughter ? 7, What is on the table ? 8, Is this your school bag ? 9, Goodbye 10, What time do you get up ? B a, Fifteen b, Not bad c, That is my brother d, Good afternoon e, Me too f, It’s 8.25 g, 10. 30 pm 1.

(144) h, see you later i, Nothing j , No, it’s Mai’s 3. Read then answer the questions This is Mai . She is twelve years old . She lives in the countryside with her family . Her school is about 3 kilometers from her house . There are 25 students in her class . Her teacher’s Miss Hoa . Now it’s 10 o’clock . She is in the class . 1, How old is Mai ? 2, Where does she live ? 3, How many students are there in her class ? 4, What is her teacher mane ? 5, What time is it now ? 6, Where is the teacher now ?. 1, Mai is 12 years old. 2, She lives in the countryside. 3, There are 25 students in her class. 4, Her teacher’s name is Hoa. 5, It’s 10 o’clock now. 6, She is in class c. consolidation (5') T helps Ss to review and prepare for the test. - how to use tobe and ordinary verbs - the present progressive - Wh- question - Read and answer the questions - Complete the sentences d.homework (2') -T asks Ss to prepare for the test. -Review grammar carefully. -Ss prepare for the test.. Date of planning:16/12/2010 6A,6B. Date of teaching :23/12/2010 class. Period 54 . TEST TERM 1 1. Objectives a. Language content - Vocabularies : - structure : Check the student’s knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 8 to get mark b. skills : - practice reading writing and do exercises - Help develop the students’ imaginary c. Education - teach Ss to be honest in doing exercises 2. Questions (45'). 1.

(145) Date of planning:28/12/2010 6A. Date of teaching:3/1/2011 class 3/1/2011 class 6B. Period 55. UNIT 9 . THE BODY Lesson 1 . Parts of the body (A1,2) 1 . Objectives a . knowledge: -ss learn by heart and list the parts of the body. + Vocabularies : -body, head, shoulder, chest, arm, hand,finger, leg, foot, toe -Change the singular into plural nouns. + Grammar : -what is that ? that is his head. - What are those ? those are his shoulders. b. skill : - practice speaking , describe the body. - Help students know how to describe character develop student’s languague. c. Education - teach Ss to know about the body and take care of their body. 2Teaching aids a. T : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book. b. Ss : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure a . Checking the previous lesson (no) * Today we learn about the parts of the body(1'). b . New lesson *warm up (3') Asks Ss to tell the parts of the body. Ss tell in Vietnamese.. *presentation (8'). 1.Listen and repeat T asks Ss to look at the picture and T introduces the new words.. Ss write in the notebook. body (n) cơ thể head (n) đầu shoulder (n) vai chest (n) ngực arm (n) cánh tay hand (n) bàn tay finger (n) ngón tay leg (n) chân foot (n) bàn chân toe (n) ngón chân. T asks Ss to review the questions.. What is this ? 1.

(146) It is a head. What are these ? They are shoulders.. T asks Ss to practice reading new words .. Ss work in pairs . 2.Practice with a partner * practice (21') T asks Ss to show the parts of the body of someone and call the name in English. What is that ? – That is his chest. What is that ? – That is his arm. What are those ? – Those are his fingers. What are those ? – Those are his toes. T asks Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs . Ss do .. T calls some Ss to practice in class. T listens and checks. c. production (10') T asks Ss to play chain game.. This is my head. This is my head and my arms. This is my head and my arm and my fingers. This is my………... d. homework (2') -Helps Ss to learn and do exercises. -Learn old lesson, learn by heart new words . -Practice asking and answering the questions. -Do exercise 1,2 page 83 wb. -prepare new lesson (A3,4,5).. Date of planning:29/12/2010 6B. Date of teaching: 3/1/2011 class. Period 56. UNIT 9 . THE BODY Lesson 2 .Parts of the body (A3,4,5 ). 4/1/2011 class 6B. 1. Objectives a.Knowledge -After lesson ss may describe someone. + Vocabularies : Tall, short, fat, thin, heavy + Grammar : he is tall b. skill : - Practice speaking, writing and listening to describe people , character. 1.

(147) - Help develope students’ language. c. Education - teach Ss to take care of their friends and relatives. 2. Teaching aids a. T : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book. b. Ss : book workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure Teacher’s activities. Student’s activities. a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : Ps write parts of the body.. * Answer: head, arm, leg, chest, shoulder, toe. * Today we continue to learn Unit 9talk about the body and the characters of someone(1'). b. New lesson *Warm up (3') T asks ss to play chain games. This is my head This is my head and my arm…. *presentation (8'). 3.Listen and repeat. T asks Ss to look at the pictures.. Ss look.. T presents new words .. tall (a) cao short (a) thấp thin (a) gầy fat (a) béo mập heavy (a) nặng strong (a) khoẻ light (a) nhẹ. T presents model sentences.. He is short. She is fat.. *Practice(17') T asks Ss to listen to the tape.. Ss listen.. T asks Ss to listen and repeat.. Ss listen and repeat.. T asks Ss to practice reading. Calls some Ss to read.. 4.Which picture? Listen and choose.......... T asks Ss to look at the picture and explains the requirement.. Ss describe. She is thin. He is short. He is tall.. T asks Ss to listen and choose. TAPE 1, She is short girl, She is fat. 2, He’s a fat man. He’s147tall. 3, He’s a short man . He’S fat. 4, She is a thiN woman. She is tall. 1.

(148) Call some Ss to answer. T listens and cOrrects.. 1–d 2–c. 3–b 4–a. 5.Listen and read T asks Ss to look at the pictures and the text.. Ss look.. T introduce the new words.. gymnast (n):VĐV thể dục weak(a):yếu strong(a):khoẻ weight lifter(n):VĐV cử tạ. T asks ss to listen and repeat. T calls some Ss to read. T Asks Ss to do the same with b.. Ss work in group.. c. Production (9') T asks Ss to describe their classmate.. Linh is a student. she is short. she is thin.. Make dailOgue similAr to A6.. Who is that ? – That is Minh. What does he do ? – He is a student. Is he tall ? – yes, he is.. d .Homework (2) -T asks ss148to learn old lesson and do the exercises 3 4 page 84 wb . -prepare new lesson.. Date of planning29/12/2010 6B. Date of teaching :4/1/2011 class 6/1/2011 class 6A. Period 57 . UNIT 9.THE BODY Lesson 3 . Faces (B1) 1. Objectives a. Knowledge: Describe the parts of the face(use the adjs to describe) + Vocabularies : hair, ear, eye, nose, mouth. + Grammar : She has around face She has full lips b. skill - Practice speaking, listening. 1.

(149) - Describe a face , hair, eyes…. - Help develope the students’ imaginary. c. Education - teach Ss to take care of their friends, relatives. 2. Teaching aids a. T : book , lesson plan, picture, reference book. b. Ss : book,workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : describe the character of your friends.. Student’s activities * Answer: This is My. she is a student. She is thin and light. She is not weak. She is strong.. * Today we continue to learn Unit 9describe the character of the body(1'). b. New lesson *Warm up (3') Ask Ss to write the opposite meaning of these words.. thin >< fat short >< tall light >< heavy big >< weak. *Presentation(8'). 1 .Listen and repeat. T asks Ss to look at the picture .. Ss look.. T presents new words .. hair ear eye nose mouth lips round oval long full. T ask Ss to practice reading.. (n) tóc (n) tai (n) mắt (n m ũi (n) miệng (n) môi (adj) tròn (adj) hình ô van, trái xoan (adj) dài (adj) đầy đặn, dầy. Ss read.. T presennts model sentences.. I have around face. She has a full lips.. Practice (17') T asks Ss to practice reading new words.. Ss practice.. T ask Ss to listen to the tape.. Ss listen.. T asks Ss to listen and repeat. T asks Ss to describe face of these people in the pictures. 1.

(150) Ss describe.. T calls some Ss to describe. listens and corrects.. She has an oval face . she has full lips. He has thin lips. She has long hair. he has short hair.. c. Production (9') T asks Ss to describe their classmate.. Ss describe. Senh has around face and full lips. Mai has long hair. Ly is tall. He has an oval face and thin lips.. T asks Ss to play games - Group1 : Write the name of the parts of the body. - Group 2 : Write the part of faces. - Group 3 : Write the character.. Ss do in groups.. T asks Ss to write on the board. Asks the rest to check and correct. d. Homework (2') T asks Ss to learn lesson again. - do the exercise1,2 page 85 wb.. Date of planning 5/1/2011 6A. Date of teaching 10/1/2011 class 10/1/2011 class 6B. Period 58 .UNIT 9 . THE BODY Lesson 4. Faces ( B2,3) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge -talk about colors to describe the parts of the face or some objects. - Vocabularies : colors, shapes - Grammar : -What color is her hair ? -It’s black 1.

(151) - What color are her eyes ? -They are brown. b. Skill : - Ss practice reading , asking and answering the questions about the character. - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary. c.Education - Teach Ss to take care of the others. 2. Teaching aids a . T . Student’s book, teacher’s book, plan of action, pictures . b .Ss .Student’s book, learn old lesson, prepare new lesson 3. Teaching procedure Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : Describe face of your friend.. Student’s activities *Answer: Minh has an oval face. She has long hair and full lips.. * Today we continue to learn Unit 9 – describe the character of someone with colors(1'). b. New lesson *Warm up (3') Can you tell the name of the colors.. red, black, blue…….. *Presentation (8'). 2. Listen and repeat. Colors. T present new words .. black white blue green. (a) (a) (a) (a). đen trắng xanh da trời xanh lá cây. T asks Ss to look at the pictures and answer. Brown (a) red (a) yellow (a) gray (a) orange (a) purple (a). T asks Ss practice reading.. nâu đỏ vàng xám màu vàng da cam màu tía, tím. Ss read.. T presents model sentences.. What color is her hair? It’s black. What color are her eyes ? They are brown. 3.Practice. *Practice (17') T asks Ss to practice reading and answering the questions.. Ss practice in pairs. What color is her hair ? It’s brown. What color are her eyes ? They are black. 1.

(152) What color is his hair ? It’s red. What color are his eyes ? They are black.. Call some pairs to practice. Listens and corrects. c. Production (9') T asks Ss to practice with the partner.. Ss practice with the partner. - What color is your hair ? It’s black. - What color are your eyes ? They are black. - What color is your ruler ? It’s blue. - What color is your coat ? It’s red.. Call some pairs to practice. Listens and corrects. d. Homework (2') -T asks Ss to learn by heart new words . -Do the exxercise 3,4 page 86 wb. Date of planning 5/1/2011. Date of teaching: 10/1/2011 class 6B 11/1/2011 class 6A. Period 59 . UNIT 9 . THE BODY Lesson 4. FACES (B 4,5,6). 1.Objectives a. knowledge -Know to describe someone or something - Vocabularies : review - Grammar : What color is her hair ? It’s black. What color are her eyes ? They are brown. b. Skill : - Ss practice reading to describe a person - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of their friends. 2. Teaching aids a .T . Student’s book, teacher’s book, teaching plan,pictures. b . Ss .Student’s book, , learn old lesson, prepare new lesson. 3.Teaching procedure Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : Ask and answer What color is your hair ? What color are your. Student’s activities Answer: - It’s black. -They are black.. 1.

(153) eyes ? * Today we continue to learn Unit 9 – describe the character of someone or something(1'). b. New lesson *Warm up (3') Play games : Simon says touch your head. touch your hand. Simon say : touch your leg............. *Practice (25') * Pre – reading T asks Ss to lokk at the picture and answer: who is this ? Is she tall ? What color is her hair ? * While – reading T asks Ss to read and answer the questions.. Ss play games. 4. Listen and read. This is Miss Chi. yes, she is. It’s black. Ss read the text then answer the questions. a, Is Miss Chi’s hair long or short ? It’s long. b, What color is her hair ? It’s black. c, What color are her eyes ? They are brown. d, Is her nose big or small ? It’s small. e, Are her lips thin or full ? They are full. * Note: tính từ chỉ kích thước đứng trước tính từ chỉ mầu sắc. Ex: long black hair. Small white teeth. 5.Listen. * Post – reading T asks Ss to answer the questions and practice asking and answering in pairs.. Ss look at the picture and describe each person. Ss listen and write. 1–c 2–a. * Pre – listening T explains the requirement.. 3–d 4–b. * While – listening T asks Ss to listen and 1.

(154) write. TAPE 1, He has short hair, a round face , a big nose and thin lips. 2, he has short hair, an oval face and thin lips. 3, She has long hair, she has an oval face and full lips. 4, She has long hair , a round face , a small nose and thin lips. Calls Ss to read the answer. Listens and corrects. c. Production (9') T asks Ss to complete the table.. Ss complete the table. mother. father. body. thin/tall. face. round. hair. short/black. eye. brown. nose. small. lips. thin. 6. Play with words Ss read.. T asks Ss to practice play with words. d. Homework (2') -practice reading the text. -describe the character of your mother/ father/ sister or a friend. -do the exercise 5 /86 wb. -prepare new lesson.. 1. brother/sister.

(155) Date of planning: 5/1/2011. Date of teaching : 11/1/2011 class 6B 13/1/2011 class 6B. Period 60. UNIT 10 . STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 1 . How do you feel ? (A1,2,5). 1.Objecties a. Knowledge - Vocabularies : hungry, thirsty, full, hot, tired, cold - Grammar : How do you fell ? I’m hungry How does he fell ? He is thirsty b. Skill : - Ss practice asking and answering the questions - Help develope the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the others 2Teaching aids a . T . Student’s book, teacher’s book, plan of action, pictures, tape. b . Ss .Student’s book, learn old lesson, prepare new lesson. 3. Teaching procedure Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : describe your friends/relatives.. Student’s activities * Answer: My brother is tall and thin. He has a round face and small nose. He has full lips.. * Today we learn Unit 10- Talk about health and food/ drink which we use everyday(1'). b. New lesson *Warm up (3') Play with words (to show te parts head and shoulder of the body). knees and toes............................ 1.Listen and repeat *Presentation (8') 1.

(156) T asks Ss to look at the picture and answer: -What is he doing ?. He is eating.. T presents new words.. thirsty (adj) khát hungry (adj) đói full (adj) no hot (adj) nóng cold (adj) lạnh tired (adj) mệt feel (v) cảm thấy. T presents model sentences.. How do you feel ? I’m hungry. How does she feel? She is hungry. How do they feel ? They are tired.. Practice (17'). 2. Describe people. T asks Ss to listen to the tape.. Ss listen.. T asks Ss to listen and repeat.. Ss listen and repeat.. T asks Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs.. Ss ask and answer in pairs.. T calls some pairs to practice. Listens and corrects.. T asks Ss to look at the picture and talk about how each person feel. -How does he/ she feel?. T explains the requirement.. e. How do you feel ? I’m hungry. f. How do you feel ? I’m thirsty. g. How do you feel ? I’m tired. h. How does he feel ? he is thirsty. i. How does she feel ? she is cold . j. How does he feel ? He is hot. Ss look at the picture and answer the questions. He is hungry. She is thirsty. ……… 5.Listen and match Ss listen and match the name with the right picture.. TAPE 1, Nhan is hungry. He’d like noodles. 2, Phuong is thirsty. She’d like a 1.

(157) drink. 3, Ba is full. 4, Huong is cold. T calls some Ss to answer. Listens and corrects.. Nhan – a Phuong – b Ba – f Huong – d. c. Production (10') T asks Ss to practice asking and answering about themselves. How do you fell ? I am cold how do you fell ? I am tired A. Are you hungry ? B. No, I’m not C. Are you thirsty ? B . No, I’m not D. Are you tired ? B. yes, I am. I’m tired D.  She is tired. T asks Ss to play games Guessing games. Call Ss to answer Listen and correct d. Homework (2') -Learn by heart new words -Practice asking and answering the questions -do the exercise 1 page 87 -Prepare new lesson. Date of planning: 10 /1/2011. Date of teaching :17/1/2011 class 6A 17/1/2011 class 6B. Period 61 . UNIT 10 .STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 2 . How do you feel ? (A3,4,6). 1.Objectives a.Knowledge: After lesson ss may reach: -ask and answer with "would like", "want" about a problem. + Vocabularies : juice, noodle, drink, want, need, would like.wouldn't. + Grammar : What would you like ? I’d like some orange juice 1.

(158) What do you want ? I want a hot drink. b. Skill - Ss practice reading , speaking listening and making a short conversation - Help develop the student’s language and their communicative c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of their health and others 2. Teaching aids a . T . Student’s book, teacher’s book, plan of action, pictures,tape. b . Ss .Student’s book, , learn old lesson, prepare new lesson. 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') *Question : write new words * Today we continue to learn Unit 10 to ask and answer about what you would like(1'). b. New lesson. Student’s activities * Key : hungry, thirsty, tired, full, cold, hot. *Warm up (3') Ask and answer: -How do you feel ? -What do you eat when you are hungry ?. I feel hungry, thirsty. rice, noodle…... *Presentation (7') 3.Listen and repeat. What would you like?. T presents the pictures. -How many people are there in the picture? -Where are they ? -T present new words .. There are five. They are in the store. orange juice (n) nước cam vắt noodle n) phở, bún. miến. mì drink (n) đồ uống (v) uống want(v) muốn would like = ’d like muốn wouldn't : không (muốn) some : một ít. T presents model sentences.. -What would you like ? -I’d like some orange juice -What would she like ? -She’d like …. -what do you want ? -I want a drink -What does she / he want ? - She / he wants a drink. T asks Ss to practice reading new words.. Ss read.. T calls ss to check. Corrects mistake. *Practice (15'). 4. Ask and answer. T asks Ss to listen to the tape 1.

(159) Ss listen.. T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss do.. T asks Ss to practice the dailogue in pairs. Ss work in pairs. T asks Ss to work in pairs ask and answer the questions How does Lan feel ? She is hot and thirsty What would she like ? She’ like some orange juice T calls some pairs to practice Listens and corrects. -How does Nam feel? - he is hungry -What would he like ? -he’d like some noodles How does Ba feel ? he feels tired What would he like ? he’d like to sit down. * Production (10') T asks Ss to listen to the tape A6/106 T introduces the question:. 6. Listen and repeat.Then practice What's the matter with you?. T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss listen and repeat. T asks Ss to practice in pairs. Ss practice the dailogue in pairs. T asks Ss to make similar dailogue with a partner. Ss work in pairs a, hot/ cold drink - What’s the matter ? I am hot What do you want ? I want a cold drink b, hungry/ noodles - What’s the matter / I am hungry - What do you want ? I want some noodles c, thirsty / a drink - What’s the matter ? I am thirsty - What do you want ? I want a drink. T calls some pairs to practice T listens and checks. Ss practice reading 7. Play with words. T asks Ss to read the first verse and write 1.

(160) the other verses. Ss read.. c. Consolidation (2') T repeats the lesson. d, Homework (2') -Learn by heart all new words -Practice making a short dailogue with a partner -do the exercise 2,3,4 / 87.88b wb -prepare new lesson Date of planning : 11/1/2011. Date of teaching: 17/1/2010 class 6B 18/1/2011 class 6A. Period 62. UNIT 10 . STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 3. Food and drink ( B1,2, 3). 1.Objectives :After lesson ss may reach: a. Knowledge:-Know and talk about the name of food and drink -Know and use the vountable nouns and uncountable nouns with "some" , "any" + Vocabularies : apple, water, banana, rice, milk, meat, vegetable, any, some + Grammar : - Is there any…? Yes, there is some No, there isn’t any - Are there any …? yes, there are some No, there aren’t any b. Skill : - Ss practice reading the dialogue , ask and answer the questions about food and drink - Help develop the student’s language and their vocabulary, communicative c. Education: - Teach Ss to take care of the others 2. Teaching aids a. T : Student’s book, teacher’s book, plan of action, picture, reference book b. Ss: Student’s book, , learn old lesson, prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : Asks Ss to write the dialogue a, thirsty/ a drink b, hungry/ somenoodles. Student’s activities - Key :. * Today we continue to learn Unit 10- Talk about food and drink(1'). b. New lesson *Warm up (2') ? Can you name food or drink you know in English?. Ss say 1. a. What’s the matter ? I’m thirsty What do you want ? I want a drink b. What the matter ? I’m hungry What do you want ? I want some noodles.

(161) orange, apple, milk…. *Presentation (8') T asks Ss look at the picture. 1. Listen and repeat Ss look at the picture apple (n) quả táo orange (n) quả cam banana (n)quả chuối water (n) nước rice (n) gạo milk (n) sữa meat (n) thịt some/ any một ít, một vài... T present new words by matching. T presents model sentences.  a/an (learned)  some / any  Is there any + danh từ không đếm được  Yes, there is some..............  No, there isn't any...............  Are there any + danh từ số nhiều  Yes, there are some...............  No, there aren't any................ Eg:  Are there any apples ? yes, there are some No, there aren’t any apples  Is there any milk ? Yes, there is some No, there isn’t any milk 2. Listen and repeat................. Practice (15'). Ss listen. T asks Ss to listen to the dialogue. Ss do.. T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. T asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs T asks Ss to practice asking and answering the questions What would you like ? I’d like an apple . What would you like ? I’d like some milk. Ss work in pairs What would you like ? I’d like some milk. What would you like ? I’d like two bananas What would you like ? I’d like an orange. What would you like ? I’d like some water 3.Ask and answer Ss ask and answer in pairs 1.

(162) T asks ss to practice.. Is there any meat ? yes, there is some meat Is there any rice ? yes, there is some rice Are there any noodles ? No, there aren’t any noodles. T calls some pairs to practice listens and corrects. Is there any fruit ? yes, there is some fruit Are there any apples ? No, there aren’t any apple Are there any oranges ? Yes, there are some oranges. * Production(10') T asks Ss to practice the dialogue (B2/109) again T asks and call Ss to answer Is there any fruit ? yes, there is some fruit Are there any bananas ? No, there aren’t any bananas. Ss work in pairs A. Is there any meet ? B. Yes, there is some meet A. Are there any apples ? B. Yes, there are some apples A. Are there any oranges ? B. No, there aren’t any oranges A. Is there any water ? B. No, there isn’t any water Ss write the dialogue in the notebook. T calls some Ss to practice listens and checks. c. Consolidation (2') T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2') -Learn by heart all new words. -Practice reading the dialogue. -do the exercise1, 2 page 89 wb. -prepare new lesson.. Date of planning: 12/1/2011. Date of teaching:18/1/2011 class 6B 20/1/2011 class 6A. Period 63 . UNIT 10. STAYING HEALTHY 1.

(163) Lesson 4. Food and drink ( B4,5) 1.Objectives: After lesson ss may reach: a. Knowledge: revise the structure which express the state and desire + Vocabularies : fish, chicken, bread, fruit + Grammar : I’d like some chicken b. Skill : - Ss practice reading and listening to match practice - asking and answering the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their communicative c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the food and drink they want 2. Teaching aids a . T : Student’s book, teacher’s book, plan of action, pictures, reference book b . Ss: Student’s book, , learn old lesson, prepare new lesson 3. Teaching procedure Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : Write the new words. Student’s activities * Key : apple, banana , water, rice, milk, meat, vegetable. * Today we continue to learn Unit 10- Talk about food and drink(1'). b. new lesson *Warm up (3') T asks ss to play the net work noodle rice Food. orange. water drink. juice. milk. ................................ Meat. ..................... 4. Listen and repeat. Then practice. * Presentation(8') gà, thịt gà cá bánh mì thực đơn. T asks Ss to look at the picture and introduces the new words.. chicken (n) fish (n) bread (n) menu (n). T asks ss to listen and repeat. T repeats the structure. I’d like some chicken. * Practice (16') T asks Ss to practice speaking. Ss practice I’m hungry. I’d like some fish and some rice . What would you like ? I’m not hungry but I’m thirsty. I’d like some orange juice.. T asks Ss to talk about themselves .. I’m cold . I’d like a hot drink. What would you like ? I’m tired. I want to go to bed. 5.Listen and match the name of people 1.

(164) T asks Ss to look at the picture and name the food and drink.. Ss listen and match.. T asks Ss to listen and match. TAPE - Nhan would like some chicken and some rice - Tuan would like some meat and some vegetables - Huong would like some fruit and some milk - Mai would like some fish and an orange juice T calls ss to answer. Listens and corrects.. Nhan ; c + f. * Production (8') survey T asks Ss to complete. T asks Ss to speak. Listens and corrects.. Tuan : a + d Huong ; e + g Mai : b + h. Ss write in the notebook.. name :how/ feel ? What would like Mai : hungry rice/ chicken Tu : cold hot drink ………. Mai is hungry. She would like some rice and some chicken. Tu is cold. He would like a hot drink. …………………………………… Ss write in the notebook. c. Consolidation (2') T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2') -Learn by heart all new words -Ss practice speaking -do exercise 4/90 wb -prepare new lesson. 1.

(165) Date of planning : 18/1/2011 6A. Date of teaching :24/1/2011 class 24/1/2011 class. 6B. Period 64. UNIT 10. STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 5 . My favorite food (C1,2,3,4, 5 ) 1. Objectives: After lesson, ss may reach: a. Knowledge -Ask and answer about the hobby of someone about the food and drink. - Vocabularies : carrot, patato, tomato,bean, letuce, pea, lemonade,iced tea,coffee, soda - Grammar : -What your favote food ? - I like fish - Do you like ? -Do you like cold drink ? -Yes, I do b. Skill : - Ss practice talking about the favorite food , ask and answer about the food they like/ don’t like - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of food and drink they eat every day 2. Teaching aids a . T . Student’s book, teacher’s book, plan of action, picture, reference book b . Ss .Student’s book, , learn old lesson, prepare new lesson 3.Procedure Teacher’s activities Student’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Key : * Question : ask and answer: -I’m hungry. I’d like some rice and -What would you like? some fish. What would you like? -I’m cold . I’d like a hot drink * Today we continue to learn Unit 10talk about your favourite food(1'). b. New lesson *Warm up (3' ) chain’s games. I’d like an apple I’d like an apple and an orange I’d like an apple, an orange and banana. *Presentation (8'). 1. Listen and repeat. T asks Ss to look at the picture and presents new words.. carrot (n) cà rốt tomato (n) cà chua 1.

(166) lettuce (n) rau diếp potato (n) khoai tây bean (n) đậu pea (n) đậu hạt tròn cabbage (n) bắp cải onion (n) hành lemonade (n) nước chanh iced (a) đóng đá tea (n) trà, nước trà coffee (n) cà phê soda (n) nước soda. The structure. -Do you like carrot ? -Yes, I do/ No, I don’t -Does she like carrot ? -yes, she does/ No, she doesn’t. *Practice (16') T asks Ss to practice asking and answering the questions ? What are these ? ? What are those ? They are …. Ss practice in pairs What are these ? They are carrots What are those ? They are tomatoes What are these ? They are potatoes What are those ? They are beans 2. Listen and repeat. Then practice. T asks ss to practice the dialogue.. Ss practice in pairs 3. Listen and repeat.. T asks ss to read the words.. Ss practice.. T calls some ss to check. Corrects mistake.. 4. Practice in pairs. T asks ss to practice.. Ss practice in pairs. Do you like cold drink ? Yes, I do What do you like ? I like lemonade. It’s my favorite drink Do you like coffee ? yes, I do. * Production (8') T asks Ss to talk about their mother/ father/ brother. Ss practice Does your father like coffee ? Yes, he does Does your mother like soda ? No, she doesn’t Does your brother like milk ? 1.

(167) yes, he does. Asks Ss to write sentences. c. Consolidation(2') T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2') -learn by heart new words -Asks and answer about favourite food and drink -Do the exercises 1,2,3 page 93, 94 WB. -Prepare new lesson. Date of planning: 19/1/2011. Ss write I like tomatoes and carrots My father likes coffee My mother likes lemonade. Date of teaching: 24/1/2011class 6B 25/1/2011 class 6A. Period 65 . UNIT 11 .WHAT DO YOU EAT ? Lesson 1 At the store (A1) 1.Objectives: a. Knowledge: After lesson ss may reach: -Ask and answer when buying something -Use the phrase words of quantify: a bottle of, o packet of.......... with the uncountable nouns - Vocabularies : cooking oil, dozen, beef, gram, kilo.................... - Grammar: Can I help you ? I need / I want…… b. Skill : - Ss practice reading , speaking ask and answer - Help develop the student’s language and their communicate c. Education - Teach Ss to know how to communicate in a shop 2. Teaching aids a. T . Student’s book, teacher’s book, plan of action, picture, tape b. Ss .Student’s book, , learn old lesson, prepare new lesson 3.Teaching aids Teacher’s activities. Student’s activities. 1.

(168) a. Checking the previous lesson (5') *Question : ask and answer What's your favorite food ?. * Today we learn Unit 11- Talk about things we eat everyday(1') b . The new lesson *Warm up (3') Asks and answer ? Do you go shopping/ to the market ? What do you buy ? Make a list of what you buy. * Answer: I like chicken Do you like peas ? Yes, I do. -. Ss answer carrots potatoes oranges vegetables.......................... 1. Listen and repeat. Then practice. shopkeeper / Storekeeper (n) người bán hàng cooking oil (n) dầu ăn *Presentation (8') beef (n) thịt bò soap (n) xà phòng T asks Ss to look at toothpaste (n) kem đánh răng the pictures. bottle (n) chai, lọ T presents new words box (n) hộp dozen (n) tá can (n) lon, hộp bar (n) bánh, thỏi tube (n) ống , tuýp Ss read.. Asks Ss to practice new words. Then T asks ss to match. T presents the structure.. * -Can I help you ? -Yes, I want a packet of tea, please . -here you are . -thank you.. Ss listen and repeat. Ss practice in pairs. Can I help you ? Yes, a box of chocolate, please Here you are Thank you. Practice (16'). Can I help you ? 1.

(169) T asks Ss to listen and repeat.. Yes , a kilo of rice, please here you are Thank you. T ask Ss to practice in pairs . can I help you ? Yes, 200 grams of beef, please here you are Thank you. Can I help you ? Yes, two cans of soda, please here you are Thank you ........................................... calls some pairs to practice listens and corrects. *Production(8') T asks Ss to practice with a partner. c. Consolidation (2') T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2') -learn by heart new words -Practice asking and answering -Do the exercises 1,2 page 93 WB -Prepare new lesson. Date of planning : 20/1/2011. Date of teaching :25/1/2011class 6B 27/1/2011 class 6A. Period 66 .UNIT 11. WHAT DO YOU EAT ? 1.

(170) Lesson 2. At the store (A2) 1.Objectives : After lesson ss may reach: a. Knowledge: - Ask and answer the goods with the amount -Practice How much , How many.................? - Vocabularies : beef, egg - Grammar : Can I help you I’d like How much do you want ? How many do you want / b. Skill : - Ps practice reading , ask and answer about the things at the store - Help develop the student’s language and their communicate c. Education - Teach Ss to how to take care of the food they want every day 2. Teaching aids a. T . Student’s book, teacher’s book, plan of action, reference book b. Ss .Student’s book, , learn old lesson, prepare new lesson 3. Procedure teacher’s Student’s activities activities a. Checking the *Answer: previous lesson (5') cooking oil * Question : Write new packet words chocolate * Today we continue to beef learn Unit 11- ask and egg answer about the thing toothpaste we buy(1'). b .The new lesson *Warm up (3' ) Chain’s games * Presentation(8') T asks Ss to look at the picture Present new words Present model sentences. I like oranges I like oranges and apples I like oranges, apples and bananas.............. Ss listen and write. -I need some beef -How much beef do you want ? -two hundred grams , please -How many eggs do you want ? -a dozen , plese. Ss practice reading the dailogue in pairs T asks Ss listen to the tape *Practice(16') T asks Ss to listen and repeat T asks Ss to practice reading in pairs. -He is at the store -He wants some beef and some eggs -Two hundred grams -A dozen 1.

(171) Calls some pairs to Ss practice asking and answering in pairs practice in class listens and corrects T asks Ss to answer the questions Ss practice in pairs a. Where is ba ? b. What does he want ? * - Can I help you ? c. How much beef does Yes, I need some beef he want ? - How much do you want ? d . How many eggs does 300 grams , please he want ? Here you are Calls some Ss to practice thank you asking and answering in pairs - Can I help you ? I want some rice How much do you want ? a kilo, please * Production (8') ................................... T asks Ss to make a similar dailogue Something to buy (shopping list) 300g of beff 1kg rice 500 grams beans 6 oranges 2 bottles of milk. T calls some pairs to practice listens and corrects c. Consolidation(2') T repeats how to use how much/ how many d. Homework (2') -Practice reading the dialogue -Practice asking and answering with how much/ how many -Do the exercises 3, 4 page 94 WB -prepare new lesson. 1.

(172) Date of planning:4/2/2011 Period 67.. Date of teaching: 8/2/2011 class 6A 8/2/2011 class 6B. UNIT 11. WHAT DO YOU EAT ?. Lesson 3.At the store (A3,4,5 ) 1.Objectives a.Knowledge:After lesson ss may reach: -listen and know the goods in the pictures. -understand the dialogue between Nam and his mother. - list the things you need to buy. - Vocabularies : review - Grammar : review b. Skill : - ss practice listening and match - ask and answer the about the things they need for meal - Help develop the student’s language and their communicate c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the others and how to help mother with shopping 2Teaching aids a . T : Student’s book, teacher’s book, plan of action, pictures, reference book b . Ss :Student’s book, , learn old lesson, prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : practice making the dialogue. Student’s activities *Key : Can I help you ? Yes, I’d like some rice How much do you want ? two kilos, please. * Today we continue to learn Unit 11Talk about the thing you buy(1') b . new lesson *Warm up (3') T asks Ss to write countable nouns and 1.

(173) uncoun nouns. orange,aplle, eggs, bananas, milk, rice, water, beef. *Practice (24') * Pre- listening(4') T asks Ss to look at the picture and answer the questions T present new words * While- listening T asks Ss to listen and match TAPE Phuong wants a tupe of toothpaste Ly wants a bar of soap and a box of chcolate Mai wants a can of soda Nam want a can of soda Nam wants a packet of cookies * Post – listening T asks Ss to answer the question What does Phuong want ? What does Ly want ? What does Mai want ? What does nam want ? T asks Ss to look at the picture and T introduces the dialogue. countable nouns :orange, apple, eggs, bananas… uncoun nouns : milk, rice, water, beef…. 3. Listen. Match the names..................... cookies (n) bánh qui half a dozen : nửa tá half a kilo: nửa cân Ss listen and match Phuong :d Ly : e + a Mai : b Nam : c. She wants….. He wants…. 4. Read . Then write Ss look at the picture. T asks Ss to practice reading the dialogue. Ss practice the dialogue. Call some pairs to practice T asks Ss to write the shopping list. Ss write 1. 2. 3. 4.. T calls Ss to answer T listens and checks. A bottle of cooking oil two kilos of rice half a kilos of beef half a dozen oranges. T asks Ss to answer the questions ? What does Nam’s mother want ? ? How much cooking oil does she want ? How much rice does she want ?. She wants….. * Production (8') T asks Ss to write a shopping list and practice making similar dialogue.. Ss practice a dialogue in pairs -300 grams of beef 1.

(174) -5 apples -two bottles of milk. T calls some pairs to practice T listens and corrects. S1: Can I help you ? S2: yes, I’d like some beef S1: How much do you want ? S2: 300 grams please, and I want some apples. S1: How many do you want ? S2; 5, please S1: Is there anything else? S2: Two bottles of milk, please S1: here you are S2: Thank you. c. Consolidation(2') T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2') -practice the dialogue -do the exercise 5 page 94 wb. -prepare new lesson. Date of planning:4/2/2011 period 68 .. Date of teaching : 8/2/2011 class 6B 10/2/2011 class 6A. UNIT 11 .WHAT DO YOU EAT ?. Lesson 4 . At the canteen (B1, 2, 3, 4) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge: -revise the mame of food and drink Aks and answer about the price 1.

(175) - Vocabulary : sandwich, ice-cream,bowl of… - structure : How much is a sandwich ? It’s two thousand dong b . skills : - practice reading, ask and answer , making dialogue / conversation at the canteen - Help develope the student’s communicate at the canteen c.Education - Teach Ss to take care of the food and drink they would like 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : T asks Ss to make a conversation with a partner. Student’s activities * key : A. can I helf you ? B. Yes, I’d like some beef A. How much do you want ? B. two hundred grams , please A. Is there anything else ? B. Yes, I need 6 oranges A. here you are. B. Thank you. * Today we continue to learn Unit 11ask and answer about the price (1') b. new lesson *Warm up (5') T asks Ss to answer the question ? What do you have for breakfast ? What do you have for lunch ? How much is a cake. Ss answer -I eat rice. -I have rice, beef, carrots . - two thousand dong.. *Presentation (8'). 1. Write the letter............... T asks ss to repeat the words about the food and drink.. Ss write.. T calls ss to check. Corrects mistakes.. a bowl of rice a bowl of noodles beef chicken fish …. 2. Listen and repeat, Then practice. T asks Ss to look at the picture and review vocabulary ? What is this T presents new words. bowl 1. (n). bát.

(176) glass (n) cốc, ly sandwich (n) bánh xăng guých thousand (n) nghìn ice – cream (n) kem T presents model sentences. What would you like for breakfast ? I would like….. How much is a sandwich ? It’s 2 thousand dong How much are these oranges ? They are 5 thousand dong. Practice (14' ) T asks Ss to look at the dialogue and listen. Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. T asks Ss to listen and repeat T asks Ss to practice reading the dialogue in pairs T asks Ss to answer the questions ? What does Lan want. She wants a sandwich and a glass of lemon juice They are two thousand five hundred dong. ? How much are they 4. Listen. T asks Ss to answer listens and corrects. Ss listen and number. T asks Ss to listen and number TAPE fish, noodles, orange juice, beef, vegetables, milk, banana, water.. e–b–i–c–f–j–h–l. T asks Ss to give the answer listens and corrects. 3. Ask and answer. * Production (8'). Ss practice in pairs S1: What would you like for breakfast ? S2: I would like bread and milk S1; What would you like for lunch ? S2: I would like some rice and chicken S1: What would you like for dinner ? S2: I would like some rice, some fish, vegetables and an apple. T asks Ss to work in pairs. T calls some pairs to practice T listens and corrects c. Consolidation (2') T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2') -Learn by heart new words -Practice making a dialogue -do the exercise 1,2, page 95 wb. 1.

(177) -prepare new lesson. Date of planning:8/2/2011 6A Period 69 .. Date of teaching : 12/2/2011 class 12/2/2011 class 6B. UNIT 11 .WHAT DO YOU EAT ?. Lesson 5 . At the canteen (B5, 6). 1.Objectives a.Knowledge: After the lesson ss may reach -Practice to ask and answer the price - talk a menu - Vocabulary : fried rice, a bowl of,................... - structure : How much is a sandwich ? It’s two thousand dong b . skills : - practice asking and answering about the price and talk about the food / drink Ss want to buy - Help develop the student’s language, their imaginary and communicate c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the food and drink they want 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book, picture b. Ps . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : T asks ss : -What would you like? -Do you like orange juice?. Student’s activities * answer: I 'd like.................... Yes, I do. No,I don't.. * Today we continue to learn Unit 11ask and answer about the price of the things in the menu (1'). b. new lesson *Warm up (3') T asks ss to answer ? What would you like for breakfast/ lunch/ dinner 1.

(178) I’d like some rice, meat……… Presentation (8') T presents new words. Ss answer. fried rice (n) cơm rang a bowl of noodles (n): bát phở cake (n): bánh ngọt ice-cream (n): que kem. T presents model. * Practice(16') Asks Ss to listen and repeat. How much is a sandwich ? It’s 2 thousand dong How much are these oranges ? They are 5 thousand dong. T calls some Ss to practice listens and corrects T asks Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs. Ss listen and repeat. T calls some pairs to practice listens and corrects. Ss asks and answer in pairs. * Production (8') T asks Ss to ask and answer with things they have eg. how much is your pen ? It is 1,500 dong T calls some pairs to practice listens and checks. T repeats grammar c. Consolidation (2') T repeats the leson by Remember part 6.. How much is a fried rice ? It is 2,500 dong How much is a bowl of noodles ? It is 3000 dong How much is a cake ? It is 500 dong How much is an ice-cream ? It is 2,000 dong. Ss practice in pairs How much is an English 6 ? It is 11,000 dong How much is your ruler ? 2,000 dong How much are your shoes ? 30,000 dong How much is/are + N ? It is ….. d. Homework (2') -Practice asking and answering the questions -do the exercise 3,4page 96 wb. -prepare new lesson 1.

(179) Date of planning: 9/2/2011. Date of teaching : 14/2/2011 class 6A 14/2/2011 class 6B. period 70 . GRAMMAR PRACTICE. 1.Objectives a.Knowledge: After lesson ss may reach -Revise the learned knowledge to prepare a test. - Vocabulary : Review - structure : Review b . skills : - practice speaking, writing and do the exercises - Help develop the student’s language and their communicate c. Education - Teach Ss to know how to improve their English and helf friends to learn 2.Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book, pictures b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : T asks Ss to describe a partner. Student’s activities * Answer : Nam is tall and thin . He has short black hair. he has around face , small nose and thin lips. * Today we sum up the grammar we learn from Unit 9 to Unit 11(1') b. new lesson *Warm up (3') T asksss to answer ? How do you feel ? What would you like ? Do you like orange juice. I feel hot / cold/ hungry … I would like soda water ............................ *Practice (27') T asks Ss to do exercise and reviews the Ss repeat. present simple Exercise 1 a. Do you like noodles ? Yes, I like noodles Do you like rice ? No, I don’t like rice b. Does she like chicken ? yes, she likes chicken Does she like fish ? No, she doesn’t like fish T helps Ss know the using of a/ an/ some/ any. Ss remember and do exercise Exercise 2 1.

(180) a. Do you have any bananas ? No, I don’t have any bananas, but I have some orange I would like an orange, please b. Do you have any drink ? There is some fruit juice on the table c ..Do you have any soda ? There is some on the self in the kitchen I would like a can of soda. T asks Ss to review some adjectives Then T asks ss some Ss to do Ex. Ss do.. T listens and corrects.. T revises the Wh- question. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.. Exercise 3 he isn’t tall. he is short he isn’t fat. he is thi he isn’t heavy. He is light he isn’t weak . He is strong he isn’t hungry . He is full He isn’t hot . he is cold His lips aren’t full. they are thin His hair isn’t short . It is long. Ss list and do exercise Exercise 4 a. Who is in the living room ? Bi and Fifi are in the living room b. What is Bi doing ? he is doing his homework c.How much homework does he have ? he has a lot of homework d . What is Fi doing ? She is sleeping e . Where is she ? She is under the table exercise 5. T asks ss to contrast the present simple tense and present progressive tense.. Ss contrast the same and the differences. S + Vs /Ves S + am/ is/ are + Ving eg. I am playing soccer She is playing soccer They are playing soccer a. She eats a lot of fruit She ia eating an apple now b. They drink juice They are drinking some juice at the moment c. he is riding his bike d. She is going to bed now e. She is getting up now 1.

(181) f. She is traveling by bus now * Production (5') T asks Ss to complete the sentence with the words provide in present propressive. Ss practice a. She is eating breakfast b. They are playing soccer c. Ba is listening to music d. We are walking to school. a. She / eat / breakfast b. They / play/ soccer c. Ba / listen to / music d. We/ walk/ to school c. Consolidation (2') T repeats the lesson. d .Homework (2') T asks ps to learn old lesson - Do the exercises again -Prepare for the test 45 minutes. Date of planning: 9/2/2011. Date of teaching: 14/2/2011 class 6B 15/2/2011 class 6A. PERIOD 71.. TEST 45 MINUTES. 1.Objectives a.Knowledge:After lesson ss may reach Use the learned knowledge to do the test. - Vocabulary : Review - structure : a / an /some / any present simple progessive b . skills : practice reading, writing,listening - Help develop the student’s imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to be honest in doing test 2. Question QUESTION 1. I. Listen and write the statements True (T) or false(F) 1 point 1. ……..Miss John is tall and thin 2. …… She has a round face 3. …… Her eyes are brown 4. ……..She is an actress II. Put these words in the right column (1,5points) apple, box, chicken, soda, rice, lemonade, can, sandwich, soap, milk, book, water Things we can eat. things we can drink. 1. things we can’t eat or drink.

(182) III . Fill in the blank with a / an / some / any (2,5points) 1 . there isn’t…….water in the bottle 2 . I’d like ………..can of soda 3 . Hoa wants ……….beef 4 . Thu would like …….egg and……………..noodles for breakfast IV. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs ( 2,5points) 1 . Trang (be)………tall and thin. She (be) ………….not weak 2 . Nam ( like)………noodles 3 . She ( ride)……….her bike now 4 . Ba and Nga ( not like )……………...ice coffee V. Read the passage and answer the question (2,5 point) Miss Thu is a gymnast. She is tall and thin. But she is not weak. She has an oval face. She has short black hair. She has brown eyes. She has a small nose and full lips. She likes fruit and vegetables. She drinks milk and a lot of water everyday. 1. What does Miss Thu do ? ………………………………………………………….. 2. Is she tall or short ?..................................................................................................... 3. What color are her eyes ? ………………………………………………………….. 4. Does she like fruit ? ……………………………………………………………….. 5. What does she drink everyday ? …………………………………………………… QUESTIONS 2 I. Listen and write the statements True (T) or false(F) 1 point 1. ……..Miss John is tall and thin 2. …… She has a round face 3. …… Her eyes are brown 4. ……..She is an actress II . Read then complete a dialogue ( 2 points) A . How do you feel , Ba ? B . I (1)………..hot . I’d like a cold (2)………… … What about you ? A . I feel (3)……………..I want a bowl of noodles B . Would you like orange juice ? A . yes, and some apples , please B . How (4)…..........apples do you want ? A . two, please. III . Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs ( 2,5points) 1 . Trang (be)………tall and thin. She (be) ………….not weak 2 . Nam ( like)………noodles 3 . She ( ride)……….her bike now 4 . Ba and Nga ( not like )……………...ice coffee IV. Read the passage and answer the question (2,5 point) Miss Thu is a gymnast. She is tall and thin. But she is not weak. She has an oval face. She has short black hair. She has brown eyes. She has a small nose and full lips. She likes fruit and vegetables. She drinks milk and a lot of water everyday. 1. What does Miss Thu do ? ………………………………………………………….. 2. Is she tall or short ?..................................................................................................... 3. What color are her eyes ? ………………………………………………………….. 1.

(183) 4. Does she like fruit ? ……………………………………………………………….. 5. What does she drink everyday ? …………………………………………………… V. Complete the sentences (2 points) 1. There / some apples /in the box 2. I/ like /orange juice 3. How/ beef/ you/want ? 4. There / not any milk 3, ANSWER QUESTION 1 I. Listen and write the statements True (T) or false(F) 1 point Miss John is tall and thin . She has an oval face. She has brown hair. She has blue eyes. She has small nose. She has full lips. She is beautiful. She is an actress 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T II . Put the words in the right column (1,5points) Things we can eat apple, chicken, rice, sandwich. Things we can drink soda, lemonade, milk, water. Things we can’t eat or drink box, can, soap, book. III . Fill in blank with a / an / some / any ( 2,5points) 1 . any. 2.a. 3 . some. 4 . an - some. IV . Complete the sentences with he correct form of the verbs (3 points) 1 . is - is 2 . likes 3 . is riding 4 . don’t like IV. Read the passage and answer the question (2,5 point) 1. Miss Thu is a gymnast 2. She is tall 3. They are blue 4. Yes, she does 5. she drinks milk and a lot of water QUESTIONS 2 I. Listen and write the statements True (T) or false(F) 1 point Miss John is tall and thin . She has an oval face. She has brown hair. She has blue eyes. She has small nose. She has full lips. She is beautiful. She is an actress 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T II . Read then complete a dialogue ( 2 points) 1. feel 2. drink 3. hungry 4. many III . Complete the sentences with he correct form of the verbs (2,5points) 1 . is - is 2 . likes 3 . is riding 4 . don’t like. 1.

(184) IV. Read the passage and answer the question (2,5 point) 1. Miss Thu is a gymnast 2. She is tall 3. They are blue 4. Yes, she does 5. she drinks milk and a lot of water V. Complete the sentences (2 points) 1. There are some apples in the box. 2. I would like some orange juice. 3. How much beef do you want? 4. There is not any milk .. Date of planning: 15/2/2011 6A. Date of teaching : 21/2/2011 class 21/2/2011 class. 6B PERIOD 72 .. CORRECT THE TEST. 1.Objectives a.Knowledge:After lesson ss may reach Use the learned knowledge to do the test and know the right and wrong of the test. - Vocabulary : Review - structure : a / an /some / any present simple progessive b . skills : practice reading, writing,listening - Help develop the student’s imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to be honest in doing test 2.Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book, pictures b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure a. Check the old lesson (no) * To know the right and wrong of the test , we study the lesson today (1'). b. The new lesson(35') QUESTION 1 I. Listen and write the statements True (T) or false(F) 1 point 1. ……..Miss John is tall and thin 2. …… She has a round face 3. …… Her eyes are brown 4. ……..She is an actress II. Put these words in the right column (1,5points). 1.

(185) apple, box, chicken, soda, rice, lemonade, can, sandwich, soap, milk, book, water Things we can eat. things we can drink. things we can’t eat or drink. III . Fill in the blank with a / an / some / any (2,5points) 1 . there isn’t…….water in the bottle 2 . I’d like ………..can of soda 3 . Hoa wants ……….beef 4 . Thu would like …….egg and……………..noodles for breakfast IV. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs ( 2,5points) 1 . Trang (be)………tall and thin. She (be) ………….not weak 2 . Nam ( like)………noodles 3 . She ( ride)……….her bike now 4 . Ba and Nga ( not like )……………...ice coffee V. Read the passage and answer the question (2,5 point) Miss Thu is a gymnast. She is tall and thin. But she is not weak. She has an oval face. She has short black hair. She has brown eyes. She has a small nose and full lips. She likes fruit and vegetables. She drinks milk and a lot of water everyday. 1. What does Miss Thu do ? ………………………………………………………….. 2. Is she tall or short ?..................................................................................................... 3. What color are her eyes ? ………………………………………………………….. 4. Does she like fruit ? ……………………………………………………………….. 5. What does she drink everyday ? …………………………………………………… QUESTIONS 2 I. Listen and write the statements True (T) or false(F) 1 point 1. ……..Miss John is tall and thin 2. …… She has a round face 3. …… Her eyes are brown 4. ……..She is an actress II . Read then complete a dialogue ( 2 points) A . How do you feel , Ba ? B . I (1)………..hot . I’d like a cold (2)………… … What about you ? A . I feel (3)……………..I want a bowl of noodles B . Would you like orange juice ? A . yes, and some apples , please B . How (4)…..........apples do you want ? A . two, please. III . Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs ( 2,5points) 1 . Trang (be)………tall and thin. She (be) ………….not weak 2 . Nam ( like)………noodles 3 . She ( ride)……….her bike now 4 . Ba and Nga ( not like )……………...ice coffee 1.

(186) IV. Read the passage and answer the question (2,5 point) Miss Thu is a gymnast. She is tall and thin. But she is not weak. She has an oval face. She has short black hair. She has brown eyes. She has a small nose and full lips. She likes fruit and vegetables. She drinks milk and a lot of water everyday. 1. What does Miss Thu do ? ………………………………………………………….. 2. Is she tall or short ?..................................................................................................... 3. What color are her eyes ? ………………………………………………………….. 4. Does she like fruit ? ……………………………………………………………….. 5. What does she drink everyday ? …………………………………………………… V. Complete the sentences (2 points) 1. There / some apples /in the box 2. I/ like /orange juice 3. How/ beef/ you/want ? 4. There / not any milk. ANSWER. QUESTION 1 I. Listen and write the statements True (T) or false(F) 1 point Miss John is tall and thin . She has an oval face. She has brown hair. She has blue eyes. She has small nose. She has full lips. She is beautiful. She is an actress 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T II . Put the words in the right column (1,5points) Things we can eat apple, chicken, rice, sandwich. Things we can drink soda, lemonade, milk, water. Things we can’t eat or drink box, can, soap, book. III . Fill in blank with a / an / some / any ( 2,5points) 1 . any 2.a 3 . some 4 . an - some IV . Complete the sentences with he correct form of the verbs (3 points) 1 . is - is 2 . likes 3 . is riding 4 . don’t like IV. Read the passage and answer the question (2,5 point) 1. Miss Thu is a gymnast 2. She is tall 3. They are blue 4. Yes, she does 5. she drinks milk and a lot of water QUESTIONS 2 I. Listen and write the statements True (T) or false(F) 1 point Miss John is tall and thin . She has an oval face. She has brown hair. She has blue eyes. She has small nose. She has full lips. She is beautiful. She is an actress 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T II . Read then complete a dialogue ( 2 points) 1. feel 2. drink 3. hungry 1.

(187) 4. many III . Complete the sentences with he correct form of the verbs (2,5points 1 . is - is 2 . likes 3 . is riding 4 . don’t like IV. Read the passage and answer the question (2,5 point) 1. Miss Thu is a gymnast 2. She is tall 3. They are blue 4. Yes, she does 5. she drinks milk and a lot of water V. Complete the sentences (2 points) 1. There are some apples in the box. 2. I would like some orange juice. 3. How much beef do you want? 4. There is not any milk . 4. Teacher's remark(8'): *Knowledge: ………………………………………………………………………………………… …...................................................................................................................... ………………………………………………………………………………………… …. *Skills: ………………………………………………………………………………………… …................................................................................................................................ ………………………………………………………………………………………… …. ………………………………………………………………………………………… …. *Attitude……………………………………………………………………………… …………….................................................................................................................... ....... ………………………………………………………………………………………… …. * Homework (1') - T repeats the new lesson ( Unit 12- A1,2,3). 1.

(188) Date of planning 21/2/2010 23/2/2010- 6D. Date of teaching. 24/2/2010- 6C,E PERIOD 73 .UNIT 12 . SPORT AND PASTIMES Lesson 1 . What are they doing ?(A1,2,3) 1.Objectives aKnowledge After lesson ss may reach - talk about the sports and the sports they play - Vocabulary : swim, badminton, skip, aerobics, tennis, jog, table tennis… - structure : What is she/ he doing ? She / he is playingsoccer What are they doing ? They are playing tennis b . skills - practice reading, ask and answer the questions, talk about activities are happening - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to know how to take care of their health and practice some sports 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5') - Question : T asks ps ask and answer a, How do you feel ? b, What would you like ? c, Do you like tea ? * Today we learn Unit 12- talk about sports and pastime(1') b. new lesson *warm up (3') T asks ps to ask and answer. Student’s activities -* Answer. a, I feel hungry / thirsty b, I’d like some milk c, No, I don’t. Ss answer I do my home work Yes, I do I play soccer, volleyball 1.

(189) What do you do after school ? Do you play sports ? What sports do you play ? *Presentation (8') T asks ps to look at the pictures T asks What is she / he doing ? T presents new words. T asks ps to practice reading present model present progressive S + am/ is / are + Ving + O NOTE : swimming (double m) skipping jogging. Ss look at the picture swim (v) bơi badminton (n) môn cầu lông skip (v) nhảy dây aerobics (n) môn thể dục nhịp điệu tennis (n) môn quần vợt ( ten nit) jog (v) đi bộ thể dục table tennis (n) môn bóng bàn. What are you doing ? I’m swimming What is she doing / she is skipping What are they doing ? they are playing tennis Ss listen and repeat. *Practice (14') T asks Ss to listen and repeat T asks Ss to practice reading T asks Ss to practice asking and answering with their partner. T calls some pairs to practice T listens and corrects. Ss practice in pairs What is he doing ? he is swimming What are they doing ? they are playing badminton What are they doing ? they are playing soccer What is she doing ? she is skipping …………………………… Ss work in pairs What are you doing ? I’m reading What are you doing ? I’m listening to the teacher What are you doing ? I’m writing. Then T asks Ss to listen and repeat T asks Ss to practice asking and answering the questions. Which sports do you play ? I play volleyball 1.

(190) - Which sports does Nga play ? She plays badminton Which sports do they play ? They play soccer * Production (10') T asks Ss to ask and answer about themselves. T calls some pairs to practice T listens and corrects *Survey T asks ss to do a survey to complete the survey.. Ss work in pairs Which sports do you play ? I play soccer - Which sports do you play ? I skip - Which sports do you play ? I play table tennis …………………………………………… …. Name phuong nga. T calls some Ss to practice T istens and corrects c. Consolidation (2') T repeats the lesson. d . Homework (2') -T asks Ss to practice reading, making sentences with new words / new structure - learn by heart new words - do the exercise 1,2,page 102,103 Wb. - Prepare new lesson. Phuong is reading Nga is writing ................................ Date of planning :23/2/2011 class 6A PERIOD 74 .. What are you doing ? reading writing. Date of teaching: 28/2/2011 28/2/2011 class 6B. UNIT 12 . SPORTS AND PASTIMES lesson 2. What are they doing ?(A3,4,5). 1.Objectives a. Knowledge:After lesson ss may reach - Talk about the sports they play - Talk about the others - Vocabulary - structure : Which sports do you play ? I play soccer 1.

(191) b . skills : - practice reading, asking and answering the questions about sports - Help develop the student’s languge and their imaginary c.Education - Teach Ss to know how to stay healthy by playing some sports 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5') * Question : write new words. Student’s activities - key : swim, badminton, skip, aerobics, tennis, jogging. * Today we continue to learn Unit 12 – ask and answer about what sports you play (1') b. new lesson *Warm up (2') Ask Ss to tell what sports they can play. I play coccer I play volleyball I play table tennis. * Presentation(6') T asks Ss to look at the picture A4 /126 -Who is in the picture ?. Lan and Nam. -Which sports does Nam, lan play?. They play badminton , table tennis and soccer. *Practice (19') T asks Ss to read the text and answer the questions T asks questions and asks ss to answer a, Which sports does Lan play ?. -She swims, does aerobics and plays badminton.. b, Does Lan play tennis?. No, she doesn’t.. c, Which sports does Nam play ?. he plays soccer, jogs and plays table tennis. d, Does nam play table tennis ?. yes, he does. Tcalls some pairs to practice Listens and corrects * Production (8') T asks Ss to practice ask your partner. Ss work in pairs -Which sports do you play ? -I play soccer 1.

(192) - Which sports do you play ? -I play table tennis T asks ss to write about the sports they play.. I play soccer, I jog and I play badminton........ T calls some ss to read their writing c. Consolidation (2') T repeats the lesson by Remember part. d. Homework (2') -T asks Ss to learn lesson -Do the exercise 4 page 104 wb. -prepare new lesson. Date of planning: 23/2/2011 class 6B. Date of teaching : 28/2/2011 1/3/2011 class. 6A. PERIOD 75. UNIT 12. SPORTS AND PASTIMES Lesson 3 . Free time (B1,2,3,4) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge After lesson ss may reach -Talk and write about the activities in the free time - Listen comprehensions about others in the pictures + Vocabulary : fishing, free time, movies + structure : What do you do in your free time? I play games b . skills : - practice reading, ask and answer about the activities in free time - Help develop the student’s language , their communicative and imaginary c.Education. - Teach Ss to take care of their work and free time 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5') *Question : ask and answer. Student’s activities *Answer: -Which sports do you play ? -I play soccer -Do you play badminton ? -Yes, I do. * Today we continue to learn Unit 121.

(193) ask and answer about the sports you play(1') b. new lesson *warm up (3') T asks ss to answer What do you do after school?. I do my homework/ play games…. Do you play sports. Yes, I do. Which sports do you play ?. I play soccer…... *presentation (8') T asks Ss to look at the picture. Ss look at the picture. T presents new words. movies (n) phim go fishing (v) câu, đánh cá free time (n) thời gian rảnh. T presents model sentences. What do you do in your free time ? I watch T.V What does she do in her free time? She read What do they do in their free time ? they read…... T notes you  your She her he  his they  their *practice ( 20') T asks Ss to listen. Ss listen and repeat. T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss work in pairs. Call some Ss to read T asks Ss to practice and answer. What do you do in your free time ? I go to the movies What do you do in your free time? I watch T.v What do you do in your free time? I read….. T calls some pairs to practice Listens and corrects T asks Ss to listen and read B3. Ss listen and repeat Ss work in pairs - What does Phuong do in his free time ? He goes to the movies - What does Ly do in her free time ? She watches T.v - What does Nam do in his free time ?. T asks Ss to practice with a partner. 1.

(194) He read T calls some pair sto practice Listens and corrects. NOTE : -The verbs to singular third person I go She goes you watch He watches they play Nam plays. T asks ss to look at the picture B4 / 128 T explains the requirement. Ss listen and match. TAPE Tan reads Minh and Nam play video games Lien watches T.V Lan and Mai listen to music. Tan + f Minh and Nam + e lien + a Lan and Mai + b. T asks Ss to give the answer T corrects Ss work in pairs -What does Tan do in his free time ? -He read -What do Minh and Nam do in their free time ? - They play video games. *production ( 8') T asks Ss to practice. Call some pairs to practice Asks Ss to write what they do in their free time. Ss write In my free time, I go fishing, I read….. c. Consolidation (2') T repeats the lesson. d . Homework (2') -Learn by heart new words -practice asking and answering with a partner about the activities in free time -Do exercise 1,2,3 -Prepare new lesson Date of planning: 2/3/2011. Date of teaching : 7/3/2011 class 6A 7/3/2011 class 6B. PERIOD 76. UNIT 12. SPORTS AND PASTIMES LESSON 3. Free time (B5). 1.

(195) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge: After lesson ss may reach: - Practice the adverbs of frequency (How often.....?) - Ask and answer with once, twice + Vocabulary : once, twice, week. + structure : How often do you go to school ? I go to school 6 days a week b . skills : - practice reading, ask and answer about the activities in free time - Help develop the student’s language , their communicative and imaginary c.Education. - Teach Ss to take care of their work and free time 2. Teaching aids a. T : Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b Ss : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : ask and answer -Which sports do you play ? -Do you play badminton ? * Today we continue to learn Unit 12ask and answer How often…? (1'). b. new lesson warm up (3ms) T asks ss to answer What do you do after school?. Students' activities I play soccer.... Yes, I do/ No, I don't.. I do my homework/ play games…. Do you play sports Yes, I do Which sports do you play ? I play soccer….. * presentation (8ms) T asks ss to look at the pictures Presents new words. ss look at the picture once (adv) một lần twice (adv) hai lần times (adv) lần week (n) tuần often (adv) thường xuyên How often… ? thườnh xuyên như thế nào. Rub out and remmember T presents model sentences. How often do you go to school ? 1.

(196) I go to school 6 days a week How often does she go fishing ? She goes fishing once a week *practice ( 16ms) T asks Ss to asking some questions ? How often do you go to school ? How often do you read comic T asks Ss to look at the dialogue and listen T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss answer Ss listen and repeat. T asks Ss to practice reading dialogue in pairs Ss work in pairs T calls some Ss to practice listens and corrects T asks Ss to look at the Ly’s diary and practice with a partner. How often does Ly go to school ? She goes to school 6 days a week How often does Ly play badminton ? She plays badminton three times a week How often does she watch T.V ? She watches T.v twice a week How often does she go fishing ? She goes fishing once a week. * Production (8ms) Asks Ss to write in the notebook Ss write Ly goes to school 6 days a week. She plays badminton three times a week. She……... T asks Ss to talk about the things they do in their free time T asks Ss to ask the partner and write. Ss talk I play soccer, watch T.V and read Phuong listens to music Hai goes fishing Tuan plays video games. T calls some ss to talk in class Listens and corrects c.Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson 1.

(197) d . Homework (2ms) -T asks Ss to learn old lesson , learn by heart new words -practice asking and answering about the activities in free time -do the exercise4,5 page 105,106 wb -prepare new lesson. Ss listen and remember. Date of planning: 2/3/2011 6B. Date of teaching : 7/3/2011 class 8/3/2011 class 6A. PERIOD 77. UNIT 12 . SPORTS AND PASTIMES LESSON 4 . HOW OFTEN? (C1,2,3,4) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge After lesson ss may reach -Use adverbs of frequency to answer -Talk about the activities in the free time + Vocabulary : always,usually, often, sometimes, never, picnic, fly, kite, camp, tent + Structure : How often do you go to the zoo ? I sometimes go to the zoo b . skills : - practice reading dialogue, ask and answer the questions about how often - write the answer for these questions - Help develop the student’s memory and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of their activities they usually take part in 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book, pictures b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks to talk about the diary. Student’s activities * Answer I go to school 6 days a week I play soccer three times a week I watch T.V four times a week........ *To talk about the activities in the free time with adverbs of frequency, we study the lesson today (1m) b. new lesson 1.

(198) *warm up (4ms) T asks ss to answer. Ss answer. - Do you like soccer ?. -Yes, I do. - How often do you play ?. -Twice a week. *Presentation (8ms) T asks Ss to look at the C1/ 130 T presents new words. always (adv) : luôn luôn usually (adv) thường thường often(adv) hay, thường xuyên sometimes (adv) đôi khi , thỉnh thoảng never(adv) không bao giờ year (n) năm picnic (n) buổi dã ngoại camp(n) trại (v) cắm trại Tent (n) lều. T asks rub out and remember T prents model sentences to practice asking some questions. How often do they go to the zoo ? They sometimes go to the zoo. *Practice (15ms) T asks Ss to listen T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss listen and repeat. T asks Ss to practice reading. Ss practice reading. Calls some Ss to read listens and corrects T asks Ss to practice asking and answering the question. Ss ask and answer. T calls some pairs to practice Listens and corrects. ? How often do Ba and Lan go to the zoo They sometimes go to the zoo ? How often do they have a picnic They sometimes have a picnic ? How often do they go to the park They go to the park twice a week ? How often do they fly their kites They sometimes fly their kites ? How often do they go camping They never go camping ? how often do they go to school They always go to school ? How often do they do their homework They always do their homework. *Production(8ms) T asks Ss to ask and answer about themselves. Ss work in pairs How often do you go to the zoo? 1.

(199) I never go to the zoo How often do you have a picnic ? I never have a picnic How often do you do your homework ? I always do my homework. T calls some pairs to practice T listens and corrects T asks Ss to write the answer in the notebook. Ss write the answers in A4/131 a. I never go to the zoo b. I never go to the park c. I usually play sports d. I go camping once a year e. I sometimes go fishing ………………………………………… ….. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d . homework (2ms) - Learn by heart all new words - Practice asking and answering with a partner -do exercise 1,2 page 106,107,wb -prepare new lesson. Date of planning:33/2011 class 6B 6A. Date of teaching : 8/3/2011 10/3/2011 class. PERIOD 78. UNIT 12 . SPORTS AND PASTIMES LESSON 4. HOW OFTEN …..? (C5,6). 1.Objectives a.Knowledge After lesson ss may reach: -Listen and match the adverbs of frequency with the pictures -Read and answer the questions with adverbs of frequency + Vocabulary : wear, boots, camping stove + structure : How often do you watch T.V ? I watch T.V twice a week b . skills : practice writing the answers for questions, listen and match, read the passage and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ps to take care of the things they do in the free time 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ps . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Teaching procedure. 1.

(200) teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks Ss to ask and answer the questions. Student’s activities * Answer -How often do ba and Lan go to the zoo ? - They sometimes go to the zoo - How often do they go to the park ? - They often go to the park. * Today we continue to learn Unit 12practice the adverbs of frequency (1') b. new lesson *warm up (3ms). Matching 7/7 5/7 4/7 2/7 sometimes 0/7. *Practice (25ms) T explains the requirement Reviews the questions ? How often do you do your homework ? How often do you go to the zoo. always usually often never. I always do my homework. T asks Ss to look at the picture in C5 / 132 T explains the requirement. I never go to the zoo. T asks Ss to describe each picture. Ss listen. ? How often do Nga and Lan do these things T asks Ss listen and match. Ss describe the pictures. Ss listen and match. TAPE Nga and Lan never go camping They sometimes go to the zoo They often go to the park They often play sports They usually have a picnic in the park. a, never b, sometimes c, often d, often e, usually. T asks Ss to give the answers Ss practice asking and answering in pairs How often do Nga and ba go camping ? They never go camping. Listens and checks T reads and introduce new words part 6. weekend (n) cuối tuần warm clothes : quần áo ấm boots (n) : đôi ủng wear (v) : mặc, mang , đeo camping stove(n) : bếp overnight (adv) : qua đêm. T asks Ss to read and answer the questions. Ss answer 2.

(201) a, What does Minh like doing ? b, What do they always wear ? c. When does he go ? d . Who does he usually go with ? e, Where does he often go ? f, What do they take ?. Minh likes camping they always wear strong boots and warm clothes He usually goes with two friends He often goes to the mountains They always take food , water and a camping stove. T calls some Ss to answer listens and checks * production (7ms) T repeats the questions of adverbs. Ss listen and remember. T asks Ss to write their dairy. I go to school six days a week. In the afternoon, I often play sports, I sometimes play volleyball, I usually play soccer……. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d. Homework (2ms) - Practice asking and answering the questions - do exercises 3,4 page 107 wb - prepare new lesson. Date of planning: 10/3/2011. Date of teaching: 14/3/2011 class 6A 14/3/2011 class 6B. PERIOD 79. UNIT 13 . ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS 2.

(202) Lesson 1 The weather and seasons (A1) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge - Know some adjs to talk about the weather - Know some seasons in a year - Vocabulary : weather, season, summer, winter, spring, warm, cool, fall - structure : What’s the weather like …..? - It’s hot b . skills : - practice asking and answering the questions - Help develop the student’s knowledge about the weather and seasons c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of their activities in the weather and seasons 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book, tape, radio b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities Student’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks Ss to ask and answer Answer: -How often do you go to school? the questions - I go to school 6 days a week - How often do you play badminton ? - I usually play badminton * Today we learn Unit 13- Talk about the weather and seasons(1') b. new lesson *warm up (2ms) Ask and answer How many seasons in a year ? What’s the weather like today Can you speak in English ? *presentation (8ms) T asks Ss to look at the picture Presents new words. Ss answer the questions There are four It is warm/ hot. weather (n): thời tiết season(n) : mùa summer(n) : mùa hè winter (n) : mùa đông spring(n) mùa xuân fall(n) : mùa thu autumn (n) : mùa thu cool (a) : mát mẻ warm(a) : ấm áp. Rub out and remember Present model. Ss write in the notebook It’s hot in the summer. *practice (17ms) T asks Ss to listen. Ss listen. T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss practice reading. T asks Ss to practice reading 2.

(203) call some Ss to read Asks Ss to talk about the weather in each season. Ss practice It is hot in the summer It is cool in the fall It is cold in the winter It is warm in the spring. Call some pairs to practice Listens and checks Asks Ss to talk about the weather today In the morning In the afternoon In the evening. Ss work in group It is warm in the morning It is hot in the afternoon It is cool in the evening. * Production (8ms) T asks Ss to play game Guessing game What season ?. -Is it hot ? -No , it isn’t . It’s usually cold. -Ah, It is winter. -Yes, That’s right. -Is it cold ? -No, it isn’t. -Is it warm ? -Yes, it is. -Ah, It is spring.. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson. d . Homework (2ms) -Learn by heart all new words -Practice asking and answering the weather and seasons -do the exercise 1 -prepare new lesson. Date of planning: 10/3/2011. Date of teaching: 14/3/2011 class 6B 15/3/2011 class 6A. PERIOD 80. UNIT 13 . ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS LESSON 2. THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A2,3) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge - Talk abbout the weather in a day - Talk the weather they like - Vocabulary : weather and seasons - structure : What is the weather do you like ? 2.

(204) I like warm weather. b. skills : - practice asking and answering the questions, about weather they like - Help develop the student’s language and their communicative c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the weather and seasons and know how to play , wearing in each weather 2Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) - Question : Talk about the weather a, summer/ hot b, spring/ warm c, winter/ cold d, Autumn / cool * Today we continue to learn Unit 13ask and answer about the weather(1') b. new lesson *warm up (3ms) Guessing games. Student’s activities Answer:. a. It’s hot in the summer. b. It’s warm in the spring. c. It’s cold in the winter. d. It’s cool in the Autumn.. Ss play Is it hot ? No, it isn’t Is it cold ? yes, it is Ah, It is winter Yes, that’s right. * Presentation (8') T repeats the words and structure. What’s the weather like in the summer ? It is hot in the summer What weather do you like ? I like hot weather What weather does she like ? She likes cool weather What weather do they like ? They like warm weather. *PRATICE (15ms) T asks ss to practice. Ss practice in pairs What’s the weather like in the spring ? It is warm weather What’s the weather like in the fall ? It is cool in the fall What’s the weather like in the winter ? It is cold in the winter. T asks Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs. Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to practice in class listens and corrects What weather do you like ? I like hot weather 2.

(205) What weather do you like ? We like cold weather What weather does she like ? She likes cool weather What weather do they like ? They like warm weather. * Production (9ms) T asks Ss to write the sentences about the weather they like or their parents or friends like call Ss to write on the board. Ss write I like warm weather My mother likes hot weather My sister likes cold weather My grandfather likes cool weather Ss listen and remember. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the grammar d . Homework (2ms) -Talk about the weather you like -do exercise 3 page 109 wb -Prepare new lesson. Date of planning :11/3/2011 class 6B. Date of teaching : 15/3/2011 17/3/2011 class. 6A. PERIOD 81. UNIT 13 . ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS LESSON 3. THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A4,5 ) 1. Objectives a. Knowledge -Talk about someone to do something in the seasons - Vocabulary : Review - structure : What do you do when it’s hot ? I go swimming b . skills : - practice reading and answering the questions, ask and answer in pairs - Help develop the student’s language and their communicative c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the activities in each season and know how to keep your healthy 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book, pictures b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) *Question : Call Ss to ask and answer. Student’s activities Answer:. 2. -What weather do you like ? -I like cold weather.

(206) -What weather do you like ? -I like hot weather. * Today we continue to learn Unit 13aks and answer about the activities in each season (1m) b. new lesson *warm up (3ms) T asks ss to do the networds about activities in pastimes. Pastimes. What do you do when it’s hot / I go swimming What does she do when it’s cold ? She plays badminton What do they do when it’s warm ? They go fishing. Presentation (10ms ) T presents situations ? What do you do when it’s hot. Ss practice. Presents model sentences. - What does Ba do when it’s hot ? He goes swimming What does he do when it’s cold ? He plays soccer What does he do when it’s warm ? He goes jogging What does he do when it’s cool ? He goes fishing. *Practice (12ms) T asks Ss to read the text Calls some ps to read Listens and checks T asks Ss to ask and answer the questions in pairs. ss work in pairs. Call Ss to ask and answer about themselve. What do you do when it’s hot ? I go swimming What do you do when it’s warm ? I fly my kite ……. * Production (10ms) T asks Ss to ask and answer about themselves. Ss practice. Calls some pairs to practice listens and checks T asks Ss to write the things they do in different weather. Ss write When it’s hot , I go swimming When it’s cold , I play soccer …... Call ss to read their writing Listens and corrects c. Consolidation (2ms) 2.

(207) T repeats the lesson. d . Homework (2ms) - practice reading - ask and answer about tactivities in different weather - do exercises 4 page 104 wb. - Prepare the new lesson. Date of planning:15/3/2011 class 6A. Date of teaching:21/3/2011 21/3/2011 class. 6B. PERIOD 82.UNIT 13 . ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS LESSON 4. ACTIVITIES IN THE SEASONS (B1,2) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge: -Talk about the activities in the seasons - Use adverbs of frequency - Write the list ss do in the different seasons +Vocabulary : review, sail, basketball + structure : Present simple with adverbs of frequency b . skills : - practice listening, reading and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of them and the others 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure. Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) - Question : what do you do in different weather? * Today we continue to learn Unit 13- talk about the activities in the seasons (1m) b. new lesson. Students' activities key :. When it hot , I.................. When it cold , I ................... When it warm , I............... When it cool , I.................... It is hot/ warm..... 2.

(208) *warm up (3ms) T asks ss to ask and answer ? What’s the weather like today ? What weather do you like ? What do you do when it’s cold *Practice (24ms) Pre – practice T presents new words. I like cool weather, etc I play badminton, etc. sail (v) đi thuyền buồm basketball (n) môn bóng rổ always, usually, often, sometimes, never…... Ss practice reading. Ss answer T asks ss to listen to -We often play volleyball in the spring the tape -They sometimes go sailing in the fall Then asks ss to review - I often go swimming in the summer the adverbs -She usually plays badminton - He never goes fishing in the winter * While – practice T asks Ss to listen and repeat T asks Ss to read the text Ss practice asking and answering in pairs T asks Ss to answer the questions ? What do you do in the spring ? ? What do they do in the fall ? What do you do in the summer ? What does she do in the fall ? What does he do in the winter. Ss write. T asks Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs. Ss work in pairs A. What do you do in the spring ? B. I usually go jogging What do you do in the summer ? A. I always go swimming ………………………….. Ss practice asking ? What do you do in the summer ? I go swimming. T calls some pairs to practice Listens and checks T asks Ss to write the list of things they do in different seasons T calls Ss to write on the board T asks the rest to check and correct Then asks Ss to make. a. In the spring, I often play soccer b. I usually go swimming in the summer c. I sometimes go fishing in the fall d. I sometimes play badminton in the winter. activities/ name Phong. summer play soccer. winter jog. spring fall go fishing fly kite. Phong usually plays soccer in the summer 2.

(209) dialogue with the partner. * Production (8ms) T asks Ss to interview their partner and fill in the table. T calls Ss to give the answer. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d . homework (2ms) - Learn by heart new words - Do the exercise 3 page 113 wb - Prepare new lesson. Date of planning :15/3/2011 class 6B 6A. Date of teaching : 21/3/2011 22/3/2011 class. PERIOD 83. UNIT 14 . MAKING PLANS. LESSON 1. VACATION DESTINATIONS (A1,2,3) 1.Objectives 2.

(210) a. Knowledge: - Ask and answer about the plans - Talk and write the plans of yourself and your friends. + Vocabulary : vacation, visit, stay, with, Ha Long bay, aunt, uncle, citadel, beach + structure : near future : S + be + going to + V How long ……? b . skills : - practice reading a dialogue ask and answer the question write the answer - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to know some information about the vacation and some beautyspots in our country 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks Ss to write on the board what you do in the spring.. Students' activities *Answer : In the spring, I always watch T.V. I usually go jogging. I never go sailing.. * Today we learn Unit 14- Talk about the vacation and activities (1m) b. new lesson *warm up (3ms) T asks ss to tell some beauty- spots in our country. Ha Long bay Hue citadel Ngoc Son Temple............. *Presenation (8ms) T presents a picture ?What can you see in the picture. A picture of Hue citadel Ss answer. T presents the dialogue ? What is Lan going to do this summer vacation. Ss answer.. T presents new words. destination (n) điểm đến vacation (n) kì nghỉ visit (v) tới thăm, tham quan stay (v) ở aunt (n) dì, cô Uncle (n) chú, bác citadel (n) thành nội, cố đô Huế with (prep) cùng, với beach (n) bãi biển How long……?bao lâu. T ask ss to Rub out and remember T presents model sentences. I am going to have summer vacation . 2.

(211) we are going to visit Hue. She is going to stay in a hotel…. +) Near future tense S + be( am/ is/ are ) going + to + V *Practice (16ms) T asks Ss to listen to the dialogue T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss listen and repeat. T calls some Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. Listens and corrects T asks Ss to answer the questions and write the answer in the exercise book. Ss answer and write She is going to visit Hue She is going to stay with her aunt and uncle for a week She is going to visit the citadel. a, What is Lan going to do? b, Where is she going to stay? c, how long is she going to stay? d, What is she going to do?. T calls some pairs to answer Listens and checks T asks Ss to look at the picture in A3/141 and make a dialogue in pairs Ss practice the dialogue in pairs What are you going to do this summer vacation? + I’m going to visit Ha Long bay Where are you going to stay ? + I’m going to stay in a hotel How long are you going to stay ? + For two weeks What are you going to do ? + I’m going to visit the beach and swim T calls some pairs to practice * Production(8ms) T asks ps to write about themselves . What are you going to do this summer vacation ? Ss write. T calls some pairs to read their writing Listens and checks T reads the example .. I’m going to visit Sam Son beach this summer vacation. I’m going to stay in a hotel for a week . I’m going to swim and sunbathe.. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson. d. Homework (2ms) -Learn by heart all new words -Practice dialogue in pairs -do the exercise 1,2 page 114 wb -prepare new lesson 2.

(212) Date of planning:15/3/2011 6B 6A. Date of teaching : 22/3/2011 class 24/3/2011 class. PERIOD 84. UNIT 14 . MAKING PLANS LESSON 2 . VACATION DESTINATIONS (A4,5). 1.Objectives a. Knowledge - read and understand the plan of Phuong and Mai - write the things ss will do in the summer vacation (Use the connective words of time) - Vocabulary : Review - structure : Near future b . skills : practice reading and make a list form the reading - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of their activities in the summer vacation 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (10ms) * Question : T asks Ss to complete the dialogue A. What/ you/ do/ this summer vacation ? B. HaLong Bay A. Where/ stay ? B. in a hotel A. How long ? B. ten days. Student’s activities * Answer: A. What are you going to do this summer vacation? B. I’m going to visit ha Long Bay A. Where are you going to stay ? B. I’m going to stay in the hotel A. How long are you going to stay ? B. For ten days. * Today we continue to learn Unit 14- Talk about the summer vacation (1') b. new lesson *warm up (2ms) Ask Ss to tell some beautyspots in our country. - Ngoc Son temple - Hue citadel - Nha Trang beach - Ho Chi Minh City. 2.

(213) *practice (18ms) Pre – reading T asks Ss to look at the picture and tell where the picture describe Which places are Mai and Phuong going to visit ?. Ha Long Bay Honoi Hue Nha Trang Ho Chi Minh City. While – reading T asks Ss to listen to the tape. Ss listen and repeat. Ss listen. T asks Ss to listen and repeat Ss work in group T asks Ss to make a table of notes about five different places Phuong and Mai are going to Ss do visit T makes a table on the board T calls Ss to complete T corrects and asks Ss to copy into the notebook. Places to Where to stay ? visit Ha Long Uncle and aunt Bay Ha Noi Hotel. How long ? two weeks three days. Hue. Two days Three days A week Visit Ho Chi Minh city. Nha Trang Ho Chi Minh City. At a friend’s house With grandparent. What to do Visit Ha Long Bay see Ngoc Son temple See the citadel. Ss do in pairs  They are going to visit Ha Long Bay. T asks Ss to answer the questions.  They are going to stay with their uncle and aunt  for two days  They are going to visit Ngoc Son temple in Ha Noi.. T calls some Ss to answer Listens and checks ? Which place are Phuong and Mai going to visit first ? Where are they going to stay ? How long are they going to I’m going to have a summer vacation stay First , I’m going to visit Sam Son beach in Thanh ? Which place are they going to 2.

(214) visit then * Production (10ms) T asks ss to rewrite the text changing Phuong and Mai into I and replace their vacation plan like this: Sam Son beach – Thanh Hoa in a hotel – four days Hoi An – Uncle and aunt ( a week ) Vung Tau – friend ( 2 days ). Hoa . I’m going to stay in a hotel for four days Then I am going to stay with my aunt and uncle for a week. I am going to visit Hoi An…………... T calls some ss to read their writing Listens and corrects c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d . Homework (2ms) -Practice writing -do the exercise 3 page 114 wb -prepare new lesson. Date of planning: 23/3/2011 class 6A 6B. PERIOD 85.. Date of teaching : 28/3/2011 28/3/2011 class. UNIT 14 . MAKING PLANS. LESSON 3. FREE TIME PLANS (B1,2,3). 1.Objectives a. Knowledge -Ask and answer about the plans in the free time - Make the plans for two days of weekend +Vocabulary : review + Structure : - what are you going to do tonight ? - I’m going to do my homework - What about you ? b . skills : practice listening, reading the dialogue . practice the dialogue and write - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to know how to make plans to work and play 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 2.

(215) 3. Procedure. Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) - Question : T asks Ss to to write their summer vacation. Students' activities * Answer : - I’m going to visit Ha Noi this summer vacation - I’m going to stay in a hotel for a week - I’m going to visit Ngoc Son temple. * Today we continue to learn Unit 14Talk about the free time plans(1') b. new lesson *warm up (3ms) T asks ss to ask and answer ? What are you going to do tonight ? What are you going to do on the weekend. -I watch TV -I am going to have a picnic. *practice (24ms) +Pre – practice T introduces the dialogue T introduces the new words. tomorrow (n) ngày mai tonight (n) tối nay soccer match (n) trận đấu bóng. T reviews model sentences. -What are you going to do tonight ? -I’m going to watch T.V -What about you ?. +While – practice T asks Ss to listen to the dialogue Ss listen. T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss listen and repeat. T asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. Ss practice in pairs. T calls some pairs to practice T asks Ss to practice two dialogues with a partner then write in the notebook (Word cue Drill) Calls some pair to practice Asks Ss to write in the notebook. A . What are you going to do tonight ? B . I’m going to see a movies A . What are you going to do tomorrow ? B . I’m going to go walking . What about you ? A . Tonight . I’m going to help my mom B . Tomorrow. I’m going to play volleyball.. - T asks Ss to listen the dialogue between Nga and Ba then practice with a partner 2.

(216) Ss listen and practice reading. T asks Ss to answer ? What is Ba going to do on the weekend  He’s going to see a movie ? Which movies theater is he going to see  He is going to see at Sao Mai movie theater ? What is he going to see He is going to see Jurassic Park * Production (8ms) T asks Ss to look at B4/ 145 T explains the requirement T asks Ss to write the answer Ss write T calls some Ss to read their writing - On Saturday morning, I’m going to do my homework - On saturday afternoon, I’m going to play soccer - On saturday evening , I’m going to watch T.V - On Sunday morning, I’m going to go shopping - On Sunday afternoon , I’m going to play badminton. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson. d . Homework (2ms) -practice reading -do the exercise 1,2 page 115 ,116 wb -prepare new lesson. Date of planning23/3/2011. Date of teaching : 28/3/2011 class 6B 29/3/2011 class 6A. PERIOD 86. UNIT 14 . MAKING PLANS LESSON 4. FREE TIME PLANS (B5,6,7) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge: - Read to know the plan of Minh and his friends on weekend. - Listen to know the plan. -Write about the plans of friends on weekend. + Vocabulary:to bring a camera, to take a photo + structure : near future b . skills : - practice reading and answer the questions;listen and match - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of their activities in free time 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book 2.

(217) b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) *Question : T asks ss to write their things they are going to do this weekend. * Today we continue to learn Unit 14talk about the weekend plans (1') b. new lesson *warm up (2ms) T asks ss to play Chain Game. *practice (25ms) Pre – read T introduces the new words. Student’s activities * Answer: - On saturday morning , I’m going to do homework -On saturday afternoon , I’m going to go fishing -On saturday evening, I’m going to watch T.V. S1 I am going to go fishing S2 I am going to go fishing and jogging S3……………… bring camera(v): mang máy ảnh take some photos(v): chụp ảnh. T introduces the passage T asks Ss to read the passage and answer - T asks Ss to answer the questions ? Where are they going to have a picnic ? What things are they going to bring ? What are they going to do T calls some Ss to answer Listens and corrects T asks Ss to listen and match T explains the requirement TAPE Vui and her friends are going to camp for three days in SaPa , Vui is going to bring a tentand some food. lan is going to bring a ball . Ly is going to bring her camera to take some photos . Nga and Mai are going to bring some drinks.. Ss practice reading Ss answer the questions  They are going to have a picnic near a lake.  They are going to bring camera, some foods and some drinks  They are going to take some photos. Ss listen and match Vui : c+e Ly : b Lan : a Mai and Nga : d. T calls some Ss to answer Listens and corrects * Production ( 8ms ) - T asks Ss to make their plan. Place to go : beach Things to bring : Ball, camera, food, T asks Ss to answer the questions with their drink What to do : Play soccer partner 2.

(218) S1. What are you going to do on the weekend? S2. I am going to have a picnic S1. Where are you going to go ? S2. I am going to the beach with my Friends S1. What are you going to bring ? S2. I going to bring a ball, a camera, food and drink. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d . Homework (2ms) -Practice writing -do exercise 3 page 116 wb -prepare new lesson. Date of planning: 24/3/2011 6B 6A. Date of teaching : 29/3/2011 class 1/4/2011 class. PERIOD 87. UNIT 14 . MAKING PLANS LESSON 5. SUGGESTIONS (C1). 1.Objectives a.knowledge -ss may give the suggetions to do something + Vocabulary : pagoda, far, minibus, a suggestion, a good idea + structure : Let’s go camping What about + V-ing Why don’t we….. b . skills : - practice reading the dialogue and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c.Education - Teach Ss to take care of the things they do in the free time 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3Procedure Teacher’s activities Students' activities a. checking the previous lesson * Answer: (5ms) -I and my friends are going to have a picnic in Da *Question : Write about their lat plans -I’m going to bring food and drink ….. -Mai is going to have ………….. * Today we continue to learn Unit 14- Making suggestions to do something (1m) b. new lesson *warm up (2ms). Ss make a network 2.

(219) T asks ss to play Network about activities in summer vacation. *Presentation (8ms) T presents new words. Present model sentences. Visit ha long Bay Go fishing Play sports Go swimming ................................. Ss write in the notebook pagoda (n) chùa minibus (n) xe buýt nhỏ Let’s = Let’s us : chúng ta hãy far (adj) : xa suggestion (n): lời gợi ý a good idea(n): ý kiến hay -Let’s go to the zoo -How about going to the zoo? -Why don’t we go to the zoo? -yes, That’s a good idea Ss listen. *Practice (23ms) T asks Ss to listen to the tape. Ss listen and repeat. T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. Asks Ss to practice reading the dialogue T calls ss to check. Corrects mistakes. * Production (5ms) Asks Ss to make suggestions. Ss work in pairs -Let’s go to the canteen ? -that’s a good idea -Let’s play soccer -No, I don’t want to. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats grammar Let’s + V What about + V- ing….? Why don’t we + V….? d. Homework (2ms) -Practice reading the dialogue -practice making suggestions -do exercise 1,2 page 116 wb -prepare new lesson. 2.

(220) Date of planning: 31/3/2011 6B 6A. Date of teaching : 4/4/2011 class 4/4/2011 class. PERIOD 88. UNIT 14 . MAKING PLANS LESSON 6. SUGGESTIONS (C2,3). 1.Objectives a.knowledge -ss may give the suggetions to do something + Vocabulary : pagoda, far, minibus, a suggestion, a good idea + structure : Let’s go camping What about + V-ing? Why don’t we…..? b . skills : - practice reading the dialogue and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c.Education - Teach Ss to take care of the things they do in the free time 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3Procedure a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) *Question : Write abouit their plans. Ss write.. * Today we continue to learn Unit 14Making suggestions to do something (1m) b. new lesson *warm up (2ms) T asks ss to play Network about activities Ss answer and write the answer in the in summer vacation notebook * Practice (26ms) Asks Ss to answer the questions a, What does Nam want to do ? b, What does Nga want to do ? c, How does Lan want to travel ? d, Why doesn’t Nam want to walk ? e, How does he want to travel ? f , Why doesn’t Nga want to go by bike ? g, How does Ba want to travel ?. -Nam wants to go to Hue -Nga wants to go to Huong pagoda -Lan wants to walk there -Because It’s too far -He wants to travel by bike -Because It’s too hot -Ba wants to travel by minibus. T calls some Ss to answer Listens and corrects. Ss look at the book. * Production (8ms) T asks Ss to look at the C4/ 148. Ss practice speaking. T explains the requirement eg : let’s go to the beach. 2.

(221) That’s a good idea./ No, I don’t want to. Calls some pairs to practice listens and corrects. b. What about going to the pagoda ? No, I don’t want to. c. Let’s play volleyball . yes, that’s a good idea. d. Why don’t we go to the zoo ? yes, that’s a good idea . e. let’s play badminton No, I don’t want to. f. Why don’t we go camping? That’s a good idea.. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats grammar Let’s + V What about + V- ing….? Why don’t we + V….? d. Homework (2ms) -Practice reading the dialogue -practice making suggestions -do exercise 3 page 117 wb -prepare new lesson. Date of planning :31/3/2011. Date of teaching: 4/1/2011 class 6A 5/1/2011 class 6B. period 89. GRAMMAR PRACTICE 1.Objectives a. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : review - structure : review b . skills : practice speaking, writing doing the exercises - Help develope the student’s language and their communicative c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of their English and know how to improve their English 2. Teaching aids a. T : Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss : book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure 2.

(222) Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) - Question : Write sentences a, go camping b, play soccer * To practice the grammar , we study the lesson today (1m) b. new lesson *WARM UP (2ms) Make suggestions. Students' activities * Answer: a, Let’s go camping b, What about playing soccer ?. Let’s go to the store Yes, that’s a good idea Let’s play badminton yes, that’s a good idea. *PRACTICE (30ms). EXERCISE 1 :. T asks Ss to do exercise 1 Reviews the present simple. Ss do exercise. T calls some Ss to answer listens and corrects. a, Do you like sports ? Yes, I like sports What do you play ? I play badminton Do you play volleyball ? No, I don’t b, Does he like sports ? yes, he does he likes sports What does he play ? He plays soccer Does he play tennis ? No, he doesn’t c, Do they like sports ? yes, they do What do they play ? They swim Do they dive ? (lặn ) No, they don’t EXERCISE 2. T asks Ss to review the adverbs of frequency. always usually often sometimes never. T asks Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs . T calls some pairs to practice. once twice three times four times. Ss practice and write in the notebook. T asks Ss to write the answer in your exercise book. a. How often do you watch T.V ? 2.

(223) + I usually watch T.V b. How often do you go to the movie ? + I never go to the movie c. How often do you help your mom ? + I always help my mom d. How often do you go to the store ? + I sometimes go to the store e. How often do you play sports ? I play sports twice a week f. How often do you go fishing ? I never go fishing g. How often do you go swimmimg ? I never go swimming T help Ss to review the present progressive tense. EXERCISE 3. Aks Ss to do the exercise. S + am/is/are + V-ing Ss work in group, ask and answer the write in the notebook a, What are you watching ? + I’m watching this T.V sports show What are they playing ? + They are playing soccer Who is winning ? + My favorite team is winning the match b, What is mom cooking ? - She is cooking a chicken Are we having some rice , too ? - No, we aren’t We are having some noodles Is she cooking some vegetables yes, she is She is cooking some beans c, Are you doing your homework ? - Yes, I am doing my math. What are you reading, I’m reading my history book. Helps Ss to review future plan Asks Ss to answer the questions. EXERCISE 4 Ss practice asking and answering in pairs a, I’m going to play soccer b, I’m playing play tennis c, they are going to go camping d, They are going to go swimming e, They are going to watch T.v f, They are going to cook. T ask Ss to complete the dialogue. Ss complete the dialogue What are you going to do ? + I’m going to visit Ha Noi Where are you going to stay ? 2.

(224) T asks Ss to answer the questions. + I’m going to stay in a hotel How long are you going to stay ? + I’m going to stay for a week. a, What is Vui going to do. Ss answer and write the answer in the notebook She is going to visit ha Noi She is going to stay in a hotel She is going to stay for a week. T asks Ss to answer the questions about weather. EXERCISE 5. T asks Ss to answer the questions Calls some pairs to answer Listens and corrects. Ss answer and write the answer in the notebook. a, It is warm in the spring b, It is hot in summer c, It is cool in the fall d, It is cold in winter EXERCISE 6 I’m going to watch T.V I’m going to play badminton I’m going to visit my grandmother.. c. CONSOLIDATION (5ms) Help Ss to remember the grammar. Ss listen and take note Present simple: Do/ Does Adverb of frequency Present progressive: S + am/is/are + Ving Near future: S + am/ is/ are/ + going to + V Making suggestion: Let’s + V What about + Ving… Why don’t we + V…. Ask and answer about the weather and activities in each season. d, Homeworks (2ms) T asks Ss to do the exercise and prepare for the test. AT HOME Review the grammar and do the exercise Prepare for test. Date of planning:1/4/2011. Date of teaching : 5/1/2011 class 6B 2.

(225) 7/1/2011 class 6A period 90.TEST 45 MINUTES 1.Objectives: a. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : review - structure : review present simle, present progressive, near future b . skills : practice writing , reading, and do exercises - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ps to be honest in doing test 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ps . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure a. checking the old lesson (no ) b. new lesson (45ms) QUESTION 1 I, Listen and fill in the gaps(2points) There are four seasons in a year in our country. They are spring, summer , fall and …………..In the spring , the weather is usually ………….. After spring , it is the summer. In ……… summer, the days are long and the nights are short. Fall is a nice season. The weather is very cool. In the winter, it's usually cold. The day are short and the night are…………….. II, Choose the best answers (2points ) 1, It’s usually …………in the summer A, hot B, cold C, cool 2, …………..you like sports ? A, are B , Do C, does 3, She is going to stay in a hotel ………….two days A, with B, on C, for 4, What about……………volleyball? A, play B, playing C, to play III, put the words in the correct order (3points ) 1, going/ they/ to / Ha Long bay/ are / visit ………………………………………………………………………………………… . 2, usually/ I / badminton/ play ………………………………………………………………………………………… . 3, zoo / go / let’s / to / the ………………………………………………………………………………………… . IV, Read and answer the questions (3points) Nam is a student . he usually reads in his free time . he sometimes goes fishing on Sunday. he is going to visit his grandmother this summer vacation. He is going to go to the pagoda. He is going to stay with his grandmother for half a month. 1, What does Nam do in his free time ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… . 2, Does he go camping on Sunday ? 2.

(226) ……………………………………………………………………………………….... 3, What is he going to do this summer vacation ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… QUESTION 2 I, Listen and fill in the gaps(2points) There are four seasons in a year in our country. They are spring, summer , fall and …………..In the spring , the weather is usually ………….. After spring , it is the summer. In ……… summer, the days are long and the nights are short. Fall is a nice season. The weather is very cool. In the winter, it's usually cold. The days are short and the nights are…………….. II, Choose the best answers (2points ) 1, I usually have……………at seven o’clock A, breakfast B, am C, eat 2, …………..you like sports ? A, are B , Do C, does 3, She is going to stay in a hotel ………….two days A, with B, on C, for 4, let’s…………volleyball A, play B, playing C, to play III, Read and answer the questions (3points) Nam is a student . he usually reads in his free time . he sometimes goes fishing on Sunday. he is going ti visit his grandmother this summer vacation.he is going to go to pagoda. he is going to stay with his grandmother for half a month. 1, What does Nam do in his free time ? 2, Does he go camping on Sunday ? 3, What is he going to do this summer vacation ? IV, put the words in the correct order (3points ) 1, going/ she/ to / Ngoc Son temple/ is/ visit 2, usually/ they / badminton/ play 3, zoo / going / what about / to / the. Key and mark QUESTION 1 : I,Listen…… (2points) each correct is 0,5 Winter/ warm/ the /long II . choose the best answers (2points ) each correct is 0,5 1 . A , hot 2 . B , do 3 . C , for 4 . B . playing III . Put the words in the correct order (3points ) each correct is 1 1, They are going to visit Ha Long Bay 2, I usually play badminton 2.

(227) 3, Let’s go to the zoo IV .read then answer the question (3points) each correct is 1 1. Nam usually reads in his free time 2, No, he doesn’t 3, He is going to visit his grandmother QUESTION 2 : I,Listen…… (2points) each correct is 0,5 Winter/ warm/ the /long II . choose the best answers (2points ) each correct is 0,5 1 . A , hot 2 . B , do 3 . C , for 4 . B . playing III .read then answer the question (3points) each correct is 1 1 . Nam usually reads in his free time 2, No, he doesn’t 3, He is going to visit his grandmother IV . Put the words in the correct order (3points ) each correct is 1 1, They are going to visit Ha Long Bay 2, I usually play badminton 3, Let’s go to the zoo Date of planning:3/4/2011. Date of teaching : 9/4/2011 class 6A 9/4/2011 class 6B period 91. CORRECT THE TEST. 1.Objectives a. Knowledge; - Vocabulary : review - structure : present simple. present progessive tense, near future b . skills : practice writing the answers for questions, listen and match, read the passage and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - know the mistakes in the test 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ps . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities. Student’activities. a. checking the previous lesson (omit) * To know the mistakes of the test , we study the lesson today (1m). b. new lesson (35 ms). Đề 1 (6A) I . choose the best answersd (2points ) 1 . A , hot. Đề 1 2.

(228) I . T present grammar - the weather in the year hot, cold, warm , cool k. Preposition l. structure ; What about + Ving. 2 . B , do 3 . C , for 4 . B . playing II . Put the words in the correct order (3points ) 1, They are going to visit Ha Long Bay 2, I usually play badminton 3, Let’s go to the zoo. II. Adverb of frequerncy be going to Let’s + V. III . Be going to. III .read then answer the question (3points) 1 . Nam usually read s in his free time 2, No, he doesn’t 3, He is goping to visit his grandmother. IV. in their favourite The plan in the future. IV . Answer the question about you (2points) 1, I go swimming 2 , I am going to visit my friends. Đề 2 : I . Time Verbs preposition adverbs of frequency. Đề 2 ( 6B) I . choose the best answersd (2points ) 1 . A , breakfast 2 . B , do 3 . C , for 4 . A . playing. II . The plan in the futrureand structure : II . Put the words in the correct order What about + Ving (3points ) 1, She is going to visit Ngoc Son temple 2, They usually play badminton 3, What about going to the zoo ? III . The work in their free time. III .read then answer the question (3points) 1 . Nam usually read s in his free time 2, No, he doesn’t 3, He is going to visit his grandmother. IV .What they like to do in the summer. IV . Answer the question about you (2points) 1, It is hot 2 , I am going to go fishing. 4.Teacher's remark (8'): *Knowledge: ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………. * Skills: ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2.

(229) ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………. * Attitude: ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………. T calls mark. *Homework (1m) Prepare the new lesson. Date of planning: 5/4/2011. Date of teaching : 9/4/2011 class 6B 14/4/2011 class 6A. period 92. UNIT 15 . COUNTRIES Lesson 1 .We are the world (A1,2,3) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge: -Ss may read and know the names of the countries as well as the language -Ss may introduce their country, language of themshelves and of someone. - Vocabulary : from, canada, france, china, Japan, Great Britain , Australia , the USA - structure : Where are you from ? I’m from Viet Nam. b . skills : - practice Asking and answering the questions, practice speaking country’s name and It’s nationality and language - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. .Education - Teach Ss to be frond of our country and know name of some countries in the world 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (no) * Today we learn Unit 15- talk about people and countries (1m) b. new lesson *Warm up (2ms) Asks Ss to tell the name of countries they know. Students' activities. Ss tell.. *Presentation (8ms) T asks Ss to look at the picture T introduces the new words. Ss listen world (n) 2. thế giới.

(230) from (prep) từ nationality (n) quốc tịch language (n) ngôn ngữ Canada (n) nước Canada France (n) nước pháp China (n) nước Trung Hoa The USA (n) nước Mĩ Japan (n) nước Nhật Bản Great Britain (n) nước Anh Australia (n) nước Uc. T present model sentences. *Where are you from ? I’m from ……….. E.g:Where are you from ? I’m from Viet Nam *Where is she from ? She is from ………………. E.g:Where is she from ? She is from China What is her nationality ? She is French Which language does she speak ? She speaks French. *Practice (20ms) T asks Ss to listen T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss listen and repeat. T asks Ss to ask and answer in pairs. Ss work in pairs Where is Laura from ? She is from Canada Where is Marie from ? She is from France Where is Lee from ? He’s from China Where is Susan from ? She is from Great Britain. T calls some pairs to practice listens and corrects T asks Ss to look at the picture A2 page 155 T asks Ss to listen. Ss practice reading. T asks Ss to listen and repeat T asks Ss to practice reading T asks Ss to play role with the people in the picture and talk. Ss listen. T calls some Ss to practice listens and corrects * Production (10ms) T asks Ss to look at the table to listen and. eg . My name is Laura I’m from Canada I speak English and French. Ss listen and repeat. 2.

(231) read T asks Ss to practice reading calls some Ss to read Listens and corrects. Ss practice reading. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d . Homework (2ms) - ss practice reading - do the exercises1,2 page 126,127 wb. - prepare new lesson. Ss practice to introduce. Date of planning :10/4/2011. Date of teaching : 16/4/2011class 6A 16/4/2011 class 6B period 93. UNIT 15 .COUNTRIES Lesson 2 . We are the world (A4,5,6). 1.Objectives a. Knowledge: ask answer about the countries , nationality, language - Vocabulary : nationality, language - structure : What is his nationality ? He is English Which language do you speak ? I speak Vietnamese b . skills : - practice dialogue, read and write a postcard, ask and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of everyone 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) - Question : Ss talk about themselves key : My name is Nga. I’m from Viet nam. I speak Vietnamese. * Today we continue to learn Unit 15 to talk about the countries , nationality, language (1m) b. new lesson *Warm up (2ms) T asks ss to play the game. Students' activities. Matching A Viet Nam 2. B English.

(232) The USA Canada China Japan *Practice (25ms) Asks Ss to make the dialogue (part 4). Vietnamese Chinese Japanese English and French. Ss make a dialogue and practice with a partner A. Who is that ? B. That is Yoko A. Where is he from ? B. He is from Japan A. What is his nationality ? B. He is Japanese A. Which language does he speak ? B. He speaks Japanese. T introduces the postcard Asks Ss to listen Asks Ss to read the postcard T asks Ss to write a postcard to Nhan from Minh. Ps write Dear Nhan, I am on vacation in Ha Noi . The weather is hot I’m traveling by car and visiting a lot of interesting places Tomorrow, I’m going to visit Ngoc Son temple in Ha Noi. Love, Minh. T calls some Ss to read listens and corrects * Production (8ms) T asks Ss to review some questions and answer T asks Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs T calls some pairs to practice Listens and corrects a, What’s your name ? My name is Hoang b, How old are you ? I’m twelve c, Where are you from ? I’m from Viet Nam d, Which language do you speak ? I speak Vietnamese e, Which school do you go ? I go to SM secondary school f, Which great are you in ? I’m in grade 6 c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d , Homework (2ms) 2.

(233) - T asks Ss to practice the dialogue - do the exercise 3,4 page 126,127 in the workbook -prepare new lesson. Date of planning:13/4/2011. Date of teaching : 18/4/2011 class 6A 18/4/2011 class 6B period 94. UNIT 15 . COUNTRIES Lesson 3.Cities, buidings and people (B 1,2). 1.Objecyives a. Knowledge - Ss understand and remember about the comparatives with short adjectives - Reading the passage which talk about the capitals. - Ss may introduce the city they love. - Vocabulary : building, population, million - structure : compatives of adjectives b . skills : practice speaking, reading and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the Cities in the world and know how to compare with others 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ps . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) - Question : call some ss to ask and answer. * Today we continue to learn Unit 15- Talk about the cities, buildings (1m) b. new lesson *Warm up (2ms) Network About the cities in the world. 2. Student’s activities * Answer: - Who’s that ? - That is Marie - Where is she from ? - She is from France - Which language does she speak ? - She speaks French. HaNoi Tokyo.

(234) London Singapore ……………………. *Presentation (8ms) T asks Ss to look at the pictures T presents new words Building (n) toà nhà capital (n) thủ đô population (n)dân số high (adj): cao thick (adj) : dầy structure (n): cấu trúc million (n): triệu. T presents the structures.  So sánh hơn đối với tính từ ngắn S + be + Adj + er + than + O eg : Hung is taller than Nam This house is smaller than that home  So sánh bậc nhất đối với tính từ ngắn S + be + the + Adj + est + O e.g: This house is the smallest * How long/ high/ thick……. *Practice (18ms) T asks Ss to practice reading Calls some Ss to read Listens and corrects T asks Ss to read the text. Ss practice reading. T calls some Ss to read Listens and corrects T asks Ss to compare T asks Ss to answer the questions a, Is Ha Noi bigger than HCM city? b, Which is the biggest city in the world ? c, Which ic bigger : Lon Don or ToKyo ? T calls some ss to answer Listens and corrects c, Production (10ms) T asks Ss to compare with a partner ? What is the biggest City in the world ? What is the tallest building in the world d . Homeworks (2ms) - Learn lesson -Do exercise 1,2 in wb - Prepare the new lesson. Ss read Ss read. No, It isn’t Mexcio City is the biggest City in the world Tokyo is bigger than Lon Don. 2.

(235) Date of planning:13/4/2011. Date of teaching : 18/4/2011 class 6A 18/4/2011 class 6B period 95. UNIT 15 . COUNTRIES Lesson 3.Cities, buidings and people (B 3,4). 1.Objecyives a. Knowledge - Ss understand the passage about the tourist places over the world and may introduce some places - Vocabulary 442 meters high, 6,000 km long, 12m thick - structure : ask and answer about compatives of adjectives ask and answer about the long & thick b . skills : practice speaking, raecing and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the Cities in the world and know how to compare with others 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ps . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Answer: * Question : call some ss answer No, It isn’t a, Is Ha Noi bigger than HCM city? b, Which is the biggest city in the world ? Mexcio City is the biggest City in the world c, Which ic bigger : Lon Don or ToKyo ? Tokyo is bigger than Lon Don * Today we continue to learn Unit 15Talk about the cities, buildings (1m) b. new lesson *Warm up (2ms) -tell some cities Ss answer * Presetation (8') T asks Ss to look at the picture B3 page 160 T asks Ss to read the text Ss read - calls some ss to read Listens and corrects * Practice (15') T asks Ss to answer the questions ? Which is taller : sears tower or petronas  Petronas Twin Towers is taller than Sears twin towers ? Tower ? How high is Sears tower  It is 442 meters high ? How high is Petronas twin towers It is 452 meter high ? Is it the tallest building in the world  Yes, it is T asks Ss to look at the picture and ask Ss look at the picture and answer ? What is it ? What do you know about the Great  It is a wall Wall - T asks Ss to read and answer the questions Ss practice reading and answer the questions ? How long is the Great Wall It is over 6000 Kms long 2.

(236) ? How high is the Great Wall ? How thick is the Great Wall. It is between 4 and 12 meters high it is over 9 meter thick. T calls some Ss to answer Listens and corrects c, Production (10ms) T asks Ss to compare with a partner Mexico is the biggest City ? What is the biggest City in the world ? What is the tallest building in the world Petronas twin towers…. It’s Everest ? What is the highest mountain in the world It's Phanxipang ? What is the highest mountain in VietNam T calls some ss to answer Listens and checks c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d . Homeworks (2ms) -T asks Ss to practice and read and do the exercises -learn by heart new words -prepare new lesson. *****************************************. Date of planning:14/4/2011. Date of teaching : 19/4/2011 class 6A 21/4/2011 class 6B period 96. UNIT 15 . COUNTRIES Lesson 4 . Natural features (C1,2). 1.Objectives a. Knowledge -Ss understand the paragraph which talk about the natural features of Viet Nam - Ss may talk and write about the natural features of Viet Nam, use: a lot / lot of/ much. + Vocabulary : natural feature, lots of, rain, forest, desert, stsrt, flow, tibet, mediterranear + structure : - Any in the negative and question We don’t have any desert - a lot / lot of/ many with the countable nouns in the positive We have lots of lakes - much/ lots of/a lot of with the uncountable nouns 2.

(237) We have a lot of rain. b . skills : practice reading and writing . Ask and answer the questions in pairs - talk about natural feature in VN and in the world - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to be proud of our country 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks ss to answer the questions a. What is the highest mountain in the world. How high is it ? b. What is the highest mountain in VN ?. Students' activities * Answer: a.Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world . It is 8848 meters high. b. Phanxiphang is the highest mountain in VN.. * Today we continue to learn Unit 15Talk about our country (1m) b. new lesson *Warm up( 2ms) Matching The pictures with the names 1- SaPa 2- Halong Bay 3- Cuc Phuong 4- Ca Mau 5- Nha Trang *Pre - reading(8ms) T asks Ss to look at the picture. Ss look.. Presents new words. Natural features (n) :Đặc điểm tự nhiên rain (n) mưa forest (n) rừng desert (n) sa mạc lots of : nhiều Ss read.. T asks Ss to listen . *While – reading(15ms) T asks Ss to listen to the text T asks Ss to listen and repeat. Ss listen. T asks Ss to practice reading. Ss listen and repeat. Calls some Ss to read Listens and corrects T asks ss to answer the questions ? Is yours country beautiful ? Do we have lots of mountains ?. Ss practice reading.  yes, it is 2.

(238) T asks Ss to look at the pictures and read the passage and write it in the notebook.  yes, we do Ss write Viet Nam has lots of mountains. It has great rivers and lots of lakes. there is a lot of rain so the country is very green. There are big forests and there are many beautiful beaches. There aren’t any deserts.. T asks Ss to look at the picture and ask and answer. Ss work in pairs Does VN has mountains ? yes, It does Does VN have great rivers ? yes, It does Does VN have any deserts ? yes, it does Does VN have any deserts ? No, it doesn’t. T calls some ss to practice * Production (10ms) T asks ss to answer Does SM has mountains ? Does SM have great rivers ?. yes, It does/ no, it doesn't.. Does SM have any deserts ?. yes, It does/ no, it doesn't. yes, it does/no, it doesn't.. T calls some Ss to answer listens and corrects c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d, Homework (2ms) -Learn by heart all new words -practice reading -do the exercise1,2 page 130 wb -prepare new lesson. Date of planning:20/4/2011. Date of teaching : 25/4/2011 class 6B 25/4/2011 class 6A Period 97 . UNIT 15 . COUNTRIES Lesson 5 . Natural features (C3). 1.Objectives a. Knowledge -Read to know the paragrap to talk about the big river and the high mountains in the world. -Ss may tell the rivers and mountains in the world. +Vocabulary : natural feature, lots of, rain, forest, desert, stsrt, flow, tibet, 2.

(239) mediterranear + structure : We have lots of lakes We don’t have any desert Comparision b . skills : - practice reading and writing . - Ask and answer the questions in pairs - talk about natural feature in VN and in the world - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to be proud of our country 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks Ss to answer the questions a. What is the highest mountain in the world. How high is it ? b. What is the highest mountain in VN ? * Today we continue to learn Unit 15Talk about some big revers and high mountains in the world (1m) b. new lesson *Warm up( 2ms) Matching The pictures with the names. Student’s activities *Answer a. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world . It is 8848 meters high b. Phanxiphang is the highest mountain in VN.. 1- SaPa 2- Halong Bay 3- Cuc Phuong 4- Ca Mau 5- Nha Trang. *Practice (23ms) *Pre - read T asks Ss to look at the picture Present new words. flow (v) chảy Gulf of tonkin(n) : vịnh bắc bộ Tibet(n) : tây tạng North Africa(n) :bắc phi Mediterranear sea(n) : biển địa trung hải. T asks Ss to listen and repeat T asks Ss to read the text T calls Ss to read. Ss practice reading. Listens and corrects T asks Ss to answer the questions. Ss read. Ss ask and anwer the questions in pairs a, Which is the Longest river in VN ? Me Kong river is the longest river in VN 2.

(240) b, Where does the Mekong river start ? It starts in Tibet c, Which is the logest river in the world ? - Nile river is the longest river in the world d, Which sea does the Nile river flow to ? - It flows to Mediterranear sea e, Which is the highest mpuntain in the world f , Which is the highest mountain in Vn ? - Phanxiphang is the highest mountain in VN.. T calls some Ss to answer Listens and corrects * Production (10ms) T asks Ss to answer a. How long is the Red river ? b, How long is the Nile river ? c, How high is Phanxiphang ? d, How high is the Everest ? T calls some Ss to answer listens and corrects c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d. Homework (2ms) - Learn by heart all new words - practice reading - do the exercise 3 page 131 wb. - prepare new lesson. Date of planning:20/4/2011. It is about 1.200 km long It is 6,437 km long It’s 1,143 meters high It is 8,848 meters high. Date of teaching: 25/4/2011 class 6B 26/4/2011 class 6A. period 98 . UNIT 16 . MAN AND THE ENVIRONMEMT Lesson 1. Animals and plants (A1,2,3) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge: Ss know the job of a farmer Ss may use : some/ a lot of/ a little/a few with the nouns - Vocabulary : animal, plant, produce, grow, buffalo, plow, cart…………….. - structure : some, any, alots of, a few, a little How much …….+ noun How many …….+ noun b . skills : practice reading and answering the questions, talk about the quanlity - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary 2.

(241) c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of farmer’s life 2.Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks ps to ask and answer the questions a, Which is the longest river in the world ? b, Which is the highest mountain in the world ? * Today we are going to learn Unit 16 talk about man and environment (1m) b. new lesson *Warm up(3ms) Network About fruit and vegetables. Students' activities * Answer : a, Nile river is the longest river in the world b. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world. tomato cabbage orange rice ………………………………. *Presentation (8ms) T asks Ss to look at the pictures and answer the questions ? what is this ? ? How much is there T presents new words. T presents model sentences. T explain the difference between a little / a few. some (adj) một ít a little (adj) một ít a few (adj) một vài a lot of / lots of (adj) nhiều produce (v) nuôi , trồng animal (n): con vật plow(v): cày, bừa pull(v): kéo, đẩy cart (n); xe bò cow (n): bò sữa dog (n): con chó cat (n): con mèo How much rice is there ? There is some rice rice There is a lot of / a little rice How much eggs are there. There are some eggs a lot of eggs 2.

(242) *Practice (18ms) Asks Ss to read and complete the table. T asks Ss to read and answer the questions. T asks Ss to ask and answer in pairs Listens and corrects c . Production (6ms) T asks Ss to read Ask Ss to read and write T asks ss to listen and write the title of the picture under the right heading a, There are a lot of potatoes b, there are some tomatoe c, There are a lot of onions d, There are a few vegetable e, there is a little rice f, there are some T asks Ss to write on the board c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d . Homework (2ms) -learn by heart new words -practice reading -do the exercise1,2 page 132 wb. -prepare new lesson. a few eggs Ss write on the notebook a little a few rice eggs sugar orange milk apples water. ss practice reading and complete the table Things Mr Hai Things he has produces Paddy rice rice a small vegetable vegetable field fruit Fruit trees milk cows/ buffalo eggs chicken Ss answer and write the answer in the notebook a, he produces a lot of rice b, yes, he does c, he produces a little fruit d, They produce a little milk e, they produce a lot of eggs Ss work in pairs. a, a lot of b, some c, a lot of d, a few e, a little f, some. 2.

(243) Date of planning: 21/4/2011. Date of teaching : 26/4/2011 clas 6A 26/4/2011 clas 6B period 99. UNIT 16 . MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 1 .Animals and Plants (A4,5) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge Ss know the environment in Viet Nam - Vocabulary : population, land, cut down, burn, destroy, danger - structure :- Why does the world need ? - Because there are more people b . skills :- practice listening and writing - Read and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their knowledge about wild animal c. Education - Teach ss to take care of the environment and wild animals, know how to protect them 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) *Question : Write a little / a few. Students' activities *Answer : a little rice, a few oranges, a little sugar, a little water, a little milk, a few apples, a few eggs. * Today we continue to learn Unit 16 to know the environment in Viet Nam (1m) b. new lesson *WARM UP (3ms) T asks ss to look at the pictures and write name of each picture. Ss write a , potato b, tomato c, onion. *Practice (24ms) T asks Ss to look at the picture and introduce the text T presents new words. cut down : 2. d, vegetable e, rice f, flower. đốn hạ cây.

(244) destroy (v) phá huỷ danger (n) đe doạ, nguy hiểm pollute (v) làm ô nhiễm burn (v):đốt. T asks Ss to read and answer the questions Why do we need more land ? Because there are more people. Ss answer the questions a, because there are more people b, because they need more fields c, because we are destroying their home and their environment. Then T asks ss to answer Listens and corrects c . Production (8ms) T introduces the name of animals. elephant (n) con voi camel (n) con lạc đà panda (n) gấu trúc python (n) con trăn leopard (n) con báo gorillar (n) con tinh tinh Ss practice reading. c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d .Homework (2ms) -Learn by heart all new words -practice reading -do exercise 3 page 133 wb. -prepare new lesson. Date of planning:28/4/2011. Date of teaching :2/5/2011 class 6A 2/5/2011 class 6B. period 100 . UNIT 16 .MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 3 . Pollution (B1) 1.Objectives a. Knowledge: Ss read a passage to know the environment now. - Vocabulary : pollution, environment, waste, coal, gas, power, air, trash - structure : Present progessive Too much with nouns b . skills : - practice reading and answer the questions 2.

(245) - Help develope the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education . - Teach Ss to know how to protect the environment 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks ps write the name of animals *To know the environment now, we study the lesson today (1m) b. The new lesson *WARM UP (3ms) ? Do you leave trash every where ? Do you burn the forest and kill animals ? Why the environment polluted. Student’s activities * Answer : elephant, camal, panda, python, chimpanzee, leopard. No, I don’t No, I don’t Because……………... *Presentation (8ms) T asks ss to look at the picture ? What can you see in the picture. trash a lot of trash yes, I do. ? Do you think they are dirty T presents new words. environment (n) môi trường waste (v) lãng phí coal (n) than đá gas (n) khí ga save (v) tiết kiệm pollute (v) làm ô nhiễm - Don’t throw trash in the street - keep off the grass T presents model sentences Ss read the text *Practice (16ms) T asks Ss to read the text. Ss answer and write the answer in the notebook a, Because we are destroying the forest b, we are burning too much coal, oil and gas c, pollution comes from trash and gas d, trash is polluting the land, the rivers and oceans. calls Ss to read asks Ss to answer the question. ss read.. T listens and checks *Production (8ms) 2.

(246) T asks ss to read the text. T corrects mistakes. c. Consolidation(2ms) T repeats the lesson d. Homework (2ms) - Learn by heart all new words - do the exercise 1,2 page 134 wb - prepare new lesson. Date of planning:28/4/2011. Date of teaching : 2/5/2011 class 6B 3/5/2011 class 6A period 101.UNIT 16. MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 4 . pollution (B2,3). 1.Objectives a. Knowledge - ss know the rules to protect the environment - ss may write the things do or don't + Vocabulary : should, shouldn’t + structure : S + should / shouldn’t + V b . skills : practice reading the dialogue. write the sentences using should and shouldn’t - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the environment 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure teacher’s activities Student’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks ss to write new words * Answer: environment, coal, gas, pollution, waste, save, collect, keep off * Today we continue to learn Unit 16Talk about the pollution, we study the lesson today (1m) b. new lesson *WARM UP (3ms) Talk about the environment now. Ss answer. * Presentation (8ms) 2.

(247) T presents new words keep off (v) tránh xa throw (v) ném pick (v) ngắt hái damage (v) làm hại collect (v) thu gom. T introduces do & don't T asks Ss to look at the picture T asks Ss to listen and read. *do or don't. Ss practice reading *Practice (25ms) T asks Ss to match the command with the pictures Ss practice T calls some ss to read listens and corrects Picture a - c b-f c- a d- h e- e f- b g-g h-d T asks Ss to read ( play with words) Ss read. T corrects mistake. * production (10ms ) T asks ss to write the things they should / shouldn’t do with the environment c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d, Homework (2ms) - T asks Ss to practice reading - do the exercises and prepare new lesson. 2.

(248) Date of planning:29/4/2011. Date of teaching : 3/5/2011 class 6B 5/5/2011 class 6A period 102.UNIT 16. MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 4 . pollution (B4,5,6). 1.Objectives a. Knowledge - ss know the rules to protect the environment - ss may write the things do or don't + Vocabulary : should, shouldn’t + structure : S + should / shouldn’t + V b . skills : practice reading the dialogue. write the sentences using should and shouldn’t - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the environment 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities Student’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks ss to write new words * Answer: environment, coal, gas, pollution, waste, save, collect, keep off * Today we continue to learn Unit 16Talk about the pollution, we study the lesson today (1m) b. new lesson *WARM UP (3ms) Talk about the environment now. * Presentation (8ms) T presents new words T introduces should and shouldn't. Ss listen. T introduces the dialogue T introduces the structures. Ss write in the notebook should ; nên should not = shouldn’t : không nên S + should / shouldn’t + V eg : you should listen to the teacher. T asks Ss to listen and repeat. T asks Ss to practice reading Ss practice reading calls some pairs to practice listens and corrects T asks Ss to look at the pictures and make sentences call some pairs to practice Listens and corrects T asks Ss to write on the notebook. Ss work in group. 2.

(249) b, We should save water we should turn off the faucet c, We shouldn’t damage tree d, we should collect bottles and cans e, We shouldn’t pick flowers. T presents the text T asks ss to read T asks ss to practice reading T calls some ss to read T asks ss to answer the questions. Ss answer the questions a, We collect waste food, empty bottles and cans , waste paper, scrap metal and old plastic then we recycle them b, We feed waste food to pigs c, factiries recycle them d, yes, I do e, I collect waste paper, bottles and cans. * production (10ms ) T asks ss to write the things they should / shouldn’t do with the environment. Ss write We should burn the forest We shouldn’t leave trash every where We should recycle and reuse bottles and cans or plastic bag We should plant a lot of green tree. T calls some ss to read their writing listens and corrects c. Consolidation (2ms) T repeats the lesson d, Homework (2ms) - practice reading and writing - do the exercise - prepare new lesson Date of planning: 4/5/2011 class 6A. Date of teaching : 9/5/2011 9/5/2011 class. 6B period 103. GRAMMAR PRACTICE. 1.Objectives a. Knowledge - Vocabulary : review - structure : - Where are you from? - Compare of adjective - Indefinite quantifier - Present progessive b . skills : - practice writing the answers for questions, listen and match, read the passage and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary 2.

(250) c. Education - Teach Ss to take care of the things they do in the free time 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) * Question : T asks ss to ask and answer the questions. Students' activities. * Answer : How often do Ba and Lan go to the zoo ? - They sometimes go to the zoo How often do they go to the park ? - They often go to the park * Today we review grammar from Unit 14 (1m) b. new lesson *WARM UP (3ms) T asks ss to answer the questions Ss answer What is your name ? My name is… Where are you from ? I am from…… How old are you ? I am…… *PRACTICE (31ms) T reviews present simple. T presents present simple and present progressive  S+V+O  S + tobe + V- ing + O. 1. Present simple a. Nam : Where are you from Tom : I am from canada Nam : Do you speak Vietnamese ? Tom : No, I don’t I speak English and french b, Tom is from Canada he speaks English and french c, lee is from China he speaks Chinese d, Yoko is from Japan She speaks japanese e, Minh is from viet nam He speaks Vietnamese. f, John is from the USA he speaks English 2 . Present simple and present progessive a, What is her name ? her name is SuSan b, Where does she live ? she lives in London c, Where is she staying now ? She is staying in Ha Noi now d, What does she do ? she is a teacher e, What does she teach ? She teaches English 2.

(251) T presents the Adjective. f, Does she teach you ? No, she doesn’t teach me Mr Hai teaches me. * S + tobe +Adj + er + than + O * S + tobe + the + Adj + est + O. 3. Adjective : Comparatives and superlatives Long short tall small big high thick. T presents the indefinite quantifiers. c. CONSOLIDATION (5 ms) T repeats the grammar. d . Homework (2ms) - Review what we learn - Do exercises - prepare new lesson. longer shorter taller smaller biger higher thicker. longest shortest tallest smallest biggest highest thickest. a, The Mekong river is long. The Amazon River is longer than Mekong . The Nile is the longest river in the world. b, The Wreat wall of China is long . It is the longest structure in the world c, Sears Tower in Chicago is tall, but it isn’t the tallest building in the world. PETRONAS Twin Towers in Kuala Lumpur is taller than Sears Tower . It is the tallest building in the world. d, Ha Noi is big , but its isn’t the biggest City in viet nam. Ho Chi Minh City is bigger than Ha Noi . It is the biggest Citry in Viet Nam. But Mexico City is the biggest City in the world. 4 . indefinite quantifiers ; a few, a little, a lot/lots 1 .a lot 2. a little 3.a few 4.a lot 2. lots 3. a lot Ss remmember The present simple The present progressive Comparision Indefinite quantifiers. 2.

(252) Date of planning: 4/5/2011. Date of teaching : 9/5/2011 class 6b 10/5/2011 class 6a. period 103. REVIEW 1.Objectives a. Knowledge - Vocabulary : Review - structure : present simple : tobe, verbs there : - there is, there are Commands this , that question words b . skills : practice writing the answers for questions, listen and match, read the passage and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Education - Teach ss to take care of the things they do in the free time 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) - Question : T asks ss to ask and answer the questions. Students' activities * Answer: How often do ba and Lan go to the zoo ? - They sometimes go to the zoo How often do they go to the park ? - They often go to the park. * Today we continue to review the grammar (1m) b. new lesson *WARM UP (3ms) Matching. 7/7 5/7 4/7 2/7 sometimes 0/7. *PRACTICE (23ms) T presents the grammar 1, tobe. always usually often. 1, a, I– am -> I’m b, he – is – >he’s c, She – is –> she’s d, It – is –> it’s e , you – are –> you’re f, we – are –> we’re g, they – are –> they’re. 2, there. 2, there there is 2. never.

(253) 3, commands. there are 3,Commands come in sit down stand up open your book close your book. 4 , this , that. 4. this , that. 5 , question words. 5. question words How, what , where , who , when, which,. c , Production ( 15ms) Asks Ss to do exercises. Ss do the exercises 1, (tobe) a, How old ….you ? b, How old ….. she ? c, ….she twelve ? d, …. they eleven ? 2, there is , there are , there aren’t, there isn’t a, How many tables …. ….? There…. one b, ….. ……a lake ? No, ….. ….. c, …… …… any flowers ? yes, …… ……. d, How many chairs ….. ……. ? ……. …….. four. 3, Question words a, ….. old are you ? I am twelve b, ……. is your name ? My name is Nam c, …….. do you live ? i live in Ha Noi d, ….. is this ? This is my friend Chi e, ……is that ? that is my sister f, …….does she do ? She is a student. d , Homework (2ms) - T asks ss to learn old lesson . - do the exercises - prepare new lesson. 2.

(254) Date of planning :5/5/2011. period 104.. Date of teaching : 10/5/2011 class 6B 12/5/2011 class 6A REVIEW. 1.Objectives a. Knowledge - Vocabulary : Review - structure : pronouns, Adjective days of week present progessive tense , preposition possessive ; ’s ( sở hữu cách ) b . skills : practice writing the answers for questions, listen and match, read the passage and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary cEducation - Teach ss to take care of the things they do in the free time 2. Teaching aids a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ss . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. Procedure teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) - Question : T asks ss to ask and answer the questions * Today we continue to review the grammar(1m) b. new lesson *WARM UP (2ms) Asks Ss to write the opposite meaning. Student’s activities * Asnswer : How often do you go to the zoo ? - I sometimes/………… go to the zoo How often do you go to the park ? - I often/ ………… go to the park. Ss write hot hungry tall big black. *PRACTICE (23ms) T presents the grammar 1, possessive pronouns I you he/she/it we / they 2, Adjective 2. my your his/her/its our / their.

(255) tall, small, short, big, high, thin, fat, light, …… 3, Days of week. 4 , Present progessive tense. 5 , Adverb of frequency c , Production ( 15ms) Asks Ss to do exercises. d , Homework (2ms) - T asks Ss to learn old lesson . - do the exercises - prepare new lesson. Date of planning: 10/5/2011. Monday, tuesday, wednesday, thursday, friday, saturday, Sunday Form : S + tobe + Ving + O Eg , I am learning English now always, usually, often , sometimes, never Ss do the exercises 1, Days of the week a, When do you have volleyball ?  We have volleyball on ….. b, When do you have physic ?  I have physic on ….. c, When do you have soccer ?  I have soccer on ….. d, When do you have geography ?  I have geography on…. e, What do you do on saturday and Sunday ? I help my mom….. 2, Propgressive tense a, Are you (go)…….. to school ? yes, I am b, ….. you waiting for the bus ? No, I’m not I am walking to school c, …. she going to school ? yes, she is d, Is she waiting for the bus ? No, she isn’t. She (walk )…. ………to school. Date of teaching : 16/5/2011 class 6A 16/5/2011class 6B. period 105. WRITTEN TEST ON ENGLISH 1.Objectives a. Knowledge - Vocabulary : Review 2.

(256) - structure : present simple tense, progessive tense, adjective, adverbs of frequency, near future, preposition, question words b . skills : reading , writing c. Education - ss do the test with the honest and strict attitude 2. QUESTIONS Name: Class:. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ II – NĂM HỌC 2010 – 2011 Môn: TIẾNG ANH Lớp 6 Thời gian: 45 phút (không kể thời gian phát đề) I. Hãy chọn đáp án đúng nhất (A, B, C hay D) để điền vào chỗ trống trong mỗi câu sau (1,5đ) . 1. Nam often ……………… to the movies on Sundays. A. go B. goes C. going D. is going 2. They ……………… soccer at the moment. A. play B. plays C. are playing D. playing 3. My mother is going to ………… the housework tomorrow. A. do B. does C. doing D. going to do 4. ……………… are you going to stay with your aunt? – For two weeks. A. How much B. How long C. How often D. How many 5. ……………… rice do you want? – Two kilos. A. How long B. How often C. How much D. How many 6. Laura is ........……............. . She is Canadian . A. China B. Canada C. from Canada D. France II. Hãy đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn đáp án đúng nhất (A,B,C hay D) cho mỗi câu hỏi (2đ). There are four seasons in my country: spring, summer, fall and winter. In the spring, the weather is very good. It is usually warm and there are many beautiful flowers. We often go for a picnic in the spring. In the summer, it is usually hot. Sometimes we go swimming in the river or the sea. In the fall, the weather is cool. It usually rains a lot in the fall. In the winter, it is often very cold in our country. We don’t want to go out in this weather, so we often stay at home and read books or watch TV. 1. How many seasons are there in the writer’s country? A. Two B. Three C. Four D. Five 2. What is the weather like in the spring? A. It is hot B. It is warm C. It is cold D. It is cool 3. What do the writer and his friends do in the summer? A. They go for a picnic B. They stay at home C. They go swimming D. They read books or watch TV 2.

(257) 4. What does he often do in the winter? A. He goes swimming C. He goes for a picnic B. He goes on holiday D. He stays at home and reads books or watches TV. III.Sắp xếp các chữ cái tạo thành từ có nghĩa(2đ) 1.iogng -> 2. caonitva -> 3. ajpna -> 4. eida -> 5. naspl -> 6. amwr-> 7. ngirb -> 8. eenkwed -> IV. Tìm từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác với các từ còn lại (1,5 đ). 1. A. capital B. country C. city D. vacation 2. A. tennis B. ten C. soccer D. never 3. A. room B. door C. good D. afternoon 4. A. breakfast B. seat C. eat D. teach 5. A. usually B. fly C. thirsty D. hungry 6. A. drink B. bring C.ride D. sing V. VIẾT:. Write a short passage about the activities you do on the weekend (6 câu x 0,5 = 3đ). Answer: I. mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm 1.B 2.C 3.A 4.B 5.C 6.C IImỗi câu đúng được 0,5 điểm 1.C 2.B 3.A 4.D III .mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm 1. going 2. vacation 3. Japan 4. idea 5. plans 6. warm 7. bring 8. weekend IV.mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm. 2.

(258) 1.C. 2.C. 3.B. 4.A. 5B. 6.C. V. Write a short passage about the activities you do on the weekend mỗi câu đúng được 0,5 điểm. Date of planning 3/5/2010 6C,D. Date of teaching 5/5/20108/5/2010- 6E. period 104 :. REVIEW. 1.THE AIMS a. language content - Vocabulary : review - structure : some , any, Adjective near future weather and season, should b . skills : - practice writing the answers for questions, listen and match, read the passage and answer the questions - Help develop the student’s language and their imaginary c. Ideology . - Teach Ps to take care of the things they do in the free time 2. PREPARATION a. T . Book , workbook, plan of action, reference book b. Ps . book, workbook, learn old lesson , prepare new lesson 3. PLAN OF ACTION a. checking the previous lesson (5ms) - Question : T asks ps to ask and answer the questions key : What do you do in your free time ?  I sometimes play volleyball What are you going to do tomorrow ?  I am going to visit my grandparents 2.

(259) b. new lesson Teacher’s activities WARM UP (3ms) Matching. Student’s activities. book PRACTICE (23ms) T presents grammar practice 1, some , any, a , an. come sit open stand close. down your in your book up. 1, some, any, a, an - some ( 1 ít , 1 vài ) : dùng trong câu khẳng định - any : dùng trong câu phủ định và câu hỏi - a ; đứng trước phụ âm - an ; đứng trước các phụ âm. 2 . t presents the adjective + Comparatives and superatives. 2. comparative of adjective 3 . T presents the near future Form ; S + tobe + going to + V + O. Form ; S + tobe + Adj + er + than + O S + tobe + the + adj + est + O 3, Near future Form : S + tobe + going to + V + O eg : I am going to visit my friends tomorrow. 4 . T asks Ss to present the words of weather and the words of season cold, hot, warm . cool winter, summer, spring, fall/autumn. 4, Weather and season words of weather cold, hot, warm , cool, dry words of season spring, fall, autumn, summer, winter. 5. T present the model verbs. 5, Should - should ; nên shouldn’t ; không nên Form : S+ should + V + O : nên làm gì S+ shouldn’t + V + O : không nên làm gì. c . production (15ms) Asks Ss to do exercises. 1 . Adjectives ; a, The Pyramid of cheops is tall b, The Effeil Towers is taller than the Pyramid of Cheops c. Twin Towers is the tallest building in the world d, Ho Chi Minh city is big e, Lon don is bigger than Ho Chi Minh City f, Mexico City is the biggest City in the world 2.

(260) 2 . Should a, We should protect the environment b, We shouldn’t drop trash c, We should plant trees d, We shouldn’t demage trees e, We should turn off the faucets f We shouldn’t waste save water g, We should switch off lights h, We shouldn’t waste electricity.. d . Homework (2ms) t asks ps to learn old lesson and prepare fo the test. At home learn old lesson do the exercises prepare for the test. Name: Class:. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ II – NĂM HỌC 2010 – 2011 Môn: TIẾNG ANH Lớp 6 Thời gian: 45 phút (không kể thời gian phát đề) I. Hãy chọn đáp án đúng nhất (A, B, C hay D) để điền vào chỗ trống trong mỗi câu sau (1,5đ) . 1. Nam often ……………… to the movies on Sundays. A. go B. goes C. going D. is going 2. They ……………… soccer at the moment. A. play B. plays C. are playing D. playing 3. My mother is going to ………… the housework tomorrow. A. do B. does C. doing D. going to do 4. ……………… are you going to stay with your aunt? – For two weeks. A. How much B. How long C. How often D. How many 5. ……………… rice do you want? – Two kilos. A. How long B. How often C. How much D. How many 6. Laura is ........……............. . She is Canadian . A. China B. Canada C. from Canada D. France II. Hãy đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn đáp án đúng nhất (A,B,C hay D) cho mỗi câu hỏi (2đ). There are four seasons in my country: spring, summer, fall and winter. In the spring, the weather is very good. It is usually warm and there are many beautiful flowers. We often go for a picnic in the spring. In the summer, it is usually hot. Sometimes we go swimming in the river or the sea. In the fall, the weather is cool. It usually rains a lot in the fall. In the winter, it is often very cold in our country. We don’t want to go out in this weather, so we often stay at home and read books or watch TV. 1. How many seasons are there in the writer’s country? 2.

(261) A. Two B. Three C. Four D. Five 2. What is the weather like in the spring? A. It is hot B. It is warm C. It is cold D. It is cool 3. What do the writer and his friends do in the summer? A. They go for a picnic B. They stay at home C. They go swimming D. They read books or watch TV 4. What does he often do in the winter? A. He goes swimming C. He goes for a picnic B. He goes on holiday D. He stays at home and reads books or watches TV. III.Sắp xếp các chữ cái tạo thành từ có nghĩa(2đ) 1.iogng -> 2. caonitva -> 3. ajpna -> 4. eida -> 5. naspl -> 6. amwr-> 7. ngirb -> 8. eenkwned -> IV. Tìm từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác với các từ còn lại (1,5 đ). 1. A. capital B. country C. city D. vacation 2. A. tennis B. ten C. soccer D. never 3. A. room B. door C. good D. afternoon 4. A. breakfast B. seat C. eat D. teach 5. A. usually B. fly C. thirsty D. hungry 6. A. drink B. bring C.ride D. sing V. VIẾT:. Write a short passage about the activities you do on the weekend (6 câu x 0,5 = 3đ). Answer:. I. mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm 1.B 2.C 3.A 4.B 5.C 6.C IImỗi câu đúng được 0,5 điểm 1.C 2.B 3.A 4.D III .mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm 1. going 2. vacation 3. Japan 4. idea 5. plans 6. warm. 2.

(262) 7. bring 8. weekend IV.mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm 1.C. 2.C. 3.B. 4.A. 5B. 6.C. V. Write a short passage about the activities you do on the weekend mỗi câu đúng được 0,5 điểm. Name: Class: Lớp 6. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ II – NĂM HỌC 2010 – 2011 Môn: TIẾNG ANH Thời gian: 45 phút (không kể thời gian phát đề). I. Tìm từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác với các từ còn lại (1,5 đ). 1. A. capital B. country C. city D. vacation 2. A. tennis B. ten C. soccer D. never 3. A. room B. door C. good D. afternoon 4. A. breakfast B. seat C. eat D. teach 5. A. usually B. fly C. thirsty D. hungry 6. A. drink B. bring C.riding D. sing II.Sắp xếp các chữ cái tạo thành từ có nghĩa(2đ) 1.iogng -> 2. caonitva -> 3. ajpna -> 4. eida -> 5. naspl -> 6. amwr-> 7. ngirb -> 8. eenkwned -> III. Hãy đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn đáp án đúng nhất (A,B,C hay D) cho mỗi câu hỏi (2đ). There are four seasons in my country: spring, summer, fall and winter. In the spring, the weather is very good. It is usually warm and there are many beautiful flowers. We often go for a picnic in the spring. In the summer, it is usually hot. Sometimes we go swimming in the river or the sea. In the fall, the weather is cool. It usually rains a lot in the fall. In the winter, it is often very cold in our country. We don’t want to go out in this weather, so we often stay at home and read books or watch TV. 2.

(263) 1. How many seasons are there in the writer’s country? A. Two B. Three C. Four Five 2. What is the weather like in the spring? A. It is hot B. It is warm C. It is cold It is cool 3. What do the writer and his friends do in the summer? A. They go for a picnic B. They stay at home C. They go swimming They read books or watch TV 4. What does he often do in the winter? A. He goes swimming C. He goes for a picnic B. He goes on holiday D. He stays at home reads books or watches TV. IV. Hãy chọn đáp án đúng nhất (A, B, C hay D) để điền vào chỗ trống trong mỗi câu sau (1,5đ) . 1. Nam often ……………… to the movies on Sundays. A. go B. goes C. going is going 2. They ……………… soccer at the moment. A. play B. plays C. are playing D. playing 3. My mother is going to ………… the housework tomorrow. A. do B. does C. doing D. going to do 4. ……………… are you going to stay with your aunt? – For two weeks. A. How much B. How long C. How often How many 5. ……………… rice do you want? – Two kilos. A. How long B. How often C. How much How many 6. Laura is ........……............. . She is Canadian . A. China B. Canada C. from Canada France V. VIẾT:. D. D. D.. and. D.. D. D. D.. Write a short passage about the activities you do on the weekend (6 câu x 0,5 = 3đ). Answer: I. mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm 1.B 2.C 3.A 4.B 5.C 6.C II .mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm 1. going 2. vacation 3. Japan 4. idea 5. plans 6. warm 7. bring 8. weekend 2.

(264) III. mỗi câu đúng được 0,5 điểm 1.C. 2.B. 3.A. 4.D. IV.mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm 1.C. 2.C. 3.B. 4.A. 5B. 6.C. V. Write a short passage about the activities you do on the weekend mỗi câu đúng được 0,5 điểm. 2.

(265) I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, ………..do you go to school ? A, How often B , How much 2, I ……….. Vietnamese A, speaks B, speak 3, Jack is……….than Tom A, tall B , taller 4, I am………..to visit the museum a, go b, goes. C , how many C, spoke C, tallest C, going. II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1, I (be)…………a student 2, He is (go)………….to the museum tomorrow 3, They are (watch)…………..TV now III. Complete the dialogue (2points) A : …………are you from ? B: I’m ……….. the USA A : ……….you speak Vietnamese ? B : No, I ……….. I speak English and French IV . Read then answers the question (3points) Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic near a lake. Nam is going to bring his camera, he is going to take some photos Tuan is bring some food Minh is bring some drinks 1 .What is Minh going to do ? 1. What are Minh and Nam going to do ? 2. Where are they going to have a picnic ? c.ANSWERS I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, A, How often 2, B, speak 3, B , taller 4,C, going II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1, am 2, going 3, watching III. Complete the dialogue (2points) A :where are you from ? B: I’m from the USA A : Do you speak Vietnamese ? 2.

(266) B : No, I don’t I speak English and French IV . Read then answers the question (3points) 1. Minh is going to bring some drinks 2 .They are going to bring a camera and some drinks 3, They are going to have a picnic near a lake. The End. QUESTIONS. Đề 2 . 6B I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, ………..do you go to school ? A, How B , What C , Where 2, Lee…………….Chinese A, speaks B, speak 3, Jack is the………. in my class A, tall B , taller 4, They are………..to visit the Ngoc Son temple a, go b, goes. C, spoke C, tallest C, going. II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1, She (be)…………a student 2, They are (go)………….to go fishing tomorrow 3, He is (Watch )………… a soccer match at the moment 2.

(267) III. Complete the dialogue (2points) A : …………are you from ? B: I’m ……….. the USA A : ……….you speak Vietnamese ? B : No, I ……….. I speak English and French IV . Read then answers the question (3points) Mr Long has a farm . He has three large paddy fields . they produce a lot of rice. He also has a small field, where he grows a few vegetables. There are a few fruit trees in the field. They produce a little fruit . He has some chickens , they produce a lot of eggs 1, How many eggs does Mr Long’s chickens produce ? 2, Does his paddy fields produce a lot of rice ? 3, How many fruit trees does he have ? ANSWERS I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, A, How 2, A, speaks 3, B , taller 4, C, going II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1, is 2, going 3, watching III. Complete the dialogue (2points) A : Where B : from A : Do B : don’t IV . Read then answers the question (3points) 1, They produce a lot of eggs 2, yes , it does 3, He has a few fruit trees QUESTIONS. Đề 3. 6C I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, ………..do you go to school ? A, How often B , How much 2, I ……….. Vietnamese A, speaks B, speak 3, Jack is……….than Tom A, tall B , taller 4, I am………..to visit the museum a, go b, goes. C , how many C, spoke C, tallest C, going. II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1, I (be)…………a student 2, He is (go)………….to the museum tomorrow 3, They are (watch)…………..TV now III. Complete the dialogue (2points) 2.

(268) A : …………are you from ? B: I’m ……….. the USA A : ……….you speak Vietnamese ? B : No, I ……….. I speak English and French IV . Read then answers the question (3points) Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic near a lake. Nam is going to bring his camera, he is going to take some photos Tuan is bring some food Minh is bring some drinks 1 .What is Minh going to do ? 3. What are Minh and Nam going to do ? 4. Where are they going to have a picnic ? ANSWERS I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, A, How often 2, B, speak 3, B , taller 4,C, going II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1, am 2, going 3, watching III. Complete the dialogue (2points) A :where are you from ? B: I’m from the USA A : Do you speak Vietnamese ? B : No, I don’t I speak English and French IV . Read then answers the question (3points) 2. Minh is going to bring some drinks 2 .They are going to bring a camera and some drinks 3, They are going to have a picnic near a lake QUESTIONS Đề 4 . 6D I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, I……….. go to school ? A, always B . sometimes 2, Lan’s house……………a lake A, on B . in 3, They are …………..TV now A, watch B . watching 4, Lee speaks ………. A . English b . Chinese. C . never C . near C . watches C . French. II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1 . She usually (go)……………..to work by bus 2 . Tam and Hoa (watch)…………….TV now 3 . i am going (visit )………………my friends next week 4 . my brother is (tall)………..than my father. 5 III. Complete the dialogue (3points) 2.

(269) movie. A ; What are you going …….do tonight ? B ; I’m going to ………….my homework A ; ……..are you going to do tomorrow ? B ; It is Sunday .I’m going to ……..my friends then we …..going to see a. What about you ? A ; Tonight , I;m going to ……… badminton.Tomorrow , i’m going to watch…. soccer match IV . Read then answers the question (3points) Lam likes walking . On the weekend, he often goes walking in the mountains . he usually goes with two friends. minh and his friends always wear strong boot and warm clothes. They always take food and water and a camping stove. Sometimes they camp overnight 1, What do they always wear ? 2, When does Lam go ? 3, Who does he usually go with ? ANSWERS I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, A, always 2, C . near 3, B . watching 4, B ; Chinese II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1. goes 2. are watching 3. to visit 4 .taller III. Complete the dialogue (3points) A ; to B ; do A ; What B ; visit. are A ; play . a IV . Read then answers the question (3points) 1. They always wear strong boot and warm clothes 2. On the weekend 3. He usually goes with two friends QUESTIONS Đề 5 . 6E I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, ………..do you go to school ? A, How B , What C , Where 2, Lee…………….Chinese A, speaks B, speak 3, Jack is the………. in my class A, tall B , taller 4, They are………..to visit the Ngoc Son temple a, go b, goes. C, spoke C, tallest C, going. II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 2.

(270) 1, She (be)…………a student 2, They are (go)………….to go fishing tomorrow 3, He is (Watch )………… a soccer match at the moment III. match column A with column B (2points) A B 1, Mai never goes to school by bike a, because there are more people 2, My mother doesn’t buy milk in the store 3, Why do people need more food ?. b, yes , it does. 4 , Does your home town have any forests ?. d, because my family’s cows produce a lot of them. c, Because she lives very far from school. IV . Complete the dialogue with a few, a little, a lot of , lots , some(3points) Mr Long has a farm . He has three large paddy fields . they produce (1)…. …. … rice. He also has a small field, where he grows (2)…. ….vegetables. There are (3)…. ….fruit trees in the field. They produce (4)…. ….. fruit . He has(5) …. chickens , they produce (6)…. ….. ….eggs ANSWERS I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, A, How 2, A, speaks 3, B , taller 4, C, going II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1, is 2, going 3, watching III. Match the column A with column B(2points) 1 +c 3+a 2+d 4+b IV .Complete the dialogue with a few, a little, a lot of, some (3points) 1. a lot of 4 . a little 2 , a few 5 , some 3 , a few 6 , a lot of QUESTIONS Đề 6 . 6G I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, ………..do you go to school ? A, How often B , How much 2, I ……….. Vietnamese A, speaks B, speak 3, Jack is……….than Tom A, tall B , taller 4, I am………..to visit the museum a, go b, goes. C , how many C, spoke C, tallest C, going. 2.

(271) II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1, I (be)…………a student 2, He is (go)………….to the museum tomorrow 3, They are (watch)…………..TV now III. Complete the dialogue (2points) A : …………are you from ? B: I’m ……….. the USA A : ……….you speak Vietnamese ? B : No, I ……….. I speak English and French IV . Read then answers the question (3points) Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic near a lake. Nam is going to bring his camera, he is going to take some photos Tuan is bring some food Minh is bring some drinks 1 .What is Minh going to do ? 5. What are Minh and Nam going to do ? 6. Where are they going to have a picnic ? ANSWERS I . Choose the best answers (2points) 1, A, How often 2, B, speak 3, B , taller 4,C, going II. Complete the sentences with the verbs in bracket(3points ) 1, am 2, going 3, watching III. Complete the dialogue (2points) A :where are you from ? B: I’m from the USA A : Do you speak Vietnamese ? B : No, I don’t I speak English and French IV . Read then answers the question (3points) 3. Minh is going to bring some drinks 2 .They are going to bring a camera and some drinks 3, They are going to have a picnic near a lake. 2.

(272) 2.

(273) Date of preparing: 3/9/2010. PERIOD 10. Date of teaching:6/9/2010 class6A 6/9/2010 class 6B. .. UNIT 2. AT SCHOOL LESSON 4. MY SCHOOL (C1). 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss are able to talk about people & things at school, indentify (nhận ra ) places , people & objects at school. + Structure: - That/ This is + N 2.

(274) - Is + that /this + N ? + Yes, that /this is. + No, that /this is not (isn’t). + Vocabulary: - a school (n) trường học - a student (n) học sinh - a teacher (n) giáo viên - a class (n) lớp học - a desk ( n) cái bàn b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately. 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape and pictures. b. Students: Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(10'). Students’ activities. Question: Complete the dialogue Hoa: what’s .............. Lan: My ..................... Lan. Hoa: Hi, Lan. Where ......you .......? Lan: ...................Son La city. Hoa Hoa: how. ..................you , Lan ? Lan: I ................years .......... Answer: Hoa: what’s your name ? Lan: My name’s Lan. Hoa: Hi, Lan. Where do you live ? Lan: I live in Son La city. Hoa:How old are you,Lan? Lan: I’m 15 years old .. *To introduce your school , classroom and objects in the classroom , we study lesson today(1'). b. Teaching the new lesson. * Warm – up(5') T gets ss to play game “Simon says”with the classroom imperatives. T: remarks the winner .. Ss: play . 2.

(275) * Presentation(6') 1. Listen and repeat. Then practice the dialogue with a partner. T:gets ss to look at the pictures & introduces the picture & introduces new words by situation . Ss: write & read in chorus & single . New words. - a school (n) trường học - a student (n) học sinh - a teacher (n) gviên - a desk ( n) cái bàn - a class (n) lớp học - a classroom (n)phòng học T: explains uses & meanings of the structures & the difference between “that/ this” then gets ss to read . Ss:listen & read then write. * Structure. Ex: This is my desk. That is my school. (+) That /This is + N (-) That /This isn’t + N (?) Is + that/ this + N ? - Yes, that/ this/It is. - No, that/ this/It isn’t.. * Practice(10') T: gets ss to read the dialogue of C1. * Practice Ss: read in choral & single.. T: gets ss to practice in pairs .. Ss: practice in pairs .. T: corrects mistakes . * Production(8') T: asks ss to practice with real situation in the class. 2.

(276) Ss: practice in pairs. T: calls ss to stand up to practice. Ss: practice. T: correct mistakes . S1: This is a table S2: That is a ruler * Play game T: gets ss to play game “ matching’’ . Ss: play game .. T: remarks the winner.. A Teacher Student Class Desk School. c. Consolidation(3'). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. B Lớp học Cái bàn Trường học Giáo viên Học sinh. d. Guide the homework(2'). - Learn by heart new words and structures & using - Do exercise 1,2 on page 14 and 15 in the workbook. - Prepare next lesson C 2,3 before going to school.. Date of preparing : 12/9/08 Period 12:. Teaching date:7/9/2010 class 6A 7/9/2010 class 6B. UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL LESSON 6 : C . MY SCHOOL (2,3,4 ). 1.Objectives: a. Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson ss are able to indentify places & objects at school. b.Skill: - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing 2.

(277) c.Education - Educate ss know to use language accurrately 2.TEACHING AIDS a. T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson b.Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare 3 Teaching proceduces 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: -Form: - oral Question:write again new words. c. introduces: T: gets ss to play the game “ hangman” with the new words about school, student” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 10’ 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the pictures & realias by answering the question ? what is this / that ? Ss: answer T: give out new words & gets ss read Ss: read in choral & single. T: ask ss to repeat form “ that/ this” Ss: repeat T: give out example using “ a,an” Ss: write. 3. Practice T: get ss to fine out the new words in the 15’ words quare after playing the guesing 2. Writing. * Answer: a school (n) trường học a student (n) học sinh a teacher (n) gviên a desk ( n) cái bàn class (n) lớp học classroom (n)phòng học * Play game 1.Vocabulary a door (n) cửa ra vào aschool bag(n)cập sách a windown(n) cửa sổ a pencil(n) bút chì a boad ( n)cái bảng a pen(n)bút mực a clock(n) đồng hồ treo tường aruler(n)cái thước a waste-basket(n)sọt rác an eraser(n)cục tẩy ex1:It’s a book ex2: It’s an eraser -“a an” là 2 mạo từ bất định dùng để chỉ số ít với các dtừ đếm được -“a” đứng trước dtừ bđầu bằng 1 phụ âm -“an”.....................1ng/âm(a,e,o,u,i) Play game w p e n s c e x.

(278) game Ss: play game T: the remark & the winner. T:gets ss practise in pairs with real things the classroom Ss: practise T: call ss to practice in front of class Ss: practice in front of class T:correct mistakes 10’ 4. Production T:gets ss to make the dialogue build with real things in the classroom Ss: practise in pairs T: call ss to practice in front of class Ss: practice in front of class T: correct mistakes. o. e. d. d. c. l. r. d. d. n. e. o. h. o. a. r. n. c. s. o. o. c. s. a. i. i. k. r. o. k. e. o. w. l. r. u. l. e. r b. windown ,board pen ,ruler pencil, desk, school, eraser, clock 2.Practice S1:what is this /that? S2: It’s a /an ............. Ex: S1:what is this? S2: this is a ruler S1: how do you spell it? S2: R- U- L- E- R. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart new words & structures - Do exercise 1,3-14,15 - Prepare next lesson “Unit3 A1,2” ____________________________________________ Planning date : 10/9/08 Period 13:. Teaching date:. UNIT 3: AT HOME LESSON 1 : A MY HOUSE (1,2). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about things in a house - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure:. what + be + that /this /these /those ? S + is +N 2.Vocabulary: a livingroom (n)phòng khách a couch(n)ghế sa lông dài a lamp(n)đèn a table(n) bàn a bookself( n)giá sách a television(n)ti vi a chair (n) ghế tựa a stereo(n)dàn/ máy nghe nhạc 2.

(279) a armchair(n) ghế bành III Teaching aids: T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: -Form: - oral Question:write again new words. c. introduce: T: ask ss the question about things in the classroom using the structure “ what’s this / that? Ss: answer T: correct mistakes 2. Presentation 10’ T: answer ss to look in the picture in book ? ? what’s this /that ? Ss: this’s my livingroom That’s my house T: introduce new words by picture Ss: write & read in chural & single. T: repeat the structures with “ this/ that” Ss: listen T: introduce the structures with “ those/ these”. a stool(n) ghế đẩu. Writing. Answer: a door (n) cửa ra vào aschool bag(n)cập sách a windown(n) cửa sổ pencil(n) bút chì a boad ( n)cái bảng pen(n)bút mực a clock(n) đồng hồ treo tường aruler(n)cái thước a waste-basket(n)sọt rác an eraser(n)cục tẩy. 1.Vocabulary a livingroom (n)phòng khách a couch(n)ghế sa lông dài a lamp(n)đèn a table(n) bàn a bookself( n)giá sách a television(n)ti vi a chair (n) ghế tựa a stereo(n)dàn/ máy nghe nhạc => what’s this /that? It’s ....... T: explain the difference b/w “ those/ these” What are these /those ? Ss: listen & write They are ....... - giống nhau: dùng chỉ vật ở xa 3. Practice - khác nhau: “that/ this”: dùng dtừ số T: gets ss to play the game “ slap the board” ít with the new words in the lesson “those/ these”dùng dtừ số nhiều - thường thêm “s” vào cuối dtừ số ít 15’ Ss: play 2.

(280) T: the remark & the winner T: gets ss to practise the structures using picture drill with partner Ss: practise in pairs T: correct misstakes 4. Production T:gets ss to play game the guessing with the new words in the lesson things in a house 10’ Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. để chuyển sang dtừ số nhiều 2. Practice Ex1: what are these ? They are 2 lamps Ex2: what are those ? They are chairs Play game Ex: It’s ( a chair) Yes, it is ? no, it isn’t. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart new words & structures - Do exercise 1,2-17,18 - Prepare next lesson “Unit 3 A 1,2”. _________________________________________________ Planning date:10/9/08 PERIOD 14:. Teaching date : UNIT 3: AT HOME LESSON 2 : A MY HOUSE (3,4 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about the family members - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure: what is his / her nane ? - his / her name is ...... Who is this / that ? - that / this is .......... 2.Vocabulary: a family (n) gia đình ;a father (n)cha , bố a mother ( n) mẹ ; a sister (n) chị gái , em gái a brother (n) anh trai , em tra; people (n) người III Teaching aids: 2.

(281) T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: -Form: - oral Question:write again new words by 2 students c. introduce T: gets ss to play game a game “ Nought & crosses” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. 2. Presentation Ask ss look at the picture Ba’s family & introduce some information about Ba’s family & words 10’ Ss: write & read in choral & single T: correct mistakes T: introduce the structures in the leson & gets the ss to practise reading Ss: write & reading. T: explain using “ too” & “ how many” Ss: listen & write 3. Practice T: gets ss read about Ba’s family Ss: reading in choral & single T: explain & guide ss answer the question 15’ in part 4 Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistake 2. Writing. Answer: a livingroom (n)phòng khách a couch(n)ghế sa lông dài a lamp(n)đèn a table(n) bàn a bookself( n)giá sách a television(n)ti vi a chair (n) ghế tựa a stereo(n)dàn/ máy nghe nhạc 1.Vocabulary a family (n) gia đình a father (n)cha , bố a mother ( n) mẹ a sister (n) chị gái , em gái a brother (n) anh trai , em trai people (n) người who ai what is his / her name ? his / her name is + N who’s this /that ? this / that is + ......... how many + N + are there + in ...... ? there are + ...... N + in ........ - “ how many” dùng cho dtừ số it sau nó là 1 dtừ số nhiều - “too” thường đặt ở cuối câu trong ngôn ngữ nói & nó có nghĩa là “cũng” 2. practice a. her name’s Nga b . his name’s Ha c . that is Ba . He is twelve years old d . this is Lan .She is fifteen years old e . there are 4 people in the family.

(282) T: gets ss play game “ slap the board” Ss: play game T: the remark & the winner. Play game Family father mother. sister. people. brother .. 4. Production T: explain & guide ss answer in part 5 Ss: listen and practice T: call ss to stand up to practice 10’ Ss: practise in pairs in front of class T: correct mistakes. 3. Practice ex : My name’s Quyen. I’m12 years old .There are 4 people in my family My father is tuan . He is 45 . My mother is Loan & she is 40 years old My sister is Hien fifteen .She is a student. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart new words & structures - Do exercise 3,4 -19,20 - Prepare next lesson “Unit3 B 1 ” _________________________________________. Planning date :30/9/08 Period 15:. Teaching date:. UNIT 3: AT HOME LESSON 3 : B. NUMBERS ( 1,2 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to count from 1to 100 - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure: 2.Vocabulary : Numbers from 21 to 100 A bench (n) ghế dài A bookcase (n)tủ sách III Teaching aids: 2.

(283) T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: -Form: - oral Question:write again new words. c. introduce T: gets ss play game “ bingo” with these numbers from 1 to 10 Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. Writing. Answer: a family (n) gia đình a father (n)cha , bố a mother ( n) mẹ a sister (n) chị gái , em gái a brother (n) anh trai , em trai people (n) người who ai Play game Six, ten , five, eight ,seven ,three , one. 2. Read the number. 2. Presentation 10’ T: give out number from 21 to 100 T: ask to read in choral & single Ss:read T: call ss to stand up to read Ss: read in choral & single. 30 =thirty 40 = forty 50 = fifty 60 =sixty. 3 .Practice T: gives out the picture of classroom & 15’ describe using the structure “There + be” Ss: listen & write T:give out new words in the picture Ss:write & read in choral & single T: explain “ noun” – “nouns” Ss: listen & write T: gets ss to count the ss in the classroom Ss: practise & answer T: gets ss play game “ what & where” ( viết từ vào vòng tròn ss đọc 1-2 lượt rồi xoá chữ trong vòng tròn đi ss viết lại đúng vòng tròn ) Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 2. 70 = seventy 80 = eighty 90 = ninety 100 = one hundred. 2.Grammar How many + N(n)+ be + there ? There + be + ( number) Ex: how many students are there in class There are 26 a bench (n) ghế dài a bookcase (n) tủ sách - “ there is”dùng cho dtừ số ít - “there are” .......................nhiều - thêm “s” vào cuối dtừ , những dtừ kết thúc bằng “o, s, x, ch, sh” ta thêm đuôi “ es’’ Ex: desk – desks bench – benches /s/ : noun the ending is : k, t, p , /z/ : ......................... is : n , d, v, y, m, l, r, g, ....... /iz/ : ........................is: s, x, ch, sh, z..

(284) 4. Production 3.Practice 10’ T: gets ss to count from 1 to 100 turn by turn Play game Ss: count Seventy eighty-five T: give out the alphabet & gets ss count the alphabet from 1 to 26 Twelve one hundred Ss: cout Fifty twenty two T: the remark & the winer (3’)5. Homework : - Learn by heart & write the cout number from 1 to 100 - Do exercise 1 -21 - Prepare next lesson “Unit3 B 3,4,5 ” Planning date 30/09/08 Teaching date: Period 16: UNIT 3: AT HOME LESSON 4 : B. NUMBERS ( 3,4,5 ) I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about things in the classroom the livingroom & know the pronouncation of plural noun ( /s/, /z/ ,/iz/ ) to count things - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure: how many + Ns + are there ? There + be + ( number) 2.Vocabulary III Teaching aids: T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: -Form: - oral Question:write again number 16,34,59,80,100 c. introduce T: gets ss to count things in the classroom using the number from 1 to 100 Ss: play T: the remark & the winner & introduce 2. Writing. Answer: Sisteen , thirty-four , fifty-nine, eghty , one hundred.

(285) in new lesson - Presentation 10’ T: give example and explaint about them Eg: How many tables are there in the class? - there are 10 tables T: give out how to add plural Ss: liaten T: ask ss repeat the structure “ there +be” Ss: repeat. - Practice: T: gets ss to change the singgular (số ít) 15’ nouns into plural (số nhiều) Ss: change the noun into plural form T: correct mistakes & asks the ss to divide (chia) them into 3 column following the pronunciation of the ending sounds Ss: divide T: correct mistakes T: gets ss to practise the structure of the lesson using the pictures in part B5 Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes 4. Production T: asks ss to ask & answer about the things in class Ss: ask & answer 10’ T: call ss to stand up to practice Ss: practice T: correct mistakes. 1.Grammar How many + N(n)+ be + there ? There + be + ( number) Ex: how many students are there in class There are 26 - “ there is”dùng cho dtừ số ít - “there are” …....................nhiều - thêm “s” vào cuối dtừ , những dtừ kết thúc bằng “o, s, x, ch, sh” ta thêm đuôi “ es’’ Ex: desk – desks bench – benches /s/ : noun the ending is : k, t, p ,f /z/ : …...................... is : n , d, v, y, m, l, r, g, ….... /iz/ : ….......................is: s, x, ch, sh, z. /s/ Students Books Clocks Desks. /z/ Doors Windows Rulers Tables Boards Erasers Chairs. 2.Practice B 2 -36 Ex :how many boards are there? There is 1 board B 5 -37 Ex : how many people are there? There are 4 people. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & using - Do exercise 2, 3, 4 – 21, 22 - Prepare next lesson “Unit3 C1, 2 ”./. ______________________________________ Planning date :30/09/08. Teaching date:. 2. /iz/ benches.

(286) Period 17:. UNIT 3: AT HOME LESSON 5 : C . FAMILY (1, 2 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to discribe the family member & talk about jobs - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure: what + do /does + S + do ? S + be + noun of job 2.Vocabulary : an engineer (n) kỹ sư a nurse (n)y tá a doctor(n) bác sĩ III Teaching aids: T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: -Form: - oral Question:T:ask ss some question Answer: ? how many teachers are there in the class ? - there is one teacher ? how many windows are there in the class ? - there are 4 windows c. introduce T introduce in lesson 2. Pre-reading T: ask ss look at the picture & introduce the 10’ situation of the text using the picture Ss: look at & listen ? how old are they ? What do they do ? Ss: answer T: introduce in lesson 3. while -reading T: ask ss read the text & ask ss to prediction 15’ about the ages & jobs Ss: read & prediction T: gets ss read the text Ss: read in choral & single 1. read & answer the question T: correct mistakes a. there are 4 people T: gets ss again & answer the questions b. he is 40 Ss: answer & comprehension c. he is an engineer T: correct mistakes & give out structure d. she is 35 e. she is a teacher 2.

(287) 4. Post - reading T: ask ss look at the picture of Song’s family 10’ & introduce new words Ss: write T: repeats the structure & gets the students to talk about Song’s family using pictures & cue words Ss: pratise in pairs T: correct mistakes T: ask ss write the similar text about Song’s family with the text C1 using the cue words & the pictures C2 Ss: do & read in front of class T: correct mistakes. f. he is 8 g. he is a student h. they are in the livingroom = what + do + does + S + do ? S +be + N an engineer (n) kỹ sư a nurse (n)y tá a doctor(n) bác sĩ 2. talk about Song’s family Ex. S1: how ols is Song’s father? S2: he is 42 years old S1: what does he do ? S2: he is a doctor. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & new words - Do exercise 1, 2, 3, 4 – 23, 24,25, 26, 27 - Prepare next lesson “Grammar practice” ______________________________________. Planning date: 30/09/08 Period 18:. Teaching date : GRAMMAR PRACTICE. I.Objectives: 2.

(288) -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to review the language material in unit1 to unit 3 II.Language contents 1.Structure review 2.Vocabulary review III Teaching aids: T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 5’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : don’t check c introduce: T introduce in new lesson 27’ 2. Language focus T: ask ss to repeat the using & form of the verd “ to be” in the present simple tense Ss: repeat & write T: ask ss to do exercise 1,2,3 in the book Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes T: ask ss repeat the classroom imperatives & play the game “simon say” Ss: repeat & play T: the mark & the winner T: repeat the question words that ss have learned & meaning of the question words T: ask ss to do exercise 5 -41 Ss: to do T: correct mistakes T: ask ss repeat structure with “ how many” Ss: repeat T: ask ss to do exercise 5- 41 base on the picture Ss: to do T: correct mistakes T: ask ss repeat the number first ( from)11 to 19 & the decimal (thập phân bđầu =10) Ss: read 2. Writing. 1. the present simple tense with “to be” (+) S + be + N (-) S + be + not + N (?) Be + S + ........? -thì httd dùng để dtả hành động được lặp đi lặp lại nhiều lần Exercise1: Am/ am/ are/ is/ are/ Exercise2 : Am/ is/ is/ are/ are Exercise3 : a. are/ am c. is/ isn’t b. is/ is b. are / aren’t 2. the classroom imperatives a. come in e. close your book b. sit down d. stand up c. open your book 3. question words what : làm gì, cái gì ,gì who: ai where: đâu , ở đâu exercise5: a what / is c. who/ is b. where / live d. what/ is exercise 5- 41 a . there is one.

(289) T: ask ss to do exercise 7-42 Ss: to do T: correct mistakes T: ask ss to do exercise 8-42 Ss: practise in pair & answer T: correct mistakes T: ask ss repeat the uses of the definite pronoun ( this / that ) Ss: answer T: ask ss to do exercise 9-42 SsL: to do T: correct mistakes. 10’ 4. Production T:ask ss repeat things in the classroom Ss: repeat T: guide & ask ss to do exercise 10-42 Ss: to do T: correct mistakes. b. there are six c. there are two d . there is one 4. number a. five, eigh .ten, twenty, thirty, fifty, seventy, ninety, one hundred b. 7, 9, 11, 15, 25, 70, 75, 80 5. greeting 1. hi /fine /you 2. how /thanks “that is” chỉ ở xa “this is” chỉ ở gần exercise 9-42 - that / is / yes - this/ is / isn’t exercise 10-42 C H A L E R A S E S S C B O AR O WI ND O W M. 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures - Do exercise “ reading quiz” & “ test yourself” - Prepare next lesson “ check 45’’ _________________________________________. 2. I R B R D O O R U O LO C K E R.

(290) Planning date02/10/08 Period 19:. Teaching date : CHECK 45’. I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to check ss knowledge which ss have learned from unit1 to unit3 II.Language contents 1.Structure review 2.Vocabulary review III Teaching aids: T: question , keys ,point Ss:pen, prepare .... IV. Teachingmethods: - writing V. Teaching proceduces 1. Warm up Who’s absent today? 2. Question Câu 1: Viết bằng chữ các kết quả sau (3điểm) a. 18 x 6. b. 72 + 10. c. 81 : 9. d. 54 -3. e. 92 – 7. f. 23 x9. Câu 2: Điền “a” “an”vào các câu sau nếu cần(3điểm) a. my father is ..............engineer b. there are ..............clocks 2.

(291) c. It is .................eraser d. we live in .......................house Câu3: Đọc đoạn văn rồi trả lời câu hỏi (4điểm) This is my family. There are three people in my family , my father, my mother & me. We live on QT street . My father is 40 years old .He is an engineer .My mother is 37 years old .She is a teacher . I’m 13 .I’m a student Question: a. How many people are there in his family? b. Where do they live? c. How old is his father ? d. What does his father do ? e. How old is his mother ? f. What does his mother do ?. Week: 7 Period:. TEST CORRECTION. Teaching:. I. OBJECTIVES By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Correct the test themselves. II. PREPARATION - teacher: textbook, sub- board - students: - prepare lesson at home III. TECHNIQUES: brainstorm, pairs, groups, elicit, Correction, Chatting, Exhibition, Ordering, Using a model, Using reading, Write it up, Sharing and Comparing. IV TEACHING AIDS: textbook, sub-board IV. PROCEDURE 1.Checking attendance 2.Previous lesson 3.New lesson 3. Key Câu1: Câu2: Câu3:. a. one hundred & eight b. eighty –two c. nine a. an c. an b.no have d. a a. there are three people in his family b. they live on QT street c. he is 40 2. d. fifty -one e. eighty –five f. two hundred & seven.

(292) d. he is an engineer e. she is 37 f. she is a teacher 4 Phần trả bài * Ưu: Nhìn chung HS đã hiểu bài và làm được bài , đẫ nắm được cấu trúc ngữ phápđể vận dụng. * Nhược: Tuy nhiên điểm số không đạt tối đa, chỉ đạt ở mức TB- khá, xong điểm yếu vẫn còn. Do câu 3 là dạng bài HS mới làm quen nên chưa biết ứng dụng. * Thống kê điểm:. G :3 TB: 26. KH: 16 Y: 19. Planning date : 02/10/08 Period 20 :. Teaching date :. UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL LESSON 1: A (1,2). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to discrible the location & size of a school - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure where is your school ? - It is in the country Is your school big ? - yes, it is ? no, it isn’t 2.Vocabulary small(adj)nhỏ, bé country (n)nông thôn Big (adj) to, lớn city (n) thành phố III Teaching aids: T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 5’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : don’t check c introduce: T introduce in new lesson 10’ 2. Pre – reading 2.

(293) T: ask ss to look at two picture -44 & ask ss compare about Thu’s school Phong’s school Ss: aswer T: introduce new words & gets ss read Ss: read in choral & single T: give out example & introduce the using of possesions(sở hữu) in the leson Ss: write T: gets ss guess about Thu’s & Phong’s school Ss: guess 3. while –reading T: gets ss read the text 1- 2 time & check their guess 15’ Ss: read & answer T: gets ss reading Ss: read T: correct mistake T: introduce the structure in A2 & ask ss answer the question Ss: practise in pairs & answer T: correct mistakes. 1Vocabulary - small(adj)nhỏ, bé - country (n)nông thôn - Big (adj) to, lớn - city (n) thành phố Ex1: It’s Lan’s pen Ex2 : It’s Lien’s eraser = dtừ chỉ người + ‘s + dtừ - trong trường hợp cái làm chủ ngữ là người ta sd sở hữu cách để dđạt tả ý cái gì đó thuộc về ai đó => be + dtừ chỉ người + ‘s + N Yes, it is / no, it isn’t. 2. answer the question a. yes it is b. no, it isn’t c. it is in the country d. no, it isn’t. 4. post – reading T: repeat the prossession Ss: listen 10’ T: ask ss practice in pairs with “ yes / no” question answer drill Ss: practise. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & vocabulary - Do exercise 1,2 -35,36 - Prepare next lesson “ A3,4’’ __________________________________________. Planning date:. Teaching date : 2.

(294) Period 21 :. UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL LESSON 2 : A (3,4). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to read a text about school to understand detail & get further practise in number & school vocabulary & ask & answer about quality with “how many …” - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure how many + Ns + are there ? There + be + …............. 2.Vocabulary or (conj) : hay, hoặc III Teaching aids: T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form : oral Answer: Question: write again new words - small(adj)nhỏ, bé - country (n)nông thôn - Big (adj) to, lớn - city (n) thành phố c introduce: T introduce in new lesson by situation 10’ 2. pe- reading T: give out the number (6,8,12,52,100, 200,400,900) & gets the ss to play game “ bingo” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner T: gets ss guess what the numbers about ( with school) Ss: 8 class 400 stundent 20 desk in a class 20 teacher 3. Pre – reading 15’ T: gets read the text & guess Ss: read in pairs T: gets ss read the text & check their guess Ss: answer T: ask ss answer the question 2. Play game. 1. answer the question a. there are 8 b. there are 400 c. there are 20 d. there are 900 a it’s in the country.

(295) Ss: answer & compare b.there are 6 clssroom T: correct mistakes c. there are 176 students 4. Post – reading 10’ T: ask ss to answer the queations in exercise A4-46 about their school 2. Practice Ss: answer T: correct mistakes T: ask ss write a similar text with part A3 to talk about their school Ss: to do & read in front of class T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart the text in part A3 - Do exercise 3,4,5 -36,37,38 - Prepare next lesson “ B ’’ ______________________________________. Planning: Teaching: Period: 22 UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL LESSON 3 : B (1,2,3,4,5) I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to practise the ordinal numbers from first to tenth , discribe the school( classroom, class, & floors) - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure which + grade / class + be + S in ? S + be +in + grade / class ................ Which floor is classroom on ? it is on the second floor 2.Vocabulary a floor(n)tầng A grade(n) lớp(trình độ) the fifth(adj) thứ 5 the first(adj) thứ nhất the sixth(adj)thứ 6 the second(adj) thứ 2 the seventh(adj)thứ 7 2.

(296) the third(adj) thứ 3 the fourth(adj) thứ 4 III Teaching aids: T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form : oral Question: read by heart A 3- 45 c introduce: T gets ss play game “ bingo”about the ordinal numbers from 1 to 10 Ss: play T: the remark & the winner T: introduce in new lesson 10’ 2. Pre- listening T: gets ss look at the picture -47 & introduce the situation of the dialogue Ss: look at & listen T: introduce new words by situation Ss: write T: gets ss read the new words Ss: read in choral & single T: correct mistakes T: introduce the new structures in the dialogue Ss: write & give out example Ex: which grade are you in? I’m in grade 6. Ex: how many floor does your school have ? which floor is your classroom on ? it’s on first floor 2. the eighth(adj)thứ 8 the nineth(adj) thứ 9 the tenth(adj)thứ 10. Writing. Answer: A 3-45 in student’s book. 1.Vocabulary a floor(n)tần A grade(n) lớp(trình độ) the fifth(adj) thứ 5 the first(adj) thứ nhất the sixth(adj)thứ 6 the second(adj) thứ 2 the seventh(adj)thứ 7 the third(adj) thứ 3 the eighth(adj)thứ 8 the fourth(adj) thứ 4 the nineth(adj) thứ 9 the tenth(adj)thứ 10 2. grammar - which + grade / class + be + in ? S + be = in grade / class Ex: which grade are you in? I’m in grade 6 - which floor + be + TTSH + classroom on ? It’s on + (ordinal number) floor Ex: which floor is your classroom on ? it’s on first floor - how many + Ns + does your school have? Ordinal number Ex: how many floor does your school have ?.

(297) Three T: explain “have, has” Ss: write 15’ 3. While - listening T: gets ss to listen to the dialogue Ss: read in single T: correct mistakes T: guide & ask ss complete the grid in part B2-48 Ss: do & answer T: correct mistakes 10’ 4. post – listening T: gets ss to do the writing exercise3-48 Ss: to do T: ask ss make exercise5-48 Ss: to do & practise in pairs T: call ss practise in front of class Ss: practise T: correct mistakes. (3’). To have/ has(v) có Have – i, you, we, they Has – she , he, it 3. read & complete a. read b. complete this table grade class Classroom floor T 7 7c 2nd h 6 6a 1st u (...) (...) (...). c. complete this dialogue Thu: is your school big ? Phong:no, it isn’t Thu: how many floors does it have? Phong: it’s two floor Thu: which class are you in ? Phong: i’m in class 6a Thu: where are your classroom ? Phong: it’s in the first floor 5. Homework : - Learn by heart new words & structure - Do exercise 1 ,2,3,4 -38,39 - Prepare next lesson “C1, 2, 3 ’’ _______________________________________________. Planning date : Period 23 :. Teaching date : UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL LESSON 4 : C (1,2 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to use vocabulary of routinas to talk about habitual action - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure what do you do every morning ? I get up 2.Vocabulary. to get up (v)thức dậy to wash(the face)rửa mặt 2.

(298) to get dressed(v) mặc quần áo to have breakfast(v)ăn sáng to brush( the teeth)(v)đánh (răng) to go to school(v) đi học III Teaching aids: T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 5’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : don’t check c introduce: ? what do you do in the morning ? Ss: answer T: introduce in new lesson 2. Presentation 10’ T: gets ss disscuss & talk about the activities Ss: disscuss T: ask ss look at the picture part1- 49 & and ask about the pictures then introduce new words ? what do you do every morning? Ss: look at the pictures and answer T: ask with each picture Ss: answer T: guide ss to read new words Ss: read in choral & single ? How do activities happen? Ss: activities happen again and again and frequency T: ask ss to compare two exaples. Eg: - I get up - she gets up T: introduce the grammar and structure in the lesson by example Ss: listen and write Ex2: what does she do every morning? She gets up Ex3: what does he do every morning? He washes his face 2. Writing. 1. Vocabulary - to get up (v)thức dậy - to wash(the face)rửa mặt - to get dressed(v) mặc quần áo - to have breakfast(v)ăn - to brush( the teeth)(v)đánh(răng) - to go to school(v) đi học 2. Grammar. * Thì hiện tại đơn giản. - use: Thì hiện tại đơn dùng để diễn tả hành động xảy ra thường xuyên lặp đi lặp lại nhiều lần theo một thói quen. - Form: They/ we/ you/ I + V…….. She /he /it + V (-s- es)……….. - Thêm ES khi đt có tận cùng là ( z, x, o, ch,sh , ss ) - Thêm S với các âm còn lại * cách đọc: - Đọc là S khi đt có âm tận cùng là ( p ,k, t, f) - Đọc là iz khi đt từ có âm tận cùng là ( sh, ch, z, x, o, ss) - Đọc là z ……………..là các âm còn.

(299) T: explain Ss: listen & write 15’ 3. Practice T: ask ss to practise in pairs part1 Ss: practise in pairs T: call some ss talk again about Ba’s activities Ss: talk T: correct mistakes T: ask ss practise the structure in the lesson with the words cues for practise in pairs in part 2 Ss: pactise in pairs T: call ss to practice in pairs Ss: practice in front of class T: correct mistakes 10’ 4. Production T: ask ss to complete the exercise Ex: Every morning, my brother…1…..( get up), then he …2……( get) dressed , he … 3…( brush) his teeth and he …4….( wash ) his face then He …5…( have) breakfast. And he …6…( go) to chool. Ss: complete exercise T: call ss to stand up to answer in front of class Ss: answer T: correct mistakes. lại * have => has * Hỏi thường làm gì vào mỗi buổi sáng => what + do/ does + S + do+(time) ? => S + V Ex1 :what do you do every morning? I get up Ex2: what does she do every morning? She gets up Ex3: what does he do every morning? He washes his face 2. talk about activities in the morning a. read. b. practice ex: S1: what do you do every morning? S2: I get up S1: what do you do ( then) ? S2: I get dressed ................................ 3. Answer. 1. gets up 3. brushes 5. has. 2. gets 4. washes 6. goes. 5. Homework : - Learn by heart new words & structure. - Do exercise 1 - 41 - Prepare next lesson “C1,3 ’’ __________________________________________ Planning date: date : Period 24 :. Teaching UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL LESSON 5 : C (1,5 ) 2.

(300) I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about habitual actions with the third person ( he, she) - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure what does you do every morning ? He gets up 2.Vocabulary III Teaching aids: T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question: write again the structure of old lesson c introduce: T: gets ss to play game “matching” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. 10’ 2. Presentation T: ask ss repeat activities of routines( thông thường) T: introduces the new structure in the lesson by example Ss: answer & write T: gets ss read example in the board Ss: read in choral & single 3. Practice 15’ T: gets ss to practise reading the sentences to practise in partC1-49 Ss: read in choral & single 3. Writing * Answer: what + do/ does + S + do+(time) S+V Play game A get up wash the face get dressed have breakfast brushthe teeth go to school áo. B đánh răng ăn sáng đi học thức dậy rửa mặt mặc quần. 1. Talk about activities routines Ex: what does he do every morning? He gets up => what + do/ does + S + V + (time) S + V (s,es).

(301) T: give out the words cues & gets the ss to practise the structure 2. Practice Ss: practise in pairs ....up ....breakfast ....face T: call some ss practice in pairs in front of class ....teeth ....dressed ....school Ss: pactise in pairs Ex1: T: correct mistakes S1: what does he do every 4. Production morning? 10’ T: ask ss to do C3-49 S2: He gets up Ss: write S1: what does he do then ? T: gets ss to write 5 sentences about S2: he gets dressed themself talking about the activities in the morning Ss: write T: call some read in front of class Ss: read T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart sentences & structure - Do exercise 2 - 41 - Prepare next lesson ________________________________________. 3.

(302) Planning date : 2/11/07 4/11/07 Period 25 :. Teaching date: UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL LESSON 6 : C ( 4, 5, 6, 7 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to ask about time & answer - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure what time is it ? - it is + giờ What + do/ does + S + V? - S + V + at + (time) 2.Vocabulary late( adj) muộn, trễ a quater (n)1/4, 15 phút Half (n) 1/2, rưỡi o’clock (adv) giờ III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces 5’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : don’t check c introduce: T: gets ss to play game “matching” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. 3. Writing. Play game A get up wash the face. B đánh răng ăn sáng.

(303) get dressed have breakfast brushthe teeth go to school áo. đi học thức dậy rửa mặt mặc quần. - đó là những c.v mà cta thường là trước khi tới lớp .Để biết cta thường làm những việc đó vào lúc mấy giồ cta cùng nhau tìm hiểu bài hôm nay 10’ 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture this is Ba & his friend .em cho biết bạn of Ba hỏi Ba câu gì mà Ba đưa tay lên xem rồi trả lời Ss: answer T: gets ss read C4 & introduce new 1. hỏi và trả lời về giờ words Time (n) thời gian Ss: read new words & C4 in pairs O’clock (adv)giờ Late (adj) muộn ?bạn of Ba hỏi câu hỏi về giờ ntn? Ss:answer = what time is it ? T: treo tranh C5 và y/c hs cho biết đồng hồ chỉ mấy giờ? Ss: answer T: gets ss read C5 Ss: read in choral & pairs ?thông thường cta có những loại giờ nào ? Ss: giờ đúng , lẻ T: give example C5 & structure a.giờ chẵn / đúng Ss: write & read ex: it’s ten o’clock T: ngoài cách nói giờ lẻ ở trên ta có 2 = it’s + số đếm + o’clock loại đó là giờ hơn & giờ kém b. giờ lẻ T: gives out example ex: it’s ten fifteen Ss: gives out structure = it’s + số giờ + số phút ? “ past, to” có nghĩa là gì ? * giờ hơn Ss: answer Ex: it’s fifteen past nine ? 1/4 của 1 giờ là bao nhiêu ? = it’s + số phút +past + số giờ ? 1/2 của 1 giờ là bao nhiêu ? * giờ kém Ss: answer ex: it’s twenty to one 3. Practice = it’s + số phút + to + số giờ 3.

(304) T: gets ss practise in pairs part C5 “ past” hơn, quá Ss: practise in pairs “to” kém 15’ T: give out clook in picture & gets ss Fifteen = a quarter practise in pairs Thirty = half Ss: practise in pairs T: correct misstakes 2. Practise about time = cta đã biết cách hỏi về giờ vậy muốn biết ai đó làm cv đó vào lúc mây giờ ta hỏi ntn ? T: gets ss read silent C6 Ss: read T: explain “at” 3. hỏi ai đó thường làm cv đó T: ask repeat B’s activities vào lúc mấy giờ Ss: repeat C1 Ex: what time do you get up ? T: gets ss read C6 & guide ss do I get up at six o’clook 12’ Ss: read & do pairs = what time + do/ does + S + T: call some pairs practise in front of V? class S + V (es,s) + at + giờ Ss: practise in pairs - “at” là giới từ chỉ thời gian với T: correct mistakes nghĩa là “ vào lúc” mây giờ 4. Production T: guide ss do C7 about themself Ss: practise in pairs T: call ss to stand up to answer Ss: answer T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart sentences & structure - Do exercise 2 - 41 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 5 A 1,2” ___________________________________________. 3.

(305) Planning date: PERIOD 25 :. Teaching date : UNIT 5: THINGS I DO LESSON 1 : A ( 1, 2 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about daily routines - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What + do/ does + S + V + every day? - S + V + at + (time) 2.Vocabulary to play( v ) chơi do homework (v)làm btvn To do(v ) làm every (det) mỗi Day (n) ngày 3.

(306) III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : -form: oral Question: ? what time do you get up / have breakfast/ go to school ? c introduce: T: gets ss to play game “slap the board”with the words Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. 10’ 2. presentation T: ask ss to look at the picture A1 & introduce new words Ss: write T: gets ss read in choral & single Ss: read in choral & single T;: introduce in part A2-52 7 give out structure Ss: listen & write 3. Practice 15’ T: gets ss listen part A4 Ss: listen & read silent T: call ss reading the sentences with the subject I, she Ss: read T; correct mistakes T: ask ss answer the questions in pairs A2 Ss: answer T: gets ss talk about their daily 3. Writing. Answer: I get up at ........../ have breakfast at........../ go to school at ..........? Play game Go to school get dressed Have breakfast. get up. Brush teeth wash face l. Vocabulary to play( v ) chơi do homework (v)làm btvn to do(v ) làm every (det) mỗi day (n) ngày = what + do/ does + S + do + (everyday) S+ V. 2.answer the question a. everyday, Nga gets up at six b. every morning, she goes to school.

(307) routines Ss: talk 10’ T: correct mistakes 4. Production T: gets ss read again new words Ss: read T: gets ss play game “ jumble words” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. c. every afternoon,she plays game d. every evening, she does her homework * Play game Ayapemgl = play game Okwoemrh = home work Yever = every. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary & structure - Do exercise - prepare next lesson “ Unit 5 A 3 ,4 ” ___________________________________________. Planning date : 01/11/08 Period 26 :. Teaching date:. UNIT 5: THINGS I DO LESSON 2 : A ( 3, 4 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about daily routines & activities after school - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What + do/ does + S + V + after school? -S+V 2.Vocabulary to watch( v )xem housework (v)việc nhà to listen(v )nghe after (prep)sau , tiếp sau to read (v) đọc television (n)tivi music (n)âm nhạc III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces 3.

(308) 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : -form: oral Question: write again new words & structure. c. introduce T get ss to play the game “ pelmanism”with the new words in the last lesson Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 10’ 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture A3-53 ? what is she / he doing? Ss: answer T: introduce new words Ss: write & read in choral & single T: đây là những hoạt động mà các bạn làm sau buổi học T: ask ss repeat structure talk about everyday Ss: repeat T: give out example & explain Ss: write & give out structure 15’ 3. Practice T: gets the ss to listen & practise reading the sentence in A3-53 Ss: read in choral &single T: call S1 read sentences with the 3. Writing. 1.Answer to play( v ) chơi do homework (v)làm btvn to do(v ) làm every (det) mỗi day (n) ngày = what + do/ does + S + do + (everyday) S+ V Play game. 2.Vocabulary to watch( v )xem housework (v)việc nhà to listen(v )nghe after (prep) sau to read (v) đọc television (n)tivi music (n)âm nhạc. ex: what do you do after school ? I watch TV = What + do/ does + S + V + after school? - S + V (es,s) 2. Talk about activities after school a. read.

(309) subjects ( I ) S2 with subjects ( she , he ) Ss: read in pairs T: ask ss to discuss & find out the answers for yhe question in A4-54 b. answer the question Ss: discuss & answer a. she does the housework T: callss pactise in pairs b. he watches TV Ss: read in pairs c. she reads T: correct mistakes d. he listens to music 10’ 4. Production T: gets ss practise the structure to talk about activities after school of ex: themself in pairs S1; what do you do after school ? Ss: practise in pairs S2: I ( listen to music ) T: call some ss practise in pairs Ss: pactise T: correct mistakes T: gets ss read again new words Ss: read in choral (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary & structure - Do exercise 1, 2, 3 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 5 A 5 ,6 ” _________________________________________________ Planning date: 1/11/08 Period 27 :. Teaching date: UNIT 5: THINGS I DO LESSON 3 : A ( 5, 6 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to describe everyday routines using yes /no question - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure do/ does + S + V ? yes, + S + do/ does. 3.

(310) no, S + don’t /doesn’t 2.Vocabulary volleyball( n ) bóng chuyền soccer(n ) bóng đá sport (n) thể thao a girl (n) con gái a boy (n) con trai III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : -form: oral Answer Question: write again new words to watch( v )xem housework (v)việc nhà to listen(v )nghe after (prep) sau to read (v) đọc c. introduce: television (n)tivi T: gets ss to play the game with the music (n)âm nhạc new words in part A1, A2, A3, A4 Play game unit 5 Ss: play game Play game watch TV T: the remark & the winner Do the homework. 10’. read 2. Presetation T: ask ss to look at the picture A5-54 ? what are they doing ? Ss: answer T: introduce new words by pictrure Ss: write & read in choral & single ? muốn biết ai đó có làm or chơi cái gì đó k ta hỏi ntn ? T: give out example Ss: write. Do the housework Listen to music 1.Vocabulary - volleyball( n ) bóng chuyền - soccer(n ) bóng đá - sport (n) thể thao - a girl (n) con gái - a boy (n) con trai Ex: does she play volleybal?. 3.

(311) Yes, she does = do / does + S + V + .....? yes, + S + do/ does no, S + don’t /doesn’t 2. Practice a. read. 15’ 3.Practice T: gets ss read the dialogue Ss: read in choral & single T: call ss read in pairs Ss: read in pairs T: read all the question in A6-55 Ss: listen & answer T: call ss answer the question in pairs Ss: answer b. answer the question T: correct mistakes a. yes, I do / no, I don’t 10’ b. yes, I do / no, I don’t. 4. Production c. yes, I do / no, I don’t. T: gets ss to play game “ matching” d. yes, I do / no, I don’t. Ss: play e. yes, I do / no, I don’t T: the remark & the winner f. yes, I do / no, I don’t Ss: listen g. yes, I do / no, I don’t T: gets ss read again new words Ss: read 5. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary & structure - Do exercise 4, 5, 6-45,46 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 5 B 1, 2, 3 ” ____________________________________________. Planning date: 02/11/08 Period 28:. Teaching date:. UNIT 5: THINGS I DO 3.

(312) LESSON 4 :. B. ( 1, 2, 3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about someone’s daily routines Ask for & say the time ofthe daily routines - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What time + do/ does + S + V ? S+ V+at (time ) To take a shower (v) tắm 2.Vocabulary To eat( v ) ăn To start (v ) bắt đầu To finish (v) kết thúc To have lunch (v) ăn trưa To go to bed (v) đi ngủ III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces. 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : -form: oral Question: write again new words. c. introduce: T: gets ss to play game “ jumbled words” with words “ sehouekr ,tiseln, eard, mohework, awthc” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 10’ 2. Pre- reading T: ask ss talk again about activities in day & time do these activities 3. Writing. Answer: - volleyball( n ) bóng chuyền - soccer(n ) bóng đá - sport (n) thể thao - a girl (n) con gái - a boy (n) con trai Play game Housework, listen, read, homework, watch.

(313) Ss: answer 1. Vocabulary T: ask ss look at the picture B1-56 - To take a shower (v) tắm ? what is he doing / are they doing ? - To eat( v ) ăn Ss: answer - To start (v ) bắt đầu T: give out new words ,structures & gets - To finish (v) kết thúc ss read - To have lunch (v) ăn trưa Ss: write & read in choral & single - To go to bed (v) đi ngủ T: correct mistakes = What time + do/ does + S + T: gets ss guess about the time of Ba’s V? action S+ V+at (time ) 15’ 3. While-reading 3. complete the table T: read the diloague 1 time Ss: read action time time T: ask ss to give ouy the correct answer Ba Me for table in part B2-57 Get up 6:00 T: gets ss read the diloague Go to 6:45 Ss: read in choral & single school 7:00 T: gets ss practise complete the Classes 11:15 information of themself start 11:30 10’ Ss: complete Classes 5:00 4. Post- reading finish 10:00 T: ask ss to practise in pairs complete Have lunch the information B2,3 Go home Ss: practise Go to bed T: call some pairs practise in front of class Ss: practise 3. Practice T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary - Do exercise 1, 2, 3-47, 48 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 5 C 1 ” Planning date : 03/11/08 Period 29 :. Teaching date :. UNIT 5: THINGS I DO LESSON 5 : C ( 1 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to discrible school timetable & talk some subject at school 3.

(314) - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What do we have today ? - we have E We have E from 7:00 to 7:45 We have E at 7:00 2.Vocabulary. a class( n ) tiết học A time table (n )thời khoá biểu monday (n) thứ 2 math(n )môn toán literature(n) môn văn history (n) môn lịch sử geography (n) môn địa lý. III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching proceduces Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 12’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : -form: 10’ *Question: write the number into letter in your paper 10’? 7:00. 7:45 8:35. 8’. 9:25 10:20. 7:50 9:35 7:50 c. introduce: T: gets ss play game “ slap the board” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. 3. Writing * answer: - seven o’clock -seven forty- five - nine twenty- five - eight thirty- five - ten twenty - seven fifty - nine thirty - five - seven fifty Play game: - To take a shower (v) tắm - To eat( v ) - To start (v ) bắt đầu - To finish (v) kết thúc - To have lunch (v) ăn trưa - To go to bed (v) đi ngủ.

(315) 2. Presentation T: give out a timetable & ask ss ? what is this ? Ss: answer T: ask ss look at the picture -58 & introduce new words Ss: answer T: gets ss read Ss: read in choral & single T; để biết hôm nay cta có những môn học nào hỏi & trả lời ntn ta có vd sau Ss: write example & give out structure T: cta có thể hỏi có môn học đó khi 12’ nào ta có vd sau Ss: write & give out structure 3. Practice T: gets ss listen part C1 Ss: listen & read in choral T: call some ss read in single Ss: read in single T: correct mistakes T: gets ss practise seaking using words cue-drill E: 1:15 – 2:00 Math 2:5 - 2:50 10’ History 3:5 – 3:50 Literature 3:55 -4:40 Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes 4. Production T: gets ss play game “slap the board” 3. 1. Vocabulary - a class( n ) tiết học - A time table (n )thời khoá biểu - monday (n) thứ 2 - math(n )môn toán - literature(n) môn văn - history (n) môn lịch sử - geography (n) môn địa lý Ex: what do we have today ? We have E , math = what +do /does+ S + have + on Today ? S + have/ has+ name of subject Ex: when do we have math? We have math from 9:5 to 10:50 We have math at 9:5 = when + do/ does + S + have + name of subject S + has/ have + name of subject + from.......+ to...... S + has/ have + name of subject 3. Practice Ex: S1: what do we have today ? S2: We have E , math S1: when do we have math? S2: We have math from 9:5 to10:50 S2 We have math at 9:5.

(316) Ss: play Play game T: the remark & the winner Timetable history T: ask ss to make a timetable then Literature today ask answer about the timetable Math Monday Ss: practice in pairs Geography T: call ss to atand up to answer English Ss: answer (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary & structure - Do exercise 1, 2- 50, 51 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 5 C 2, 3 ”./. ___________________________________________ Planning date :08/11/08 Period 31 :. Teaching date : UNIT 5: THINGS I DO LESSON 6 : C ( 2 ,3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk name of days in a week & describle school time table - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure When do you have history ? We have it on Tuesday & thursday What do you have on Monday? 2.Vocabulary. tuesday (n ) thứ 3 wednesday (n) thứ 4 thursday(n )thứ 5 Friday (n) thứ 6 saturday (n) thứ 7 sunday (n) chủ nhật. III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 3. Writing.

(317) 7’. 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : Answer: -form: oral A B Question: T gets ss match column A a class môn toán with column B a time table môn văn monday môn địa c. introduce math môn lịch sử ? how many days are there in a literature thời khoá week ? are there days ? biểu Ss: answer history TA T: để nói được từ thứ 2 đến chủ nhật geography thứ 2 bằng TA ta cùng nhau tìm hiểu bài 10’ 2. Presentation T: give out days in a week ? what are they ? 2.Vocabulary Ss: answer - tuesday (n ) thứ 3 T: ask ss look at each caleder - wednesday (n) thứ ? what are you see ? - thursday(n )thứ 5 Ss: answer - Friday (n) thứ 6 T: introduce new words - saturday (n) thứ 7 Ss: write & read in choral & single - sunday (n) chủ nhật ? cta có môn TA vào những ngày nào? ex: when do we have E ? Ss: answer we have it on Monday T: give out example & structure ,Thursday Ss: write = when + do/does +S + have + T: explain “it, on” in example subject? T: gets ss read example in choral & S + have/ has + it/ subject +on single +... Ss: read -“ it” dùng chỉ thay cho tên của môn học 15’ 3. Practice - “on” là giới từ được dùng với T: muốn Nga & Ba có môn học nào các ngày trong tuần vào ngày nta cùng nhau đọc bài T: read 1 time Ss: read in choral T: guide ss read Ss: read in pairs 3.

(318) T: correct mistakes T: give out a time table 2. Practice Ss: ask & answerabout subjects of monday tue wed thur fri sat time tableuse structure of sentence Math T: gets ss practise in pairs in front of History 10’ class Ex: Ss: pactise S1: hwen do we have math? Correct mistakes S2: we have math on Monday,....... T: callrepeat structures Ss: answer 4.Production T: give out subjects of time table ask ss write days in a week Ss: write T: call ss to write on the board ss: write T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary & structure - Do exercise 3, 4- 51, 52 - prepare next lesson “ grammar practice”./. ______________________________________________ Planning date: 10/11/08 Period 32 :. Teaching date: GRAMMAR PRACTCE. I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to review knowledge in unit 4,5 ( simple tense, time, the adjectives, the school subjects & days of the week ) - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure - wh- questions & yes- no questions in the present simple 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare 3.

(319) IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 5’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : don’t check c. Introduce T intoduce in new lesson 27’ 2. Language focus T: ask ss to review about the structure ask about the time. Ss: review T: ask ss to look at exercise2-60 & guide ss to do ex2 Ss: do ex 2 T: call ss to stand up to answer ss: answer T: correct mistakes T: ask ss give out the question words Ss: give out T: repeat their uses T: ask ss to do exercise4 Ss: listen & to do in pairs T: correct mistakes T: gets ss read model in exercise 3 Ss: read T: give out some cuewords ask ss aks & answer with “ yes/ no” “ house, school, city, country, street, livingroom” Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes T: ask ss to repeat use & form of this tense Ss: repeat. 3. Writing. 1.Talk about time What time is it ? - đúng: it is + số đếm + o’clook -lẻ : it is + số giờ + số phút +hơn : it is + phút + past + giờ +kém: it’ is + phút + to + giờ exercise 2-60 a.it is seven o’clook b. it’s a quarter to nine c. it ‘s half past four d. it’s twelve o’clook e. it’s fifteen to two f. it’s ten to nine 2. question words a. where c. what e. which/ what what. b. how d. how f. which/. 3. adjectives with “be” Ex: S1: is your house big ? S2: yes it is /no, it isn’t. 4. present simple - dùng để dtả hđộng lặp đi lặp lại theo thói quen hoặc nhiều lần hoặc sự kiện đang thật sự tồn tại lúc.

(320) eg: she plays volleyball everyday - does she play soccer everyday? - yes , she does - no, she doesn’t. T: guide ss do exercise 1,6,7 Ss: do in pairs T: call ss to stand up to answer ss: answer T: correct mistakes 10’ 3. Production T: ask ss to do ex 1. …….do you live? a.what b. where c. which 2. I ……….in Chieng Tuong. a. lives b. live c. lived 3. what time ………you get up? a. do b. did c. does 4. ……. she watch TV in the free time? a. do b. did c. does Ss: do ex T: correct mistakes. đang nói hoặc lúc nào cũng được xem là đúng (+) S + V(es,s) ........ (-) S + don’t / doesn’t + V (?) do/ does + S +V? Yes, S + do/ does No, S + don’t / doesn’t exercise 1- 60 a. get/ get c. do/ go/go get/ gets do/ go/go have/ has does/ go/ goes b. do/ have d. do/wash/ wash have does/wash/washes does/ have/has do/ have/ have exercise 7-61 a. gets b. takes c. brushes d. has e. goes exercise 5, 6( student’s answer) Ex8. 1. b. 2. b. 3. a. (3’) 4. Homework : - review all structure of lesson - Do exercise “ test yourself”- 57,58,59 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 6 A1,2,3 ”. Planning date : 13/11/08 Period 33 :. Teaching date : UNIT 6: PLACES LESSON 1: A (1,2,3 ). I.Objectives: 3. 4. c.

(321) -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to give personal details & discribe place in the country - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure There + be +N 2.Vocabulary a river(n) dòng sông a yard(n) cái sân A lake(n) cái hồ a tree(n) cây a hotel(n) khách sạn a flower(n) bông hoa a park(n) c.viên near(adv)gần, cạnh a rice paddy(n)cánh đồng III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 5’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : don’t check c. Introduce T: give out a picture of Song & some cuewords to get the student’s to talk about Song Ss: talk about Song T: correct mistakes. 10’ 2.Pre- reading T: ask ss to look at the picture & introduce new words Ss: write & read in choral & single. 3. Writing. 4 people 12 yeards old Lan,15 a student + I’m 12 years old + I’m a student + I have a sister , Lan + she is fifteen + there are 4 people in my family 1.Vocabulary - a river(n) dòng sông - a yard(n) cái sân - a lake(n) cái hồ - a tree(n) cây - a hotel(n) khách sạn - a flower(n) bông hoa - a park(n) c.viên - near(adv)gần, cạnh. -.

(322) - a rice paddy(n)cánh đồng T: gets ss dicuss “ what’s near Thuy’s house” 15’ Ss: dicuss & answer 3. Pre- reading T: introduce the text & gets ss to listen to the in the book Ss: listen & answer the question dicuss T: correct mistakes T: gets ss read the text Ss: read in choral & single T: gets ss answer the question in pairs Ss: answer in pairs 10’ T: correct mistakes Ss: write 4. Post – reading T: gets ss practise the structures in part A2 using the picture drill Ss: practise in pairs. 2. Answer the question a. she’s twelve years old b. she’s a student c. her brother’s name’s Minh d. he’s twenty e. she lives in a house f. there is a river, a hotel, a park, a rice paddy. 3. Practice S1: what’s this / that ? S2: It’s ( a river) S1: what are these / those ? S2: they are ( trees) 4. Write Our house has a yard. It’s near a T: gets ss to do exercise A3-63 rice paddy . There is a hotel near Ss: to do & write the lake.There is a river & a T: correct mistakes park .There are trees & flowers (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart new words & the text - Do exercise 1 -60 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 6 A4, 5 ” ___________________________________. Planning date : 1411/08 Period 34 :. Teaching date: UNIT 6: PLACES LESSON 2 : A ( 4, 5 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to discrible places where they live - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. 3.

(323) - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure There + be +N (s) 2.Vocabulary a town(n) thị trấn a lake(n) làng III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question: Write again new words c. Introduce T: gets ss play game “ slap the board”with new words in the last lesson Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 10’ 2. Presentation T; ask ss to look at part A4 & repeat words in the last lesson Ss: repeat T; give out situation introduce new words Ss: write & read T: ask ss repeat the use of “ there is/ are” & give out example 15’ Ss: repeat 3. Prac tice T: guide & explain ss to do A4-64 Ss: listen T: open the radio 3-4 times Ss: listen & answer T: correct mistakes T: guide & explain part A5 3. Writing. Answer: - a river(n) dòng sông - a yard(n) cái sân - a lake(n) cái hồ - a tree(n) cây - a hotel(n) khách sạn - a flower(n) bông hoa - a park(n) c.viên - near(adv)gần, cạnh - a rice paddy(n)cánh đồng 1.Vocabulary - a town(n) thị trấn - a lake(n) làng. 2. Talk about “ there is/ are” There is + N There are + N(s) Ex: there is a pen There are students.

(324) Ss: listen 3. Write T: call ss talk name of pictures A5 a. hotel Ss: answer b. country T: ask ss use “ there is /are” with c. rice paddy , river picture Ss: practisediscrible 4. Write 10’ T: correct mistakes b. there are trees near our house 4. Production c. there is a river near our house T: ask ss ti write a paragraph about d. there is a lake near our house things near their house e. there is a school near our house ss: practice in pairs f. there is a rice paddy near our T: call ss to stand up to answer house Ss: answer T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart new words & structure - Do exercise 2, 3 -61 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 6 B1,2 ” Planning date : 15/11/08 Teaching date : Period 35. UNIT 6: PLACES LESSON 3 : B ( 1,2 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to discribe places in the city or town - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure There + be +N (s) Their house is next to a store 2.Vocabulary a store(n) cửa hàng a hospital(n)bệnh viện a book store(n)hiệu sách a factory(n)nhà máy a restaurant(n)nhà hàng a museum(n)viện bảo tàng a temple (n)đền, miếu a stadium(n)sân vận động to work(v)làm việc next to(prep) bên cạnh 3.

(325) neighborhood(n)khu lân cận III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson IV.Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question: call 2Ss to do exercise2-61 Answer: in workbook S1: c.there are two windows. d. there is a lamp e. there are two stools c. IntroduceT introduce in new lesson S2; f. there is a clock 10’ 2. Pre- reading g. there are two flower T: ask ss to repeat the places in the h. there are is a tree country they have learned Ss: repeat in part A 1.Vocabulary T: give out situation for introduce - a store(n) cửa hàng new words - a hospital(n)bệnh viện Ss: write & read in choral & single - a book store(n)hiệu sách - a factory(n)nhà máy - a restaurant(n)nhà hàng - a museum(n)viện bảo tàng T: introduce in new lesson - a temple (n)đền, miếu 3. while- reading - a stadium(n) sân vận động 15’ T: gets ss listen to 1 time - to work(v)làm việc Ss: listen to & read in choral & single - next to(prep) bên cạnh T: ask ss read exercise “T” or “F” & - neighborhood(n)khu lân cận guide ss to do T: call ss answer in front of class 3. “true” or “false” Ss: answer a. F b. T T: correct mistakes c. F d. T 4. Post- reading e. F f. F 10’ T: repeat the main ideas in the text 4.Complete the sentences ( place near Minh’s house ) a. city Ss: listen & write about places near b. restaurant, bookstore, temple Minh’s house c. hospital T: explain & guide ss to do exercise d. house, store 3.

(326) B2 e. factory Ss: listen & do 7 answer T: correct mistake (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart new words - Do exercise 3 -62 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 6 B 3 ” __________________________________________ Planning date: 17/11/08 PERIOD 35 :. Teaching date : UNIT 6: PLACES LESSON 4 : B ( 1-3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to discribe places in the city or town - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure where do you live ? I live( in, on, near, next to......) 2.Vocabulary in (prep) ở trong next to(prep) bên cạnh on (prep) ở trên behind(prep) đằng sau near(prep)ở gần in front of(prep)dằng trước between (prep) ở giữa III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? Answer: b.Check the old lesson : S1: - a store(n) cửa hàng - form: oral - a hospital(n)bệnh viện Question: call 2Ss write again new - a book store(n)hiệu sách words - a factory(n)nhà máy - a restaurant(n)nhà hàng c. Introduce S2: - a museum(n)viện bảo tàng 3.

(327) T: gets ssto play the game “ gussing” With the new words in the last lesson 10’ 2. Presentation T:repeat & explains the use of the prepositions Ss: write & read in choral & single. -. - a temple (n)đền, miếu a stadium(n) sân vận động - to work(v)làm việc - next to(prep) bên cạnh - neighborhood(n)khu lân cận. 1. Talk about preposition T: ask ss repeat the structure to ask - in (prep) ở trong for & give the address - next to(prep) bên cạnh Ss: answer & give out structure - on (prep) ở trên T: gets ss read in choral & pairs - behind(prep) đằng sau Ss: read in choral & pairs - near(prep)ở gần 15’ T: correct mistakes - in front of(prep)dằng trước 3. Practice 2. Grammar T: give out the table in part B3 & gets Ex: where do you live ? ss read I live in YC Ss: read in choral & single I live on Tran phu street T: guide & explain gets ss to do = where + do/does +S +live ? exercise 3 S+ live(s)+..... Ss: listen & to do 3. Write T: call some ss answer a. museum Ss: answer b. bookstore T: correct mistakes c. river T: gets ss practise the structure d. street “where” using the cuewords 4. Practice 10’ Ss: practise in pairs ex : S1: where do you live ? T: correct mistakes S2: I live in a village 4. Production Or I live near a temple T: guide ss play game “ noughts & Play game crosses” with the places Village river stadium Ss: play game Rice paddy lake hospital T: the remark & the winner Temple city town (3’)5. Homework : -Learn by heart new words - Do exercise 1, 2 -62,63 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 6 C1, 2 ” ______________________________________________. 3.

(328) Planning date:21/11/07 Period 36 :. Teaching date: UNIT 6 PLACES LESSON 5: C 1, 2,3,4. I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to discribe the position of the house in the country using preposition of places - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure there is a big yeard in front of house 2.Vocabulary. a well(n)cái giếng a mountain (n) ngọn núi to the left (prep) phía bên trái to the right (prep) phía bên phải. III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : Answer: - form: oral - in (prep) ở trong Question: write again new words - next to(prep) bên cạnh - on (prep) ở trên - behind(prep) đằng sau c. Introduce - near(prep)ở gần T: gets ssto play the game “ - in front of(prep)dằng trước matching” Play game with the new words ( house, yard, 3.

(329) trees, flowers) Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. A House Yard trees flowers. 10’ 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture C1-68 & gets ss to dscrible the house in the picture Ss: look at & describle T: introduce new words by situation Ss: write & read in choral 7 single T: introduce new structure Ss: write 15’ 3.Practice T: read the text 1 time & gets ss read Ss: read in choral & single T: ask ss read the text again & answer the question Ss: answer T: correct mistake T: ask s look at the picture -69 & describle the house through the picture Ss: describle the difference b/w the house in part C2 T: correct mistakes T: gets ss to listen & find the right picture Ss: listen & answer & write T: correct mistakes 10’ 4. Production T: ask ss write about three pictures Ss: write & read T: call ss to stand up to answer ss: answer T: correct mistakes. 3. B bông hoa cây ngôi nhà cái sân. 1. Hỏi và trả lời cái gì ở đâu Ex: where is a ruler? It’s on the table 2. Answer the question a. The yeard is in front of the house b. The tall treee are behind the house c. The mountains are behind the tall trees d. The well is to the left of the house e. The flowers are the two the right of the house f. The house is b/w the well & the flower 3. Describe the house Ex: S1: where is ( the well) S2: It’s( to the left of the house) 4. Find the right picture a.-A c. -B b.-B 5. Write a. Ba lives in a beautiful house.There are a lot of flower in front of the house b. There are all trees to the rightof Lan’s house c. Tuan’s house is very.

(330) beautiful . There is a well to the left of the house & there are some flowers to the right (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart new words & structure - Do exercise 1 -63 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 6 C3, 4, 5 ” ________________________________________. Planning date: 3/12/07 5/12/07 Period 37 :. Teaching date : UNIT 6 PLACES LESSON 5: C 4,5,6. I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to discribe the position of a house in the city using the prepositions of places & identify some places in the city - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately. 3.

(331) II.Language contents 1.Structure The photocophy store is next to the bakery 2.Vocabulary. a photocophy store(n)của hàng phô tô a bakery (n) tiệm bánh mì a movie theater (n)rạp chiếu phim a drugstore (n) hiệu thuốc tây a police station(n) đồn công an opposite(prep)đối diện. III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question: write again new words. c. Introduce T: gets ssto play the game “ matching” with the preposition in last lesson Ss: play 10’ T: the remark & the winner 2. Presentation T: gets ss look at the picture C3-70 & introduce the of the lesson “ place in the city” Ss: listen T: introduce new words by situation & picture Ss: write & read in choral & single T: ask ss repeat the uses of “opposite, b/w”.Then gets ss to describe the 3. Writing. Answer: - in (prep) ở trong - next to(prep) bên cạnh - on (prep) ở trên - behind(prep) đằng sau - near(prep)ở gần - in front of(prep)dằng trước Play game 1.Vocabulary - a photocophy store(n)của hàng phô tô - a bakery (n) tiệm bánh mì - a movie theater (n)rạp chiếu phim - a drugstore (n) hiệu thuốc tây - a police station(n) đồn công an - opposite(prep)đối diện.

(332) picture in part C3 Ss: describe 15’ T: correct mistakes 3. Practice T; gets ss read the text Ss:L read in choral & single T: correct mistakes T: repeat the structure in part C4 using “ b/w , opposite” Ss: listen T: gets ss using the picture in part C370practise the structure Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes T: gets s play game the “ guessing” In part C4b using picture C3-70 10’ Ss: practise & answer 4. Production T: gets ss read the question part 5-71 & ask ss think about scenery around them house Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes. 2. Describe the street in the picture Ex: where is the toystore ? It’s opposite the bakery It’s b/w the bookstore & the police station = Where + be + (N) ? It’s + (prep) + N It’s + (prep) +N1 + & N2 Play game Ex1: S1: It’s opposite the bakery.What is it ? S2: It’s ( the toystore) S1: yes.That’s right 4. Practice. (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart new words & structure - Do exercise 2, 3 -64, 65 - prepare next lesson “ Check 45 ” __________________________________________ Planning date: 5/12/07 7/12/07 Period 39 :. Teaching date : CHECK 45’. I.Objectives: -To check ss knowledge which ss have learn from unit 4 to unit 6 - Implrove ss’skill writing - Educate ss more study hard. 3.

(333) II.Language contents 1.Structure present simple tense 2. Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Question, key, point Ss: Pen, prepare IV. Teaching methods: - Writing V. Teaching procedures 1. Warm up: Who’s absent today ? 2. Question: Câu 1: Chọn từ đúng trong ngoặc để điền vào chỗ trống 1. Hoa ..........( get/ gets) up at six o’clock 2. She ...........( washes/ wash) her face at a quarter past five 3. They .............( have/ has) breakfast at half past six 4. We ....................( goes/ go) to school at twenty to seven Câu2: Nối câu hỏi ở cột A với câu trả lời ở cột B A B 1. Which grade is Ba in ? a. yes,I do 2. where’s your school ? b. He is in grade 6 3. What does your sister do ? c. It’s a pen 4. What’s that ? d. She ‘s a student 5. When do you have English ? e. It’s on hang buoi street 6. Do you play volleyball after school ? f. We have it on Monday & Friday 1--------2--------3------4--------5---------6------Câu 3: Viết về các giờ sau 1. 7:25 2. 9:50 3. 3:00 4. 11:30 5. 4:45 Câu 4: Viết đoạn văn sau sang TA Đây là nhà của tôi . Cái nhà ở giữa cái sân và cây . Có 1 cái giếng ở bên trái nhà . Có hoa đối diện với cái giếng 3. Key & point Câu1: (2 point) 1. gets 3. have 2. washes 4. go 3.

(334) Câu2: ( 3. point) 1. --- b 2.--- e 3.----- d 4.---- c 5.---- f 6.----- a Câu3: ( 2,5 point) 1. 7:25 : It’s twenty – five past seven / It’s seven tenty - five 2. 9:50 It’s ten to ten / It’s ten ten 3. 3:00 It’s three o’clock 4. 11:30 It’s half past eleven / It’s eleven thrirty 5. 4:45 It’s a quarter to five / It’s five fifteen Câu4: (2 point) This is my house. The house is between the yard & trees . Theere is a well to the left of the house. The flowers is opposite the well 4. Phần trả bài Thống kê điểm:. G: 3 TB: 37. K: 19 Y: 5. Ưu điểm: Đa số các em đã nắm được ngữ pháp và vận dụng vào làm bài tương đối tốt đặc biệt bài tập 1,2 đa số học sinh làm được. Nhược điểm: Nhìn chung kỹ năng viết của các em còn yếu. Với bài tập 3 có viết được song sai lỗi chính tả rất nhiều, với bài tập 4 hầu như chưa em nào viết được cho vẹn cả đoạn./.. 3.

(335) Planning date:29/11/08 Period 39 :. Teaching date: UNIT 7: PLACES LESSON 1: A ( 1, 2, ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to describe objects around a house & listen to the dialogue & the letter about a house to understand the details - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure Yes / No question with “ to be” 3.

(336) Be + S + adj / N ? Yes , S + be / No, S + be + not 2.Vocabulary old (adj)cũ a garden (n) vườn vegetable (pln) rau a photo (n) bức ảnh III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 5’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : c. Introduce T: introduce in new words 12’ 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture A1- 72 & describe Hoa’s house 1.describe Hoa’s house Ss: look at & describe T: give out the grid & gets ss to guess Yes & complete the grid depending the ........ big epicture .........old .......... a yard ? .......... a well ? Ss: guess ...........flowers ? T: gets ss listen to the dialogue then .......... trees ? check their guess Ss: listen & check 15’ T: correct mistakes 3. Practice T: gets ss to practise reading the dialogue Ss: read in pairs 2. Grammar T: give out the formation with “ to Be + S + adj /N ? be” of the “ yes/ no” question Yes, S + be Ss: write No, S + be + not T: gets s to practise the structure to & Ex: 3. No.

(337) ask & anwer about their house S1: Is your house ( big) Ss: practise S2: yes, it is / no, it isn’t 10’ T: correct mistakes 4. Production 3. Describe Thanh’s house T: ask ss look at the picture A2-73 & introduce situation of the letter, “ Talk a. Vocabulary about Thanh’s house” - old (adj)cũ Ss: look at - a garden (n) vườn T: gets ss describe about Thanh’s - vegetable (pln) rau house - a photo (n) bức ảnh Ss: describe T: give out situation for introduce new words Ss: write & read b. Match the questions & answer T: read the letter a. --> D b---> A Ss: listen & read c.---> E d.---> B T: correct mistakes e.---->C T: gets ss to do exercise “ matching” Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart new words & structure - Do exercise 1 - 66 - prepare next lesson “ A1, 3, 4,5 ” _______________________________________________ Planning date: 29/11/08 Period 40 :. Teaching date: UNIT 7: PLACES LESSON 2 : A ( ,3,4, 5 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to describe place in a town on a city & match description with objects - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What + be + S + ( that/ those) ? - S + be + N Be + there + N(s) ? Yes , there + be / No, there+ be + not 2.Vocabulary a bank (n) ngân hàng a supermarket (n) siêu thi; a post office (n) bưu điện 3.

(338) III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question: write again new words. c. Introduce T: gets ssto play the game “noughts&crosses”with the places Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 2.Presentation 10’ T: call 2->3 pairs ss read again part 172 Ss: read again in pairs T: ask ss look at the picture -74 & introduce new words by situation Ss: write & read 3. Practice 15’ T: repeat structures & explains the examples in part A3a Ss: listen & write T: gets ss practise the structures with picture in part A3 in pairs Ss: practise in pairs & answer T: correct mistakes T: gets ss repeat structure ask & answer 3. Writing. Answer - old (adj)cũ - a garden (n) vườn - vegetable (pln) rau - a photo (n) bức ảnh Play game hotel flower police station trees arestaurant hospital a lake a story moutains. 1. Vocabulary - bank - super market - post office 2. Grammar What’s that /this ? It’s (a hotel) What are thoe/ those? They are ( stores). => Be + there + N(s) Yes, there + be No, there + be + not.

(339) “ yes/ no” Ss: repeat & write T: guide & explain A3b & gets ss practise in pairs 2.Describe the house T: correct mistakes T: gets ss describe the house in A4 Ss: describe T: gets ss listen to the tape & guess which house it is Ss: listen to & finds the house & Play game 10’ answer T: are there any trees ? T: correct mistakes Ss: yes, there are 4. Production T: is there a lake? T: explain the asking exercise A4 & Ss: yes, there is gets ss “ guessing game” Ss: play game T: call ss to play infront of class ss: play T: the remark & the winner (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart new words & structure - Do exercise 3,4 - 66 - prepare next lesson “ B1 ” ____________________________________________________ Planning date: 02/12/08 Period 41 :. Teaching date : UNIT 7: PLACES LESON 3: B ( 1-3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to compare the differences b/w town & country & describle the place where they live - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure There + be + N(s) ? Yes /No question with regular verbs & “to be” 2.Vocabulary an apartment (n) căn hộ; a clinic (n) phòng khám a market (n) cho; a zoo (n) vườn thú 3.

(340) paddy field (n) cánh đồng noisy (adj) ồn ; quiet (adj) yên tĩnh III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question: write again new words c. Introduce T: gets ssto play the game “slap the board”with the places Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. Writing Answer: - bank - super market - post office Play game Post- office a supermarket Country A bank flower trees Rice- paddy town -------Town------------country------- a post-office - rice- paddy - a supermarket - flower - a bank - trees. T: gets ss to arrange the words in 2 column town & country Ss: arrange the words T: correct mistakes 2. Pre- reading 10’ T: ask ss look at the picture of Ba & 2.Vocabulary Chi then introduce the situation of the lesson & introduce new wordss - an apartment (n) căn hộ - a clinic (n) phòng khá by picture Ss: write & read in choral & single - a market (n) chợ - a zoo (n) vườn thú - paddy field (n) cánh đồn - noisy (adj) ồn ào - quiet (adj) yên tĩnh Play game “Matching” T: gets ss play game “ matching” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 3.

(341) 3. While- reading 15’ T: read the text 1 time then gets ss read in single & answer the questions Ss: listen & read T: gets ss read in choral & single Ss: read in choral & single T: correct mistakes T: repeat the structure of “yes/ no” question& give out example Ss: listen T: ask ss read again the text & answer the questions Ss: answer & compare T: call ss answer Ss: answer T: correct mistakes. Be + S + N / adj ? Yes,S + be / no, s+ be + not Ex: is your school big ? Yes, it si ? no, it is not 2. Answer the question a.yes, he does b. no, he doesn’t c. yes, it is d. no, she doesn’t e. no, there aern’t f. yes, it is 3. Write My house ( a partment) My name’s Lan I live in a house in YC . Near my house , there is a market , a bank7 a post-office . It ‘s very noisy here. 10’. 4. Post- reading T: repeat the situation in the text about Chi & Ba & ask ss write a paragraph to introduce & describe their house an apartment using the formpts Ss: write & read in front of class T: correct mistaket (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart new words & structure - Do exercise 5,1 – 67 ,68 - prepare next lesson “ B 2,3 ” ________________________________________________________. 3.

(342) Planning date : 16/12/07 18/12/07 Period 43 :. Teaching date : UNIT 7: PLACES LESSON 4 : B ( 2, 3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to describe placesin in a town & a country & describe the place where they live & compare the differen b/w town & country - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure There + be + N(s) ? Yes /No question 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson, radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question: write again new words. c. Introduce T: gets ssto play the game “slap the board”with the new words in last 10’ lesson Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 2. Pre- writing T:ask ss repeat the contents of the text in B1 3. Writing. Answer: - an apartment (n) căn hộ - a clinic (n) phòng khá - a market (n) chợ - a zoo (n) vườn thú - paddy field (n) cánh đồn - noisy (adj) ồn ào - quiet (adj) yên tĩnh Play game.

(343) Ss: repeat T: give out picture & cue words of Ba Ss: look at & answer ? Who ‘s this ? ? Where does Ba live ? ? What ‘s near his apartment? ? is it noisy? T: correct mistakes & introduce the text about Ba in part B2-77 & get ss 15’ read Ss: read in choral & single T; correct mistakes 3. While-writing T:give out picture of Chi & cue words the same as Ba Ss: look at T: gets ss write the sentence about Chi same as Ba Ss: write & read 10’ T: correct mistakes. 1. Talk about Ba noisy, an apartment a market, in town ->This is Ba ->Ba live in an apartment in town ->near his apartment, there’s a market -> yes, it is very noisy 2. Talk about Chi - quiet, a river, a house, in the country -> This is Chi -> Chi live in a house in the country -> near her house . there is a river -> it is very a quite. 3. Complate the table nam cit tow Co apa H e y n un r o try tm u ent se     Min       h      Tua n Nga. 4. Post- writing T: ask ss look at B3-77 & explains the asking of the exercise Ss: look at & to do T: open the radio 3-->4 time Ss: listen & answer T: correct mistakes T: repeat the yes / no question & get the ss to practise speaking using the information in the table in part =>Do/ does + S +V ? B3-77 Yes, S + do/ does Ss: write & practise No, S + do/ does + not T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart the paragraphy about B2-77 - Do exercise 2,3 – 68, 69 - prepare next lesson “ C1, 2,3 3.

(344) Planning date: 08/12/08 Period 42 :. Teaching date : UNIT 7: PLACES LESSON 4 : C ( 1,2, ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about tranportations & identify mean of tranportations - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure How + do/ does +S + go/ tavel + to +(noun of places) ? S + V+ by + ( a mean of tranportation) 2.Vocabulary a bike (n)xe đạp a plain (n) máy bay a motorbike (n) xe máy a train (n) tàu hoả a bus (n) xe buýt to trevel (v) đi lại a car (n) ô tô to walk (v) đi bộ 3.

(345) III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : don’t check c. Introduce T: gets ssto play the game “net works” Ss: play 10’ T: the remark & the winner 2. Presentation T: give out situation & ask ss look at the picture & introduce new words Ss: write & read in choral T: call ss to read in single ss: read in single. Writing. Play game Transportations 1Vocabulary: - a bike (n)xe đạp - a plain (n) máy bay - a motorbike (n) xe máy - a train (n) tàu hoả - a bus (n) xe buýt - to trevel (v) đi lại - a car (n) ô tô - to walk (v) đi bộ 2. Grammar Ex: How does Lan go to school ? She goes by bike =>How +do/does +S +V.....? S+ V(es,s)+by +( transportation) => “by”được dùnh trước dtừ chỉ phương tiện trong câu trả lời. T: call ss read C1 in single Ss: read in single T: correct mistakes => để hỏi và trả lời về phương tiện đi lại của người khác ta hỏi ntn? T: give out example & explain 15’ Ss: give stucture & write 3. Practice T: get ss practise in pairs B1 using structure 3.Practice Ss:pactise in pairs T: correct mistakes T: explain again “ to travel” & Ss read C2 in pairs Ss: read in pairs & choral 4. Write short answer T: gets ss pactise in pairs part C2-79 a. by motorbike b. by plane 3.

(346) Ss: practise in pairs c. by bus d. by bike T: correct mistakes e. by bus f. by car T: explain the asking of the exercise g. by train h. by walk(on C3 7 gets ss to do foot) Ss: listen & to do 10’ T: correct mistakes 4. Production Play game T: gets ss play game “ slap the board” Bike motorbike bus Ss: play Plane train car T: the remark & the winner T: ask ss to ask about themselves Walk travel ss: practice in pairs T: call ss to stand up to answer ss: answer T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart vocabulary & structure - Do exercise 1,2– 70 - prepare next lesson “ C4, 5 ” ________________________________________ Planning date: 10/12/08 Period 43:. Teaching date: UNIT 7: PLACES LESSON 5: C (3, 4, 5). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about mean of transportations & Describe everyday action - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What time + do/does + S +V ? S + V +at +( a time) 2.Vocabulary to leave (v) dời khỏi III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 3.

(347) 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question:Write again new words c. Introduce T:gets ss to play the game “slap the board”with the time(or the game pelmanism) Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. 10’ 2. Pre- reading T: ask ss look at the picture – 80 & give out words talk about Hoang’s routine using ss: look at the picture T: ask ss to talk about Hoang’s routine Ss: talk about Hoang 15’ T: correct mistakes 3. While- reading T: read the text -80 1 time & get ss read Ss: read in choral & single T: ask ss repeat structure in the lesson “what time......?” Ss: repeat T: get ss read the text again & answer the question 10’ Ss; answer T: correct mistakes 4. Post- reading T: get ss read part “ play with words” Ss: read in choral & single T: ask ss answer th question in part 3. Writing Answer: - a bike (n)xe đạp - a plain (n) máy bay - a motorbike (n) xe máy - a train (n) tàu hoả - a bus (n) xe buýt - to trevel (v) đi lại - a car (n) ô tô - to walk (v) đi bộ Play game 6:00 - get up 6:35 - go to school 7:00- classes start 1. Talk about Hoang’s routine - classes 7;00 to 11:30 - get up 5:30 - take a shower - have breakfast 2. Grammar => what time + do/does + S + V? S+ V + at + ( time) 3. Answer the question a. he get up at 5:30 b. he goes to school at 6:30 c. No, he doesn’t d. Yes, he does e. They start at 7:00 f. they end at 11:30 4. Practice.

(348) C5 Ss: answer with real information T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart C4-80 & structure - Do exercise 3,4 – 71 - prepare next lesson “unit 8 A 1a,b,c,” Planning date:16/12/08 Period 44:. Teaching date : UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 1 : A ( 1,2,3). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to describe on going activities using the present progressive tense & identify mean of transportation - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What + be + S + doing ? S+ be + Ving 2.Vocabulary video game(v) trò chơi đtử to drive(v) lái xe to ride (v) đi, cưỡi III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Answer: C4 -80 student’s book Question: Read again the read C4 c. Introduce T:gets ss to play the game “what & Play game where” with the words of means of transportation Ss: play 10’ T: the remark & the winner 2. Presentation 2.Vocabulary 3.

(349) T: ask ss look at the picture(a,b,c) in part A1-82 & gets ss guess what people in the picture are doing Ss: guess T: introduce new words & get ss to read Ss: write & read in choral & single ? hỏi & trả lời ai đang làm gì đó ta hỏi ntn? 15’ T: give example & explain Ss: write & resd example in pairs 3. Practice T: gets ss listen & read A1(a,b,c) Ss: read in choral & t: call ss to raed in pairs ss: read in pairs 10’ T: correct mistakes pronunciation ss: correct. - video game(v) trò chơi đtử - to drive(v) lái xe - to ride (v) đi, cưỡi. 2. Grammar Ex: what is he doing ? He is driving his car => what + be (is) + S + doing ? S + be + Ving -> thì httd dùng để dtả hành động đang xảy ra ngay lúc cta nói 3. Practice Ex: what is she doing ? She is playing vidio game 4. Write. 4. Production T: get ss write A3 in exercise book Ss: write T: call some ss read again lesson write Ss: read T: correct mistakes (3’)5. Homework : -Learn by heart A1 & structure , vocabulary - Do exercise 1, 2-72 - prepare next lesson “unit 8 A1 (d,e,f)” _____________________________________________ Planning date: 16/12/08 Period 45:. Teaching date : UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 2 : A (4,5,6). I.Objectives:. 3.

(350) -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about describe on going activities using the present progressive tense & identify mean of transportation - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What + be + S + doing ? S+ be + Ving 2.Vocabulary To waiting for (v) đợi , chờ III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question: Write again new words & stucture. c. Introduce T:gets ss to play the game “what & where” or “ slap the board” with the words of means of transportation Ss: play 10’ T: the remark & the winner 2.Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture(d,e,f) in part A1-82 & gets ss guess what people in the picture are doing Ss: guess T: introduce new words & get ss to read Ss: write & read in choral & single ? hỏi & trả lời ai đang làm gì đó ta hỏi 15’ ntn? 3. Writing. Answer: - video game(v) trò chơi đtử - to drive(v) lái xe - to ride (v) đi, cưỡi => what + be + S + doing ? S + be + Ving 1. Grammar Ex: what are they doing ? They are walking to school => what + be(are) + S + doing ? S + be + Ving -> thì httd dùng để dtả hành động đang xảy ra ngay lúc cta nói 2. Practice Ex: what are they doing ?.

(351) T: give example & explain They are travelling to Ss: write & resd example in pairs school by bus 3. Practice T: gets ss listen & read A1(a,b,c) ss: listen and read T: ask ss to read in chorus and read in 10’ single Ss: read in choral & pairs T: correct mistakes 3. Write ss: correct 4. Production T: get ss write A3 in exercise book Ss: write T: call some ss read again their writing Ss: read T: correct mistake (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 3, 4 - 73 - prepare next lesson “A 2,3,4,5,6,7 ”. 3.

(352) Planning date:22/12/08 Period 46:. Teaching date : UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 3 : B (1,2). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about describe on going activities using the present progressive tense & identify mean of transportation - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What + be + S + doing ? - S+ be + Ving 2.Vocabulary To waiting for (v) đợi , Businessman (n) nhà doanh nghiệp, ... III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question:T ask ss some questions ? where is he /she doing ? ? what are they doing ? c. Introduce Tintroduce in new lesson 10’ 2.Presentation: 3. Writing. Answer; - She/ he is ....... - They are ...................

(353) T: ask ss look at part 2-83 & read Ss: look at & read in choral T: ask ss practise in pairs with part A1 Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes 3.Practice: 15’ T: call some ss answer the questions in A3-83 with the pictures in pairs Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes T: ask ss look at the picture A4-84 & talk about them actions Ss: look at & talk T: gets ss listen to 2-> 3 times Ss: listen & answer T: correct mistakes T: ask ss look at the picture A6-85 & guide ss exercise & explain newwords Ss: listen & write. 1. Answer the questions. 2. Arrange in the right order 1- > b 2->f 3- > d 4->a 5- > c 6 ->e 3.Ask & answer the questions with “ who, what, where, how” - Businessman (n) nhà doanh nghiệp, thương gia Ex: S1: Who’s that ? S2: That’s Mr Ha S1: What does he do ? S2: He is a businessman S1: Where is he going ? S2: He is going to HN S1: How is he travelling ? S2: He is travelling by plane. T: ask ss repeat the progressive tense Ss: repeat T: guide & to do form picture a Ss: practise in pairs talking about Mr Ha, Miss Hoa , Mr tuan & Mrs Vui 4. Practice following the example about Lan Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes 4.Production 10’ T: gets ss practise in pairs with picture part A4-84 & about themself Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 3, 4 - 73 - prepare next lesson “B 1,2” Planning date :22/12/08 Teaching date: Period 47:. UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT 3.

(354) Lesson 4 : C 1,2 I.Objective By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about describe & on going activities using the present progressive tense & read & understand a picture story about a truck driver - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure - the present progressive tense 2.Vocabulary a truck (n) xe tải to arrive(at)(v)đến a truck driver(n) tài xế xe tải to load (v)chất hàng a farmer (n) nông dân to unload(v) dỡ , bốc hàng a foodstall(n)quán ăn farm(n) trang trại III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson : - form: oral Question:T ask ss some questions ? who’s that ? ? where is he doing ? ? what do they do ? ? how is she going ?. c. Introduce Tintroduce in new lesson 10’ 2. Pre- reading T: ask ss look at the picture B1- 86 & describe them Ss: look at & describe T: introduce new words by picture & situation 3. Writing. Answer: - that is my teacher - he is playing game - they are teacher - she is going to school. 2.Vocabulary.

(355) Ss: write & read in choral & single ? what is this ? ?để xe ô tô đi được cần phải có ai ? ?người làm ruộng, nương gọi là người gì? ? để có đầy xe hàng cta phải làm gì ? và ngược lại ? Cta k ăn cơm ở nhà cta thường đến đâu ăn ? Ss: answer T: get ss repeat using & structure of present progressive tense Ss: repeat 15’ T: get ss find out & read the “ Ving” in the text Ss: find out & read 3. While- reading T; read the text 1 time & gets ss read Ss: read in choral & single T: get ss ask & answer the question in pairs Ss: pactise in pairs & answer T; correct mistakes. T: read & explain grammar 10’ Ss: read in choral & pairs & write T: guide ss answer the questions Ss: to do in them home. - a truck (n) xe tải - to arrive(at)(v)đến - a truck driver(n) tài xế xe tải - to load (v)chất hàng - a farmer (n) nông dân - unload(v) dỡ , bốc hàng - a foodstall(n)quán ăn - farm(n) trang trại. 2. Anwer the question a. he is a truck driver b. he is going to a farm c. a farmer is waiting for him d. he is taking the vegetable to the market e. he is eating his breakfast f. he is eating at a foostall. 3. Hỏi và trả lời có phải ai đó đang làm gì không - to copy (v) sao chép - to correct (v) chữa, sửa lỗi Be + S + Ving 4. Post- reading Yes, S + be / No, + S + be + T: give out 6 pictures about Mr Quang’s not activities & gets ss to arrange in the right order Ss: arrange them T: gets ss using pictures & retell the 3.

(356) story about Mr Quang Ss: retell T: correct mistakes ( or get ss play game “ matching” with vocabulary) (3’) 5. Homework : -Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise A2-87 in student’s book - prepare next lesson “C1,2” __________________________________________ Planning date: 22/12/08 Period 48:. Teaching date : UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 5 : C 3,4,5. I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to identify the road signs & talk about what they are allowed & not allowed to do on the road using “ can” or “ can’t” - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure You can park here You can’t go into that treet 2.Vocabulary a policeman (n)công an to park (v) nơi đỗ xe a sign (n) biển báo to turn(left, right) (v) rẽ hướng difficult (adj) khó khăn to go a head (v) đi thẳng to can (v)có thể III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: 3. Writing.

(357) Form: oral Question:Call 2 ss answer the questions part A2- 87 student’s book. c. Introduce T: ask ss some questions using the present progressive ? Are you ( doing st)? ? What are you doing ? ? What is he/ she doing ? Ss: answer T : introduce in new lesson 2. Presentation 10’ T: give out some road signs & gets ss guess what they mean Ss: guess T: introduce in new lesson T: : introduce new words & structure by situation Ss: write & read in choral & single 3. Practice 15’ T: read part C1 1time Ss: listen & read in chral & single T: ask ss some questions Ss: answer T: correct mistakes. Answer: a.He is doing his homework b.Yes, he is c.no, he isn’t d.He is playing soccer e.No, they aren’t. 1.Vocabulary - a policeman (n)công an - to park (v) nơi đỗ xe - a sign (n) biển báo - to turn(left, right) (v) rẽ hướng - difficult (adj) khó khăn - to go a head (v) đi thẳng - to can (v)có thể 2.Ai đó có thể làm gì & không thể làm gì ? (+) S + can + V ..... (- ) S + can’t + V ........ 3. Answer the question a. What does Hoan do ? - He’s a policeman b. Is he job difficult ? - Yes, it is T: get ss practise the structure using the c. What does the sign mean ? picture C1,2 - You can’t go into that street Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes 4. Practice 4. Production Ex: 10’ T: get ss play game “ slap the board” S1:What does this sign mean ? Ss: play S2: It’s means: you can park T: the remark & the winner here 3.

(358) T: ask ss to make the same dialogue in pairs with real situation ss: practice in pairs T: call ss to stand up to practise in pairs ss: practice in pairs T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 1 - 75 - prepare next lesson “C3,4,5 ” ________________________________________________. Planning date :2/1/08 1/08 Period 51:. Teaching date :. /. UNIT 8: PLACES Lesson 6 : C ( 3,4,5 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to identify the road signs & understand & the use of “ must” “ musn’t” for obligation / prohibitic - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure We must have discipline We musn’tgo straight ahead 2.Vocabulary dangerous (adj) nguy hiểm to warn (v) cảnh báo accident (n) tai nạn an intersection (n) giao lộ. 3.

(359) discripline (n) luật lệ. to slow down (v) giảm. must (v)phải. musn’t ( v) không phải. tốc độ III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce T: give out some road signs & ask the questions ? what does this sign mean ? Ss: answer T: repeat the meaning of the road signs 10’ 2. Pre - reading T: ask ss look at the picture C3- 90 & introduce new words by situation Ss: write & read in choral 7 single T: gets ss play game “ bingo’ Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. T: introduce the topic of the lesson talk about the danger when going into roads T: get out example & introduce 15’ structure Ss: listen & write 3. Writing. 1.Vocabulary - dangerous (adj) nguy hiểm - to warn (v) cảnh báo - accident (n) tai nạn - an intersection (n) giao lộ - discripline (n) luật lệ - to slow down (v) giảm tốc độ - must (v)phải - musn’t ( v) không phải 2. Grammar ex: I must turn right ( + ) S + must + V (-) S + musn’t + V ( ? ) Must + S + V ?.

(360) 3. While- reading Yes, S + must / No, S + T; read the text 1 time musn’t Ss: read T: call some ss read in front of class Ss: read T: correct mistakes T: gets ss talk about name of sign in C4-94 Ss: talk 3. Number the sign 10’ T: open the ridio 3-4 time 1->c 2 ->d Ss: listen & answer 3 ->h 4 ->a T: correct mistakes 5 -> g 6 ->b 4. Post- reading 7 -> e 8 -> f T: get ss talk about mean of signs in part 4-94 Ss: read T: call ss to stand up to answer ss: answer T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 1 - 75 - prepare next lesson “Grammar practice ”./. Planning date 6/1/08 8/1/08 Period 52:. Teaching date GRAMMAR PRACTICE. I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to review the knowledge in unit 6-> 8 & know where they need to focus their attentions on the knowledg in unit 6->8 - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure - the present simple tense / progressive - can ( not) / must ( not) / preposition of place 2.Vocabulary to carry (v) mang, cầm 3.

(361) III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & teacher’s books,plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce 1. verbs of tracffic & transport 25’ T: introduce in new lesson 2. Language focus T: get ss complete the “ network” about tracffic & transport Verbs of traffic Ss: complete & transport T: correct mistakes. T: repeat the use & the form of the tense Ss: write T: get ss to play the chain game with subject “ I< she, He” Ss: play T: get ss to do exercise2-92 in front of class Ss: to do T: correct mistakes T: repeat yes/ no question form 7 get ss to play guessing game Ss: play T: correct mistakes T: give out the cuewords & get ss to do mapped dialogue Ss: do the mapped dialogue & practise in front in class 3. 2. Present progressive tense S + be + Ving Ex:S1: I’m watching TV S2: She’s watching Tv & I playing....... Exercise2-92 a. is riding b. are waiting c. is watching d. are playing e. is listening f. are walking g. is traveling ex: T: are you reading ? Ss: I’m not TV-> ridio -> what -> vidio game Ex: S1: are you watching TV ? S1: no, I’m not S1: are you listening to the ridio ? S1: no, I’m not.

(362) T: correct mistakes. S1; what are you doing ? S1: I’m playing vidio games 3.Contrast b. rides – is riding T: get ss to do exercise 5- 94 c. go – are going Ss: to do d. walk – are walking T: correct mistakes e. drives – is driving 4.Preposition of place Exercise3-93 T: ask ss repeat the prepositin of 1. in 2. in front of place & do exercise3-93 3. behind 4. opposite Ss: repeat 5. to the left of 6. to the right of T: correct mistakes 5. Question words * grid T: give out the grid & gets the Jon 35 tea Hu 5:3 13:30 structure to practise h che e 0 Ss: practise r T: correct mistakes Hoa 21 Far Ha 4:0 18:00 mer tinh 0 15:30 T: get ss to play the game “ noughts Bin 12 stu & crosses” with the road signs h den 6:0 10’ Ss: play t 0 T: the remark & the winner Ex: S1:what’s his name ? 3. Production S2:his name’s Jonh T: Ask ss to do ex S1:how old is he ? Ss: do ex S2:he’s 35 1.I .........soccer now. S1:what does he do ? a. am playing b. playing c. is S2:he’s a teacher playing 6. Must & can 2. My house is ..........the police Ex: A:what does this sign mean ? station. B: you must (not)...... a. opposite b. in c. on You can (not) ........ 3. We must..........to school on time a. going b. goes c. go 7. answer. 4. she can............. here a. park b. parks c. 1. a 2. a 3. c 4 .a parking T:call ss to stand up to answer ss: answer 3.

(363) T: correct mistakes (3’) 4. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise - prepare next lesson “ review lesson”. Planning date Period 53:. Teaching date REVIEW LESSON. I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to review the knowledge in the first term to prepare for the text lesson, “the present simple tense, the numbers, the time, preposition of place, classes at school” - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure - structures in the 1st term 2.Vocabulary - from unit 1-> 8 III. Teaching aids T: Student’s&work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 5’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce T: introduce in new lesson 27’ 2. Language focus T: give out some sentences in the 1. The present simple tense present simple tense & gets ss explain Ex: I go to school by bike. sentences & give out form action She goes to school by bus Ss: look at & explain & give out form They play volleyball T: explain again He play soccer =>thì ht đôn dùng để dtả hđ xảy ra 3.

(364) T: ask ss repeat 2 kinds of number “ordinal number & cardinal number” Ss: repeat T: get ss read & write these numbers from 1 to 10 Ss: write & read T: correct mistakes T: get ss to repeat the question to ask for the tuime & the answer Ss: repeat T: gets ss practise structure with the time provided Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes T: get ss repeat structure to ask for the time of an action & the answer Ss: repeat & practise structures T: correct mistakes T: get ss repeat prepositions of place they have learned & gets play game “ matching”. 10’ 3. Production T: give out some dialogues & ask ss to play the roles & practise reading the dialogue pairs or groupworks Ss: practise T: correct mistakes T: gets ss to make the same dialogues with real situations in the class Ss: make T: correct mistakes 3. được lặp đi lặp lại nhiều lần (+) S + V (- ) S + don’t/ doesn’t + V (? ) Do/ does + S + V ? 2. Number Ex: one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten Ex: first (1st), second (2nd), third (3rd), fourth(4th), fifth(5th), sixth (6th), seventh(7th) , eighth(8th), nineth(9th), tenth(10th), 3.Time- classes at school What time is it ? It ‘s + ( time) Ex1: S1: What time is it ? S2: It’s half past six What time + do/ does + S +V ? S + V+ at + ( time) Ex: what time do you get up ? I get up at 6 o’clock 4. Prepositions of place “ near, next to, in, in front of, b/w, to the left, to the right of, behind, opposite” Play game 5. Dialogues.

(365) (3’) 4. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary - Do exercise - prepare next lesson “ check 45’” ______________________________________________ Planning date: 8/1/08 10/1/08 Period 54:. Teaching date: CHECK FOR THE FIRST TERM. I.Objectives: - check how well the student’s have learned material in the 1st term . to check where the ss need to focus their attention on the knowledge in the 1st term II.Language contents 1.Structure - structures in the 1st term 2.Vocabulary - from unit 1-> 8 III. Teaching aids T: questions, key, poin Ss: review IV. Teaching procedures 1. Warm up : who’s absent today ? 2. Question: Câu1: Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs 1. My name ..........Lan . I’m................in grade 6 ( be) 2. My school ............in the country (be) . 3. There ..........12 classrooms in my school ( be) 4. I............to school in the morning ( go) 5. We..........e on Monday & Friday (have) 6. My mom ...........up at 6 o’clock(get) 7. She ............her breakfast at 6;30 ( have) Câu2: choose the best answer to complete the sentences. 1. what……….she doing? she is learning english a. are b. is c. am 2. Are there any cats in the garden? Yes,…………….. a. there is b. there are c. there aren’t 3. I …………… soccer after school. a. play b. plays c. playing 4. My house is ………….the country. 3.

(366) a. on b. at c. in Câu3: Read then answer the quetions Linh is twelve years old . he is in grade 6 .He lives in a house with his mother, father & sister. Their house is next to a bookstore.In the neighborhood, there is a restaurant, a market 7 a stadium. Linh’sfather works in the restaurant. His mother works in the market.Linh goes to school at seven in the morning. He has classes from seven thirty to eleven thirty a. how many people are there in Linh’s house? b. What is next to his house? c. What time do his classes start? d. What time does he go to school? Câu 4: Complete the dialogue between you & Thu Thu: hello, which grade are you in ? You: Thu: How many classrooms does your school have? You: Thu:When do you have E lesson? You: Thu:What time do your classes start? You: 3. Key- point Câu1: ( 2 points) 1.is/am 5. have 2. is 6.gets 3. are 7. has 4. go Câu2: ( 2 points) 1. b 2. b 3. a 4. c Câu3: ( 2 points) a. there are four people in his house b. his house is next to a bookstore c. his classes start at 7:30 d. he goes to school at seven in the morning Câu4: ( 2 points) You: I’m in grade 6 You: There are eight You: I have E lesson on Monday & Wednesday & Friday You: My classes start at 7:30 3.

(367) 4. Phần trả bài G: TB: Ưu:. K: Y:. Nhược:. Planning date: / 1/09 / 1/09 Period 55:. Teaching date: UNIT9: THE BODY LESSON 1: A. ( 1,2). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to indentify part of the body - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure - What + that/ those? That/ those + be + N(s) 2.Vocabulary a head (n) đầu a finger (n)ngón chân a shoulder (n)vai a leg (n)cẳng chân a chest (n)ngực a foot (n)bàn chân a arm (n)cánh tay a toe (n)ngón chân a hand(n)bàn tay III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures. 3.

(368) Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 5’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce T: introduce in new lesson 2. Presentation: 10’ T: ask ss look at the picture & tell the topic of the lesson “part of the body” & introduce new words by picture Ss: write & read in choral & single. 3. Practice 15’ T: show at patrs of the body & ask ss Ss: answer T: explain “foot” ->”feet” T: get ss look at parts of the body & write form sentence Ss: write & read. T: ask ss practise part A2 in pairs Ss: practise T: call some pairs practise in front of class Ss: practise in pairs 10’ T: correct mistakes 4. Production T: give out the picture of the body & ask ss to lable(nhận biết) parts of the body in the picture Ss: lable & read again words about parts of the body 3. Writing. 1.Vocabulary - a head (n) đầu - a finger (n)ngón chân - a shoulder (n)vai -a leg (n)cẳng chân - a chest (n)ngực - a foot (n)bàn chân - a arm (n)cánh tay - a toe (n)ngón chân - a hand(n)bàn tay. 2. Grammar Ex: What is that? That is a hand What are those ? Those are toes => What + be + that/ those ? That/ those + be + N(s) 3. Practice S1: What is that? S2: That is(his hand) S3: What are those ? S4: Those are(his hand).

(369) T: get ss play game “ slap the boad” Play game with new words Ss: play T: the remark & the winner ( 3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 12-83 - prepare next lesson “ A3,4” ___________________________________________________ Planning date: Period 56:. Teaching date: UNIT9: THE BODY LESSON2: A. ( 3,4,5). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about physical description of people - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure - S + be + adj 2.Vocabulary - tall (adj)cao - light (adj)nhẹ - short (adj) thấp - weak (adj) yếu - thin (adj) gầy - strong (adj)khoẻ - fat (adj)béo -a gymnast(n)VĐVthể dục - heavy(adj)nặng III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: oral Question: Write again new words Answer: - a head (n) đầu 3.

(370) c. Introduce T:gets ss play game “ bingo” with the parts of the bodyin the last lesson Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 10’ 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture Chi-98 & describle about Chi S: look at & describle T: introduce new words by Chi Ss: write & read in choral & single. 3. Practice 15’ T: read A5 1 time & get ss read in choral & single Ss: read in choral & single Explain structure in the lesson Ss: write & give out example & read T: gets ss read A3 in choral & single Ss: read in choral & single T: correct mistakes T: get ss descriptions of 4 people in A4 Ss: descriptions T: correct mistakes 10’ 4. Production T: gets ss guess & fill in the adjectives for 4 people in the pictures in A4-98 Ss: guess T: open the radio 3->4 time Ss: listen & complete 3. - a finger (n)ngón chân - a shoulder (n)vai - a leg (n)cẳng chân - a chest (n)ngực - a foot (n)bàn chân - a arm (n)cánh tay - a toe (n)ngón chân - a hand(n)bàn tay. 1.Vocabulary - tall (adj)cao - - light (adj)nhẹ - short (adj) thấp - weak (adjẹyeus - thin (adj) gầy - strong (adj)khoẻ - fat (adj)béo - a gymnast(n)VĐVthể dục - heavy(adj)nặng 2. Grammar Ex: She is short => S + be + adj 3. Description the pictures a. she is tall. She is thin b. he is fat. He is short c. he is tall. He is heavy d. she is short. She is fat 4. Complete the people Tall?short?fat? thin? a Thin, tall b Short, fat c Tall,fat. listen 4 3 2.

(371) T: correct mistakes d Short, fat (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 3,4-84 - prepare next lesson “ B1”. 1. _________________________________________ Planning date : Period 57:. Teaching date: UNIT 9: THE BODY LESSON3 : B. ( 1). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to identify & describle facial features - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure 2.Vocabulary - hair (n)tóc - an eye (n) mắt - a nose (n)mũi - oval (adj)hình trái xoan - a face(n) khuôn mặt - long (adj)dài III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: oral Question: Write again new words. 3. - an ear (n)tai - a mouth (n)miệng - a lip (n) môi - a tooth(n) răng - full (adj)đầy đặn - round(adj) tròn. Writing. Answer: - tall (adj)cao - light (adj)nhẹ.

(372) - short (adj) thấp - weak (adj) yếu - thin (adj) gầy c. Introduce - strong (adj)khoẻ T:gets ss play game “ pelmanism” - fat (adj)béo with the parts of the bodyin the last - a gymnast(n)VĐVthể dục lesson - heavy(adj)nặng Ss: play Play game T: the remark & the winner & gets fat tall heavy big ss read thin short light small 10’ 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture 1. Vocabulary ss; lok at the picture - hair (n)tóc T: introduce new words y picture - an ear (n)tai ss: listen and write - an eye (n) mắt T: guide s to read in chorus Ss: read in chorus & single& write - a mouth (n)miệng - a nose (n)mũi - a lip (n) môi - oval (adj)hình trái xoan - a tooth(n) răng - a face(n) khuôn mặt - full (adj)đầy đặn - long (adj)dài Eg: she has an oval face - round(adj) tròn T: introduce structure 2. Grammar ss: listen and write Ex: she has a round face => S + has/ have + N( 15’ 3. Practice T: give out example & structure 3. Practice Ss: give out structure Ex: he has a round face - he has thin lip T; gets ss reading & describe the - he has short hair people in the pictures B1-100 Ss: read in choral & single T:ask ss describe the people in the Play game pictures B1-100 3.

(373) Ss: describe 10’ T: correct mistakes 4. Production T: get ss play game “ words quare” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. H A I R X F N E F A T I E O Y F E N A B S E E G R T H E T E M O U T H R H E A V Y S -> HAIR , FAT , MOUTH, HEAVY EAR, ARM, TEETH, TOE, FEET, FINGER \ > NOSE, EYE. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 1,2- 85 - prepare next lesson “ B2,3”. Planning date: Period 58:. Teaching date: UNIT 9: THE BODY LESSON4 : B. ( 2,3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to identify adjectives colour & use of colour to describe features - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure what colour + be + S ? S + be + ( adj of colour) 2.Vocabulary - black (adj) màu đen - blue (adj)màuxanh dương(datrời) - yellow (adj) ) màu vàng - brown (adj) ) màu nâu - white (adj) ) màu trắng - colour (adj) ) màu sắc 3.

(374) - green (adj) ) màu xanh lục(lá cây) - orange (adj) màu cam - purple (adj) màu tía III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson ,real things Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: oral Question: Write again new words. c. Introduce T:gets ss play game “ jumbles words” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner & gets ss read. 10’. 2. Presentation T: gives out the colours & introduce new words Ss: write & read in choral & single. 3. Writing Answer: - hair (n)tóc - an ear (n)tai - an eye (n) mắt - a mouth (n)miệng - a nose (n)mũi - a lip (n) môi - oval (adj)hình trái xoan - a tooth(n) răng - a face(n) khuôn mặt - full (adj)đầy đặn - long (adj)dài - round(adj) tròn play game yees-> eyes cefa -> face hari -> hair spil -> lips sone ->nose. 1.Vocabulary - black (adj) màu đen - blue (adj)màuxanh dương(datrời) - yellow (adj) ) màu vàng - brown (adj) ) màu nâu - white (adj) ) màu trắng - colour (adj) ) màu sắc.

(375) - green (adj) ) màu xanh lục(lá cây) - orange (adj) màu cam - purple (adj) màu tía T: gets ss play game “finging friends” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. T: gives out example & introduce structures Ss:write. Play game She eyes has black  brown   gray white  blue red yellow  green . hair. lips.     . Ex: what color is (hre) hair? It’s black => What color + be + S ? S + be + adj of color. 15’. 3. Practice T: gives ss practise read example & part3-101 Ss: read in choral & single 2.Practice T: gets ss practise structures in the Ex: lesson to discribe features of 4 dolls in S1: what color is (hre) hair? 10’ part B3 S2: It’s (black) Ss: practise in pairs in front of class T: correct mistakes 4.Production T: gets ss practise describing the facial features of their classmate using the structures of the lesson Ss: practise in pairs with real situation T: calls some pairs in front of class Ss: practise T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 3,4- 86 - prepare next lesson “ B4,5” 3. teeth.

(376) ___________________________________________ Planning date: Period 59:. Teaching date: UNIT 9: THE BODY LESSON 5 : B ( 4,5 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to use body vocabulary to describe people - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure what colour + be + S ? S + be + ( adj of colour) S + has/have + adj + N 2.Vocabulary - black (adj) màu đen - blue (adj)màuxanh dương(datrời) - yellow (adj) ) màu vàng - brown (adj) ) màu nâu - white (adj) ) màu trắng - colour (adj) ) màu sắc - green (adj) ) màu xanh lục(lá cây) - orange (adj) màu cam - purple (adj) màu tía III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson ,radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures. 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: oral Question: Write again new words. Writing. Answer: - black (adj) màu đen - blue (adj)màuxanh dương(datrời) - yellow (adj) ) màu vàng 3.

(377) - brown (adj) ) màu nâu - white (adj) ) màu trắng - colour (adj) ) màu sắc - green (adj) ) màu xanh lục(lá cây) - orange (adj) màu cam - purple (adj) màu tía c. Introduce T:gets ss play game “ pelmanism” 10’ Ss: play T: the remark & the winner & gets ss read 2. Pre- reading T: gets ss reat the facial features of the people ( face, lips, eyes, hair, nose, teeth....) Ss: reap T: gets ss practise reading the 15’ words Ss: reat in chral & single T: gets ss to do the matching exercise with part B5-102 Ss: to do & answer 3. While - reading Gets ss to do the grap fill prediction with the text in part B4 using the picture of Minh & Chi Ss: to do T; gets ss read the text 1 time in choral then gets ss read in choral & single & check the predection & the information in the text 10’ Ss: read & to do T: correct mistakes T: gets ss read again the text & answer the question Ss: answer & compere 3. 1. Arrange again the pictures 1 -> c 2 -> a 3 -> b 4 -> d. 2. Grap fill prediction 1 -> tall 5 -> brownn 2 -> round 6 -> small 3 -> long 7 -> full 4 -> black 8 -> white 3. Answer the question a.Miss Chi’s hair is long b. They are brown eyes c. Her lips are full d. Her hair is black e. Her nose is small 4. Write My My My Etc.. parents mum dad.

(378) T: correct mistakes 4. Post - reading T; gives out the table 7 ask ss to take the survey & write sentence Ss: write & read T: correct mistakes. (3’). body fat face round hair Short, black eyes black nose thin. 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 5- 86 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 10 A 1,2,5”. _____________________________________________ Planning date: Teaching date: Period 60:. UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 1 : A ( 1,2,5 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about feelings & talk about needs & wants - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure How + do / does + S + fell? S + be + ( adj of feeling) 2.Vocabulary - to fell (v) cảm thấy - hot (adj) nóng - hungry (adj) ) đói - cold (adj) ) lạnh - thirsty (adj) ) khát - tired (adj) ) mệt - full (adj) ) no III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson ,radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up 3. Writing.

(379) a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: oral Question: Read a gain part 4. Answer: part 4 – 101. c. Introduce 10’ T:introduce in new lesson 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture A1104 & introduce new words by situation Ss: look at & read in choral 7 single. T: gets ss read again new words & 15’ play game “ matching” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 3. Practice T: repeat structures in lesson “ S + be + adj” & practice structure with ( hungry, tired...) Ss: repeat & practise T: gives out example & explain 7 gives out structures Ss: gives out structures & write T: gets ss practise part A1,5 in pairs Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes T: gets ss listening & to do exercise A5-106 Ss: listen & to do 10’ T: call some ss answer Ss: answer T: correct mistakes 3. 1. Vocabulary - to fell (v) cảm thấy - hot (adj) nóng - hungry (adj) ) đói - cold (adj) ) lạnh - thirsty (adj) ) khát - tired (adj) ) mệt - full (adj) ) no Play game. 2. Grammar Ex:How do you fell? I’m ( tired) =>. How + do / does + S +fell? S + be + ( adj of feeling) 3. Match the names with picrure a -> Nhan (b) b -> Phuong(a) c -> Ba (d) d -> Huong (f).

(380) 4. Production T: gets ss practise the structures with real situation in class Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 1 - 87 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 10 A 3, 4” ______________________________________________________ Planning date: Period 61:. Teaching date: UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 2 : A ( 3,4 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about feelings & talk about needs & wants with “ would like” - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What would you like ? - I’d like some noodles Would you like noodes ? - yes, I would / no, I wouldn’t 2.Vocabulary - to would like (v) muốn, cần - noodle (n) mì - orange juice(n) nước cam - a drink(n) ) đồ uống III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures. 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s Writing activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: oral Answer: Question:Write again new words - to fell (v) cảm thấy - hot (adj) nóng c. Introduce - hungry (adj) ) đói 3.

(381) T: gets ss play game “ slap the board”with new words in last lesson Ss: plat game T: the remark & the winner T:introduce in new lesson. - cold (adj) ) lạnh - thirsty (adj) ) khát - tired (adj) ) mệt - full (adj) ) no 1.Vocabulary - to would like (v) muốn, cần - noodle (n) mì - orange juice(n) nước cam - a drink(n) ) đồ uống. 10’ 2. Pre- listening T: ask ss look at the picture A3 & guess the situation in the diloague Ss: look at 7 guess T: introduce new words by picture Ss: write & read in choral & single. Play game. 2. Complete the grid name feeling food drink Lan Hot, orange T: gets ss play game “ rub out & thristy juice remember” Nam hungry noodles T: give out the grid(ô, khung) of Ba tired 15’ the listening & guess information to complete the grid. 3. While- listening T: read the A3-105 3->4 times Ss: complete the grid & answer T: correct mistakes T: gets ss read in pairs part A3 Ss: read in groups T: gives out example & 10’ introduce structure “ would like” Ss: write T: gets ss practise in pairs A4106 Ss: practise & answer T: correct mistakes 4. Post- listening 3. Ex: What would you like ? I would like a drink =>. What would + S + like ? S + would like + ..... 3. Make the similar dialogue Ex: S1:What’s the matter, S2...? S2: I”m hungry S1: What do you want? S2: I want some noodles.

(382) T: read A6 -106 Ss: read in choral & single T: ask ss make the dialodue similar Ss: to do & practise in pairs T: correct mistakes (3’)n 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 2,3,4 - 87 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 10 A5,6,7” Planning date : Period 62:. Teaching date: UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 3 : A (5,6,7 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to identify some foods & drinks & practise the structures in the dialogue - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching Procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: oral Question: Write again new words Answer: - to would like (v) muốn, cần - noodle (n) mì - orange juice(n) nước cam - a drink(n) ) đồ uống 3.

(383) c. Introduce T: ask ss some question ? Would you like orange juice? ? What would you like? Ss: answer T:introduce in new lesson 10’ 2.Pre-listening T:ask ss look at the picture & talk about contents of the pictures Ss: look at & talk T: guide ss to listen to the tape 1.Match the names with the right ss: listen pictures T: ask ss to guess Phuong: a ss: guess Nhan: b 3.While - listening Ba: d 15’ T: explaining the listening exercise Huong: f A5- 106 & gets ss to do Ss: listen & to do T: open the radio 3-> 4 times Ss: listen & answer T: gets ss to listen again Ss: listen 2.Practice T: correct mistakes T: gets ss base on answer tense & talk again contents of the picture Ss: talk T: correct mistakes 4. Post - listening 10’ T: read A6 -106 Ss: read in choral & single T:ask ss make the dialogue similar Ss: to do & practise in pairs T:correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 2,3,4 - 87 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 10 B1,2,3” _____________________________________________. 3.

(384) Planning date : Period 63:. Teaching date: UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 3 : B ( 1,2,3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to identify some foods & drinks & practise the structures “ there + be” with “ some, any” - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure Be + there + any + N(s)? Yes, there + be + some + N (s) No, there + be + not + any + N(s) 2.Vocabulary - an apple (n) quả táo - a banana (n) quả chuối - an orange(n)quả cam - water(n) nước - some(adj) 1 vài - any (adj) nào III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: oral Question: Write again new words. c. Introduce T: ask ss some question ? Would you like orange juice? ? What would you like? Ss: answer T:introduce in new lesson. Writing. Anwer: - to would like (v) muốn, cần - noodle (n) mì - orange juice(n) nước cam - a drink(n) ) đồ uống. 1.Vocabulary 3.

(385) 10’ 2. Presentation T:ask ss look at the picture & introduce new words Ss: write & read in choral & single. - an apple (n) quả táo - a banana (n) quả chuối - an orange(n)quả cam - water(n) - some(adj) 1 vài - any (adj) nào -“some” có nghĩa là “1 vài” T: repeat structure with “ would dùng trong câu khẳng định like” & introduce the use of “ some, -“any”có nghĩa là “nào”dùng any” & “ there be” trong câu (-) (?) Ss: write & read in choral structure Be + there + any + N(s) ? Yes, there + be + some + N(s) 15’ No, there +be + any + N(s) 3. Practice T: gets ss practise in B2 in pairs Ss: read in pairs & choral 2. Answer the questions T: correct mistakes Ex1: S1:what would you like ? T: gets ss practise structure in part S2: I’d like ( an apple) B2,3 Ex2: S1: is there any ( meat)? Ss: practise S2:yes, there is some 10’ T: correct mistakes (meat) 4. Production 3. Practice T: gives out the food & drink of Ex2: S1: are there any apple? meal S2:no, there aren’t ( meat, vegetable, rice, bananas, S1: is there any rice? water..) S2:....................... and ask ss to ask and answer in pairs Ss: practise & answer T: call ss to stand up to practise in pairs ss: practice in pairs T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary , read again B2 - Do exercise 1, 2,3 – 89,90 3.

(386) - prepare next lesson “ Unit 10 B 4,5”. Planning date : Period 64:. Teaching date: UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 4 : B ( 4,5 ,6). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to identify some foods & drinks &talk about need & want with “ would like” - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What would + S like? S + would like + some + N No, there + be + not + any + N(s) 2.Vocabulary - chicken (n) thịt gà - fish (n) cá - milk(n) sữa - a bread(n) bánh mì - rice(n) gạo - vegetable (n) rau - meat(n) thịt - fruit(n)hoa quả III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV.Teaching Procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: oral Question: Write again new words & structrures. 3. Writing. Answer: - an apple (n) quả táo - a banana (n) quả chuối - an orange(n)quả cam - water(n) - some(adj) 1 vài - any (adj) nào -“some” có nghĩa là “1 vài” dùng.

(387) trong câu khẳng định -“any”có nghĩa là “nào”dùng trong câu (-) (?) Be + there + any + N(s) ? Yes, there + be + some + c. Introduce N(s) T:gets ss play game “slap the board’ No, there +be + any + N(s) Ss: play game T: remark & the winner 10’ T:introduce in new lesson 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture 1.Vocabulary ss: look at the picture - chicken (n) thịt gà T: introduces new words by pictures - fish (n) cá Ss: write & read in choral & single - milk(n) sữa T: guide ss to read the dialogue - a bread(n) bánh mì ss: listen - rice(n) gạo 3. Practice: - vegetable (n) rau 15’ T: gets ss read the dialogue in pairs - meat(n) thịt Ss: read in pairs - fruit(n)hoa quả T: gets ss practise the structure with “ woul like” using B2 Ss: practise T: correct mistakes T: explain B5-111 & gets ss to do T: open the radio 3-> 4 times Ss: listen & complete 10’ T: correct mistakes 4. Production: T: gets ss play game the chain using the structures & the new words Ss: play game T: the remark & the winner (3) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary , read again B4 - Do exercise 4 – 90 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 10 C 1,2,3,4,5” ______________________________________________ 3.

(388) Planning date: Period 65:. Teaching date: UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 5 : C ( 1,2,3,4,5 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to indentify some kinds of vegetables & talk about favorite foods - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure (+) S + do/ does +not + like + N(s)? (-) S + like(s) + N (s) (?) Do/does +like + N(s) ? Yes, + S + do/does No, + S+ do/ does + not 2.Vocabulary - a carrot (n) cà rốt - a been (n)hạt đậu, đỗ - a tomato(n) cà chua - a pea(n) đậu, đỗ hạt tròn - a lettuce(n) xà lách - a cabbage (n) bắp cải - a potato(n) khoai tây - an onion(n) củ hành, tỏi - favorite(adj)ưa thích - to like (v) thích - lemonade (n) nước chanh - coffee (n) cà phê - tea(n) trà - soda(n) nước sô đa III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: oral Question: Write again new words & structrures. 3. Writing. Answer: - chicken (n) thịt gà - fish (n) cá - milk(n) sữa.

(389) c. Introduce T:gets ss play game “bingo” with some words in last lesson(chicken , fish , milk , a bread, rice ) Ss: play game T: remark & the winner 10’ T:introduce in new lesson 2. Presentation ? What kind of vegetables do you know ? Ss: answer T: ask ss look at the picture & introduce new words Ss: write & read in choral & single ? What are these/ those ? They are .............. - a bread(n) bánh mì - rice(n) gạo - vegetable (n) rau - meat(n) thịt - fruit(n)hoa quả Play game Chicken, milk , a bread, rice 1Vocabulary - a carrot (n) cà rốt - a been (n)hạt đậu, đỗ - a tomato(n) cà chua - a pea(n) đậu, đỗ hạt tròn - a lettuce(nẩiu xà lách - a cabbage (n) bắp cải - a potato(n) khoai tây - an onion(n) củ hành, tỏi - favorite(adj)ưa thích - to like (v) thích - lemonade (n) nước chanh - coffee (n) cà phê - tea(n) trà - soda(n) nước sô đa Ex: I like meat I don’t like fish =>. T: gives out example & introduce new structures eg: I don’t like fish Ss: write 15’ 3. Practice: T: read the C1,2 1 time Ss: read in choral & pairs 3. (+)S + do/ does +not+like+N(s)? (-) S + like(s) + N (s) (?) Do/does +like + N(s) ? Yes, + S + do/does No, + S+ do/ does + not.

(390) T: correct mistakes 2. Practice T:gets ss listen C3 -113 Ex: Ss: read in choral & single S1:Do you like cabbages ? T: explain & read C4 1 time S2: yes, I do .It’s my favorite Ss: read in choral & single food T: ask ss practise structure with S1would you like some 10’ vocabulary cabbagefood? Ss: practise & answer S2:yes, please / no, thanks T: correct mistakes 4. Production T; gets ss pracitse talk about their favorite food using new words & structures Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary , read again the dialogue - Do exercise 1,2 – 91 - prepare next lesson “ Unit11 A 1” _____________________________________________ Planning date: Period 66:. Teaching date: UNIT 11 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 1 : A ( 1 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about things people buy at the store & communicate politely at the store - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure Can I helf you ? - Yes, ( I’d like)..........., please 2.Vocabulary - a bottle (n) chai, lọ - a packet (n) gói - cooking oil(n) dầu ăn - a box(n) hộp - chocolate(n)sô cô la - a kilo of(n)1 cân - a gram of(n) 1 gam - a dozen(n) 1 tá - an egg(n) quả trứng - a can(n) lon, hộp - soap(n) xà phòng - a tube(n) ống, tuýp - toothpaste(n)kem đánh răng 3.

(391) III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form:oral Question:Write again new words. c. Introduce T:introduce in new lesson 10’ 2. Presentation T: gives out the picture ss: look at the picture T: introduces the new words by situstion Ss: read in choral & single T: ask ss to write new words. T: gives out situation for introduce structure of lesson Ss: listen & write 15’ 3. Practice T; read the dialogue A1a 1 time Ss: read in choral & single T: correct mistakes 3. Writing. Answer: - lemonade (n) nước chanh - coffee (n) cà phê - tea(n) trà - soda(n) nước sô đa 1.Vocabulary - a bottle (n) chai, lọ - a packet (n) gói - cooking oil(n) dầu ăn - a box(n) hộp - chocolate(n)sô cô la - a kilo of(n)1 cân - a gram of(n) 1 gam - a dozen(n) 1 tá - an egg(n) quả trứng - a can(n) lon, hộp - soap(n) xà phòng - a tube(n) ống, tuýp - toothpaste(n)kem đánh răng 2. Grammar => Can I helf you ? I’d like......... 3. Practice Ex: S1: Can I helf you ? S2: yes, a box of chocolate,please.

(392) T: gets ss practise by making S1: here you are similar dialogue using wordcue in S2:thank you 10’ A1b Ss: practise in pairs & answer T: correct mistakes Play game 4.Production T: gets ss play game “matching” with vocabulary Ss: play game T: the remark & the winner (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary & dialogue - Do exercise 1,2 – 93 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 11 A 2”./. Planning date :24/2/08 26/2/08 Period 67:. Teaching date: UNIT 11 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 2 : A ( 2,3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about quanliies of the things people by at the store & communicate politely in the shop - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure How much (beef) do you want ? -...... How many (eggs) do you want ? -.............. 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson ,radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 12’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent 3. Writing Answer:.

(393) today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form: write 10’ Question:Write new words in your paper?. c. Introduce T:introduce in new lesson 2. Presentation 8’ T: ask ss look at the pictures & introduce the situation in the dialogue Ss: look at T: ask ss guess ? what is Ba doing ? Ss: guess & answer T: explain grammar, atructure, newwords Ss: write & read 3.Practice T: read the dialogue 1 time & gets ss read 14’ Ss: read in choral & pairs T: correct mistakes T: ask ss read again the dialogue & answer the questions Ss: answer the question T: correct mistakes * Pre- listening T: ask ss look at the picture part 3117 & label the names of the things 3. - a bottle (n) chai, lọ - a packet (n) gói - cooking oil(n) dầu ăn - a box(n) hộp - chocolate(n)sô cô la - a kilo of(n)1 cân - a gram of(n) 1 gam - a dozen(n) 1 tá - an egg(n) quả trứng - a can(n) lon, hộp - soap(n) xà phòng - a tube(n) ống, tuýp - toothpaste(n)kem đánh răng 1.Grammar “ How much”dùng cho dtừ không đếm được “ How many”dùng cho dtư đếm được Anything: vật gì, việc gì Else: khác, nữa Need(v) cần How much / many + do/ does + S +want? How much/ many + N +S + want?. 2. Answer the questions a. He is at the store b. He wants beef & some eggs c. He wants 200grams of beef d. He wants a dozen eggs.

(394) Ss: talk about name of the things in the picture 3. Match the names of the T: ask ss guess matching the people with the things they people with the things they want? want ?Theo các em Ly ,Mai , Phuong, Phuong: d Nam muốn gì? Ly: e,a Ss: answer Mai: b *While-listening Nam: c T: open the radio 3->4 times Ss: listen & answer T: correct mistakes Ss: write 4.Production 3. Exercise5-94 8’ T:ask ss to do exercise 5 -94 Ss: to do & practise in pairs T: call ss to stand up to answer ss: answer T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary & dialogue - Do exercise 3,4– 94 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 11 A 3,4 ”./. ______________________________________________ Planning date:26/2/08 27/2/08 Period 68:. Teaching date: UNIT 11 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 3 : A (4 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to listen for specific informartion about quanlities for food shopping & talk about needs & wants - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure How much / many +N + do/ does + S +want? S + wants /want ? 2.Vocabulary cookies(n)bánh ngọt - half (n) 1/2 , 1 nửa 3.

(395) III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson ,radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: - Form:oral Question:Write & answer again grammar Answer; “ How much”dùng cho dtừ không đếm được “ How many”dùng cho dtư đếm c. Introduce được T: gets ss play game “slap the board” Anything: vật gì, việc gì with newwords in last Else: khác, nữa lesson(chocolate, orange, tooth paste, Need(v) cần soap, rice, soda, beef) How much / many + do/ does Ss: play + S +want? T: the remark & the winner How much/ many + N +S + ? trong các đồ ở trên em có muốn có want? đồ nào k ? Ss: answer Play game => vậy để biết 4 bạn Phuong, Ly, Mai, Nam muốn thứ gì ? cta cùng nhau tìm hiểu bài. 10’ 2.Pre-reading ? Các em có thường đi chợ giúp mẹ không?và mua những gì? Ss: answer ? vậy để biết bạn Nam đã đi mua những gì giúp mẹ ta cùng nhau đọc bài T: ask ss repeat structure Ss: repeat 15’ T: explain the use of the word”half” 3. - cookies(n): bánh ngọt 1.Grammar “ How much”dùng cho dtừ không đếm được “ How many”dùng cho dtư đếm được - half (n) 1/2 , 1 nửa.

(396) Ss: write 3.while- reading T: gets ss read in choral & pairs 2. Write the shopping list Ss: read in choral & pairs - a bottle of cookingoil T: gets ss to write the shopping list - 2 kilos of rice 10’ Ss: write & answer - half a kilo of beef T: correct mistakes - half a dozen oranges 4.Post- reading T: ask ss to do exercise4 -94 Exercise4-94 Ss: to do in pairs & practise in front of class T: call ss to stand up to answer ss: answer T; correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary & dialogue A4 - Do exercise 5 – 94 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 11 B1, 2,3, 4 ” ______________________________________________ Planning date:27/2/08 19/2/08 Period 69:. Teaching date: UNIT 11 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 4 : B ( 1,2,3 , 4 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to express needs & wants & talk about foods & drinks - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What would you like for breakfast? I’d like........... 2.Vocabulary dinner(n) bữa tối III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures. 3.

(397) Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce T: gets ss play game “bingo” with foods & drinks in part B1-119 Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 10’ 2. Presentation T; gets ss read & repeat the meanings of the foods & drinks in part B1-119 Ss: read T:gives out example & introduce structures Ss: write T:ask ss look at part 2-120 & read in choral & pairs Ss: read in choral & pairs T: introduce structure in part B3 Ss: write & read 15’ 3.Practice: T: gets ss to do exercise B4-120 T: open the radio 3->4 times Ss: listen & answer. T: gets ss play game “ slap the board” with these words Ss: play T: the remark & the winner T: ask ss practise in pairs use 3. Writing. Play game 1.Grammar. Ex: How much is it ? It is five hundred dong =>. How much +be + S ? S + be +...............dong Ex: What would you like for breakfast? I’d like some milk & bread What would +S + like for...........? I’d like ........... 2. Number the picture 1 ->e 2 -> b 3 -> i 4 -> c 5 -> f 6 -> j Play game. 7 -> h 8 -> l 9 -> a 10 -> g 11 -> k 12 -> d.

(398) structures Ss: practise 10’ & answer T: correct mistakes 4. Production T:gets ss to do roleplay activity to make a dialogue Ss: to do & pratise T: correct mistakes. 3. Practice Ex: What would you like for lunch? I’d like some rice, some fish & some vegetables Ex: A: good morning, What would you like for breakfast? B: I’d like................ (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary & dialogue B1 - Do exercise 1,2 – 95 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 11 B 5 ”./. _______________________________________________________ Planning date:2/3/08 4/3/08 Period 70:. Teaching date: UNIT 11 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 5 : B ( 5 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about prices for foods & drinks with “ How much is it ?” - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure How much is it ? Two thousand five hundred dong 2.Vocabulary - a glass(n) ly, cốc - fried(adj) chiên, rán - a bowl(n) bát - a sandwich(n) bánh xăng uých - a cake(n) bánh ngọt - an ice-cream (n) kem III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare 3.

(399) IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check Play game c. Introduce Some rice lemonad T: gets ss play game “nough & noodle e croses” with foods & drinks in part An milk bananas B1-119 orange Ss: play juice 10’ T: the remark & the winner soda chicken vegetabl 2. Presentation e T: gives out the menu in part B5-121 & introduce the newwords 1.Vocabulary Ss: read in choral & ringle 7 wrtie - a glass(n) ly, cốc - fried(adj) chiên, rán - a bowl(n) bát - a sandwich(n) bánh xăng uých - a cake(n) bánh ngọt T; gets ss play game “ matching” - an ice-cream (n) kem Ss: play Play game 15’ 3. Practice: T: introduce the way to talk about the 2. Read the dialogue prices & gets ss reading Ss: read in choral & single Ex: 1.200=>one thousand two T: gets ss use struture part B5 hundred practise Ss: practise T: correct mistakes Ex: 10’ S1: How much is a fried rice ? 4. Production S2:It’s two thousand five T: gets ss practise structure in the hundred dong lesson with school things in the 3. Practice: classroom Ex: Ss: practice T: call ss to practice in front of class S1: How much is your E book ? S2:It’s eleven thousand two ss: practice hundred dong T: correct mistakes 3.

(400) (3’)(5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 2 ,3,4– 95,96 - prepare next lesson “ Grammar practice”./. Planning date : 3/3/08 5/3/08 Period 71:. Teaching date: GRAMMAR PRACTICE. I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to review the langue materials in unit 9 -> 11 & prepare cafully for the test - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure review 2.Vocabulary review III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce T: introduce in new lesson 25’ 2. Language focus T: ask ss repeat ways use of present simple tense & explain the “ yes/ no” question with ordinary verbs Ss: repeat 4. Writing. 1.Present simple tense - Thì htđơn dùng để dtả hđ lặp đi lặp lại nhiều lần theo thói quen or hđ , sư kiện đang thật sư tồn tại lúc đang nói or lúc nào cũng được xem là đúng.

(401) T: ask ss to do exercise 1 Ss: to do exercise T: correct mistakes T: explain the use of “ a,an, some,any” T: ask ss to do exercise 2 Ss: to do exercise T: correct mistakes T: explain the way to do exercise 3 & ask ss to do exercise 3 Ss: to do exercise T: correct mistakes 10’ T: ask ss look at the picture & explain & ask ss to do exercise Ss: to do exercise T: correct mistakes 3. Production: T: explain the use of two tense after gets ss to do T: giude ss to do ex Ss: to do exercise T: call ss to stand up to do ex on the board ss: do ex T: correct mistakes. exercise 1 a. like/ like/ do/ like/I don’t b. does/ like/likes/does/like 2. “ a,an, some,any” “ a,an”:dùng cho dtừ đếm được “some”:.....................không đếm được “any”:.................câu hỏi Exercise 2 a. any, any, some,an b.any, some c. any some, a 3. Adjectives a. short e. full b. thin f. cold c. light g. thin d. strong h. long 4. Question words a. Who b. What d. What c. How e. Where 5. Contrast - Thì HTTD dùng để dtả hđ, sviệc đang xảy ra ngay tại thời điểm đang nói Exercise 5: a. is eating d. is going a. are drinking d. is getting a. is riding e.is traveling. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure - Do exercise again all the exercise - prepare next lesson “ check 45’ ___________________________________________________. 4.

(402) Planning date:5/3/08 7/3/08 Period 72:. Teaching date: CHECK 45’. I.Objectives: - To check how to well the ss have learned materials & where the ss need to focus attentions on the knowlege in unit 9->11 II.Language contents 1.Structure Present simple tent , “a,an,some,any”, adjectives 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: question , key, point Ss:prepare IV.Teaching methods - Writing V.Procedures 1.Warm up: Who’s absent today ? 2. Questions: Câu 1: Hoàn thành các câu sau với động từ đúng trong ngoặc 1. He ....................a round face (have) 2. ...............you.................ice – cream ? - Yes, I.........................ice – cream ( like) 3. Sue likes cat, but she...................dog ( not like) 4. How does Mr Ha..........................to Hue ? - He............... by plane ( travel) 5. Miss Hoa ........................tall & thin (be) 6. My father.................... an engineer (be) Câu 2: Dùng “a, an, some, any, the” điền vào chỗ trống của các câu sau 1. Do they have.......................milk ? – There is.....................on the table 2. I would like....................banana, please 3. Would you like....................glass of lemonade ? – yes, please 4. Does Lan have ...................apples ? – No, she doesn’t have.................aplle, but she has ..............bananas 5. We go to ...................movies twice a week Câu 3: hoàn thành các câu sau với tính từ thích hợp 1. He isn’t short. He is..................... 2. i’m not full. I’m.................. 4.

(403) 3. Lan isn’t strong. She is...................... 4. Your hair isn’t long. It is......................... Câu 4: Sắp xếp các câu sau thành đoạn hội thoại hoàn chỉnh A:I think it’s just a cold B: Fine, thanks . And you ? B: I’m sorry to hear that ? What’s the matter ? A: Not very well. I’m afraid A: How are you today ? B: Well. I hope you’ll fell better 3. Key: Câu 1:( 3 point) 1. has 2. do / like / like 3. doesn’t like 4. travel / travels 5. is 6. is Câu 2:( 2 point) 1. any / some 2. a 3. a 4. any / any/ some 5. the Câu 3:( 2 point) 1. He is tall 2. hungry 3. weak 4. short Câu 4:( 3 point) A: How are you today ? B: Fine, thanks . And you ? A: Not very well. I’m afraid B: I’m sorry to hear that ? What’s the matter ? A:I think it’s just a cold B: Well. I hope you’ll fell better 4.Phần trả bài G: KH: TB: Y: * Ưu điểm: Nhìn chung HS đã làm được bài , đã biết vận dụng kiến thức đã học vào bài, cũng đã nhớ khi nào dùng a/ an/ some/ any * Nhược điểm: Tuy nhiên kết quả làm bài chưa cao do các em còn mắc ở bài tập 1, các em chưa linh hoạt trong cách thêm từ vào ô trống , chưa chịu suy nghĩ và chưa hình dung ra câu đó là gì.. 4.

(404) Planning date : 10/3/08 11/3/08 Period 73:. Teaching date: UNIT 12 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 1 : A ( 1,2,3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to describe sporting activities 7 pastimes & identify some sports vocabulary - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What + be + S + doing ? S + be + V ing 2.Vocabulary - swim(v): bơi lông - skip (v): nhẩy dây điệu - jog(v): đi bộ - table tennis (n): bóng bàn giải trí - sport (n): thể thao chuyền III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce T: ask ss to play matching. 1.He 2.They 3.I 4.We. a.are walking to school b. is playing video game c. are riding their bikes to school d. am driving my car 4. - badminton(n): cầu - aerobics(n): TD nhịp - tennis (n): quần vợt - pastime (n): trò chơi - volleyball(n): bóng. Writing.

(405) ss: matching( 1.b 2.c 3.d 4.a ) ? các câu trên được sử dụng thì nào? ss: thì hiện tại tiếp diễn ? Tại sao em biết? ss: vì có Tobe + V – ing ? Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn được dùng ntn? ss: diễn tả hđ xảy ra ngay vào thời điểm nói 10’ T:Vừa rồi chúng ta đã ôn lại thì HTTD, và đó cũng là dạng ngữ pháp mà chúng ta cùng đi luyện tập trong bài hôm nay 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the pictures page 124 ? hãy nhìn vào tranh đoán chủ đề của bài hôm nay? ss: thể thao – trò chơi giải trí T: introduce words “ past, sport” T: ask ss some question với nội dung trong tranh ? What are they doing ? Ss: answer T:giới thiệu từ mới với lần lượt từng bức tranh Ss: read in choral & single & write T: Trong các câu này cũng được sử 15’ dụng thì nào đây? ss: thì HTTD ? hãy nhắc lại cấu trúc của thì HTTD? Ss: gives out structure 3. Practice: T: gets ss read again A1 Ss: read T: ask ss practise the structure in A1 using the pictures A1-124 4. 1.Vocabulary - swim(v): bơi - badminton(n): cầu lông - skip (v): nhẩy dây - aerobics(n): TD nhịp điệu - jog(v): đi bộ - tennis (n): quần vợt - table tennis (n): bóng bàn - pastime (n): trò chơi giải trí - sport (n): thể thao 2. Grammar Ex: What is he doing ? be S He is swimming S be V ing - khi đtừ kết thúc là 1 phù âm trước phụ âm là 1 ng/âm ta nhân đôi phụ đó khi thêm đuôi “ing” => What + be + S + doing ? S + be + V ing - Thì HTTD dùng để dtả sviệc nào đó đang diễn ra ngay lúc ta nói 3. Practice: Ex: S1: What is he doing ? S2: He is swimming S1: What are they doing ? S2: They are playing soccer.

(406) Ss: practise in pairs ask & answer T: call ss to practice in front of class ss: practice in pairs T: correct mistakes T: give out eg and explain about it eg: which sport do you play? - I play soccer - I swim - I skip ? Vậy có biết câu hỏi là gì không mà 4. Grammar người trả lời nói là: tôi chơi bóng, Ex: Which sports do you bơi, nhảy dây ss: bạn thường chơi môn thể thao nào play ? I play volleyball ? Vậy để nói thường chơi ta dùng thì => nào để miêu tả đây? Which sports +do/does+S ss: thì hiện tại đơn +V ? ? nhắc lại cấu trúc thì HTĐ và cách S + V(s/ es) + ( a sport) sử dụng? 10’ ss: repeat the structures simple present T: ask ss practise the structure with  Practice. pictures & cue words in part A3-125 A: which sprot do you play? Ss: practise B: I paly table tennis T: ask ss practise in pairs Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes 4. Production T: ask ss to do exercise 5. Exercise. “ Hoàn thành câu với thì HTTD” 1. Mr Quang / jog => Mr Quang is jogging 2. They / play/ soccer => They are playing soccer 3. They swim => They are swiming 4. Thuy & Mai / do / aerobics => Thuy & Mai are doing ss: do exercise aerobics T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary & grammar - Do exercise 1,2-103,104 - prepare next lesson “ A 4,5” ______________________________________________ 4.

(407) Planning date: 10/3/08 12/3/08 Period 74:. Teaching date: UNIT 12 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 2 : A ( 4,5 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to understand short text about sports with present simple tense to talk about people’s regular exercise & use “which....” questions with the present simple tense - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure Which sports + do/ does + S + V ? S + V(s,es) + ( a sport) 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s Writing activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: 5’ Answer: Question:Viết TA của các từ sau - aerobics, skip, table tennis, “TD nhịp điệu, nhảy dây, bóng tennis, jog bàn, quần vợt, bơi, đi bộ” c. Introduce T:gets ss play game “ slap the board” 10’ Ss: play Lan Nam T: the remark & the winner 1. swim 1. soccer 2. Pre- reading 2.aerobics 2.jog T: gives out the tables & gets the 3. 3.table ss to guess which sports Lan & badminton tennis 15’ Nam like ( 3 each) 4.

(408) Ss: write & guess 3.While- reading T: read the text A4-126 1 time Ss: read in choral & single T: call ss read again A4 & answer the questions Ss: answer T: correct mistakes. 10’. 1. Answer the questions a. She swims does aerobics, play badminton b. No, she doesn’t c. He play soccer, jogs & plays table tennis d. Yes, he does 2. Practice: Ex: Which sports do you play ? I (play soccer). name sports 4. Post - reading Lan volley soccer swim T: gets out the table & gets the ss ball to take a survey (khảo sát, thăm Hoa table skip bad dò) tennis minton Ss: practise in pairs Ex: For complete the table S1: Which sports do you play ? S2: I swim S1: What else? S2: I play volleyball T: ask ss write a text about sports S1: Do you play table tennis ? they do ( wrtie it up) S2: Yes, I do Ss: write 3. Write: & read T: correct mistakes. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & the text - Do exercise 3,4-104 - prepare next lesson “ B 1,2,3” __________________________________________________ Planning date: 12/3/08 14/3/08 Period 75:. Teaching date: UNIT 12 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 3 : B ( 1,2,3,4 ). I.Objectives: 4.

(409) -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to write short texts about what they to do in their free time & identify some pastimes - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure What+ do/ does + S + do +in S’s + fretime ? S+V 2.Vocabulary - freetime(n) thời gian dỗi - to go fishing(v)đi câu cá - to go to the movies (v) đi xem phim III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Form: oral Question: Write sentences with the present progressive tense 1. Thuy / do / aerobics 2. They / swim 3. Ba / play/ table tennis c. Introduce T:gets ss to do guesing game “ I......in my free time” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 2. Pre- writing 10’ T: gives out pictures 7 ask ss look at 7 introduce new words Ss: read in choral & single & write T: gives out example & ask ss gives out structure 4. Writing. Answer; 1. Thuy is doing aerobics 2. They are swimming 3. Ba is playing table tennis Play game Do you play soccer in your free time? - Yes,I do / No, I don’t 1.Vocabulary - freetime(n) thời gian dỗi - to go fishing(v)đi câu cá - to go to the movies (v) đi xem phim Ex: What do you do in your free time ?.

(410) Ss: write. I go to the movies => What+ do/ does + S + do +in S’s + fretime ? S+V. T: call1->2 ss gives out example Ss: gives out T: correct mistakes 15’ 3 .While- writing T: gets ss practise the sentences in b1 using picture drill Ss: practise in pairs T: gets ss to do tranformation writing ( change I into Phuong.......) Ss: write & read again T: correct mistakes. 2. Write a. Phuong go to the movies b. Ly watches TV c. Nam read d. Lan listens to music e. Tuan goes fishing f. Long plays vidio games 3. Practice Ex: I watch TV , I read & play game....... T: ask ss write what they do in their free time 10’ Ss: write about them & answer T: correct mistakes 3. Matching the name with the 4.Post- writing pictures *pre- listening Tuan: f T:ask ss look at the picture part 4- Minh & Nam:e 128 & talk name of the pictures Lien: a Ss: look at & talk Lan & Mai: b *While -listening T:open the radio 3-> 4 times Ss: listen & answer T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & vocabulary - Do exercise1,2-104,105 - prepare next lesson “ B 4,5” ______________________________________________ 4.

(411) Planning date :16/3/08 18/3/08 Period 76:. Teaching date: UNIT 12 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 4 : B (5). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about time tables & frequency with “ How often ....” & the adverbs of frequency - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. - Educate ss know to use language accurrately II.Language contents 1.Structure How often+ do/ does + S + V.... ? S + V + (time...) 2.Vocabulary - once a week(adv) 1 lần - twice a week (adv) 2 lần - three times a week (adv)3 lần III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson ,radio Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV.TeachingProcedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Form: oral Question: Write again new word. & structure. c. Introduce T: gets ss play game “ matching” the name with right pictures in 4. Writing Answer:. - freetime(n) thời gian dỗi - to go fishing(v)đi câu cá - to go to the movies (v) đi xem phim => What+ do/ does + S + do+inS’s+free time?.

(412) exercise 4-128 Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. S+V Play game. 2. Presentation T: gives out Ly’s dairy to introduce 10’ the situation in the dilogue B2- 129 & introduce new words Ss: write & read in choral & single T: gets ss listen B2-129 & match the right words with the right lines Ss: listen & match & answer. T: introduce the structure in the lesson “ How often......” Ss: write & read in choral & pairs 15’ 3. Practice: T: ask ss to practise substition drill with the cuewords “three, two , one, four....” Ss: practise T; correct mistakes T: read the dilogue B5 & gets ss read Ss: read in choral & pairs T: correct mistakes T: repeat & gets ss practise 10’ structure in B5 using the picture drill( Ly’s dairy) Ss: practise in pairs & answer T: correct mistakes 4. Production T: gets ss play game “find someone who.........” 4. 1. Talk about Ly’s dairy - once a week(adv) 1 lần - twice a week (adv) 2 lần - three times a week (adv)3 lần 2.Match the right words with the right lines => How often+ do/ does + S + V.... ? S + V + (time...) Ex: How often does Ly go jogging ? She goes jogging one a week 3. Practice: Ex1:T:three Ss:three time a week T: ........... Ex2: S1: How often does Ly (goto school) ? S2:She goes six time a week. Play game Find some who....... ...plays soccer twice a. name.

(413) Ss: play game T: the remark & the winner T: ask ss to practise in pairs about structure with real situation ss: practice in pairs T: correct mistakes. week ...goes to thepark one a week ...watches TV seven times a week. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & vocabulary - Do exercise4,5-105, 106 - prepare next lesson “ C1,2,3,4” ______________________________________________ Planning date Period 77:. Teaching date UNIT 12 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 5 : C ( 1,2,3,4 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to practise adverbs of frequency with the present simple tense for regulary activities II.Language contents 1.Structure How often+ do/ does + S + V.... ? S + adverbs of frequency + V.... 2.Vocabulary - always(adv)luôn luôn - sometimes(adv)thỉnh thoảng - usually (adv)thường thường - never(adv)k bao giờ - often (adv)thường xuyên - to go camping(v)đi cắm trại - a picnic(n)buổi dã ngoại - to fly kite(v)thả diều - a tent (n) cái lều(bạt) III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson ,radio Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? 4. Writing.

(414) b.Check the old lesson: Form: oral Question: Write again structure & gives out example c. Introduce T: gets ss play game “ noughts & crosses” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner Example exchanges S1: How often do you (swim)? S2: I(swim) twice a week 10’ 2. Pre- reading T: introduce the adver of frequency in the lesson S: read in choral & single & write. Answer: How often+ do/ does + S + V.... ? S + V + (time...) Ex: How often do you go jogging ? I go jogging four a week Play game. swim Go to school Watch TV. Read a book Playtenn is Play soccer Do homewo rk jog Play volleyba ll. 1.Vocabulary - always(adv)luôn luôn - sometimes(adv)thỉnh thoảng - usually (adv)thường thường - never(adv)k bao giờ - often (adv)thường xuyên Play game. T: gets ss play game “what & where” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner T: ask ss repeat structure with “ How often...” Ss: repeat    T: ask ss look at pictures & introducesthe situation of the   reading text Ss: listen T; gives out the grid after teaching - to go camping(v)đi cắm trại the new words in the text - a picnic(n)buổi dã ngoại Ss: read & write - to fly kite(v)thả diều - a tent (n) cái lều(bạt) T: ask ss dicuss & complete the grid Ss: dicuss & answer. *How often do they ,. 15’ 4.

(415) 3.While- reading T: read the text 1 time Ss: read in chral & single T: ask ss practise the structure in C3 with information in the grid Ss: practise in pairs & answer 10’ T: correct mistakes 4. Post- reading T: gets ss answer the questions in part C4 Ss: practise & answer T: ask ss write the answers in their book Ss: write T: correct mistakes.  , , , -go to the zoo ? - go to the park ? - have a picnic ? - do sport ? - fly kites ? - go camping ? - walk to school ? - do homework ? 3. Practice Ex:S1: How often do they go to the zoo ? S2:They sometimes go to the zoo. 4. Write. 3’ 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & vocabulary - Do exercise 1,2-106, 107 - prepare next lesson “ C5,6 ” Planning date Period 78:. Teaching date UNIT 12 : STAYING HEALTHY LESSON 6 : C ( 5 ,6 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to read ashort text to understand the details & get futher practise in simple tense, adverds frequency & out door pastimes vocabulary II.Language contents 1.Structure How often+ do/ does + S + V.... ? S + adverbs of frequency + V.... 2.Vocabulary - clothes (n)quần áo - a store (n)cửa hàng -boots (n) đôi ủng - over night (adv)qua đêm III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson ,radio 4.

(416) Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Form: oral Question: Write again vocabulary. c. Introduce T: gets ss to listen 7 do the listening exerse C5-132 Ss: listen & to do & answer T: correct mistakes. Writing Answer: - always(adv)luôn luôn - sometimes(adv)thỉnh thoảng - usually (adv)thường thường - never(adv)k bao giờ - often (adv)thường xuyên - to go camping(v)đi cắm trại - a picnic(n)buổi dã ngoại - to fly kite(v)thả diều - a tent (n) cái lều(bạt) 1. Complete the picture a. never b. sometimes c. often d. often e. usually. 10’ 2. Pre- reading T: gets ss play game “ network” pastimes in the country Ss: play T: the remark & the winner T: introduce the situation in he reading text & teaches the newwords Ss: read in choral & single & write. pastimes in the country 2. Vocabulary - clothes (n)quần áo - a store (n)cửa hàng - boots (n) đôi ủng - over night (adv)qua đêm 3. Answer the questions a. He likes walking b. They alway wear strong boots &warm clothes c. He goes on the weekend d. He usually goes with his two friends. 15’ 3. While- reading T: read the text 1 time Ss: read in choral & single T: ask ss read again the text & 4.

(417) answer the questions ss: answer the qs T: call ss to stand up to answer ss: answer T: correct mistakes. e. He often goes walking in the mountains f. They take food , water & a camping stove 4. Write I like walking on the weekends . I often go walking in the mountains . I usually go with two friends . I & my friends always take food & water & a camping stove . sometimes, we camping overnight.. 10’. 4. Post- reading T:gets ss to do tranformation writing (change “Minh” into “ I” Ss: write & read T: call ss to practise in front of class ss: practice T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & vocabulary - Do exercise 3,4-107 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 13 A1” ________________________________________________ Planning date: 20/3/08 25/3/08 Period 79:. Teaching date:. UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS LESSON 1 : A ( 1,2 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to use temperature &seasons vocabulary to talk about the weather in each season II.Language contents 1.Structure What’s the weather like in the spring? It’s + adj +....... 2.Vocabulary - a season(n)mùa - summer (n)mùa hè - spring (n) mùa xuân - fall (n)mùa thu - winter(n) mùa đông - weather(n)thời tiết - warm(adj) ấm áp - cold (adj)lạnh III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare 4.

(418) IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Form: oral Question: Write again vocabulary. c. Introduce T: gets ss play game “ hangman” with words cold, hot Ss: play 10’ T: the remark & the winner 2. Presentation T: gives out pictures & guess the seasons in Vnese Ss: look at & guess T: gives out newwords Ss: read & write. T: gets ss read again all the new words & play game “ slap the board” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner T: gives out words about season ask sswrite adjectives of temperature. Writing. Answer: - clothes (n)quần áo - a store (n)cửa hàng - boots (n) đôi ủng - over night (adv)qua đêm Play game. 1.Vocabulary - a season(n)mùa - summer (n)mùa - spring (n) mùa xuân - fall (n)mùa thu - winter(n) mùa đông - weather(n)thời tiết - warm(adj) ấm áp - cold (adj)lạnh Play game * Match - summer -> hot - spring -> warm - fall -> cool - winter -> cold Ex: What’s the weather like in the winter ? It’s cool. T: gives out example & introduce structure Ss: write & read 4. What’s the weather like in the spring? It’s + adj +........

(419) 15’ 3. Practice T: gets ss read in part A1 -134 Ss: read in choral & single T: gets ss pracitse the structure in part A2 using picture drill Ss: practise & answer T: correct mistakes T: ask ss practise ask & answer the questions in part 2-135 10’ Ss: practise T; correct mistakes 4.Production. 2. Practice Ex: What’s the weather like in the winter ? It’s cool ( in the winter). T: gets ss to do exercise A1-108 Ss: listen T: ask ss to do exercise in groups ss: do exercise T: correct mistakes (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & vocabulary - Do exercise 2-108 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 13 A 3” __________________________________________________. Planning date : Period 81:. Teaching date: UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS LESSON 2 : A (3). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about their favorite weather contrast “ What weather do you like?” & What’s the weather like?” II.Language contents 1.Structure What’s the weather like ? – It’s hot What weather do you like? – It’s like cold weather 2.Vocabulary 4.

(420) III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 7’. Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Form: oral Question: Write again vocabulary. Writing Answer: - a season(n)mùa - summer (n)mùa - spring (n) mùa xuân - fall (n)mùa thu - winter(n) mùa đông - weather(n)thời tiết - warm(adj) ấm áp - cold (adj)lạnh Play game. c. Introduce T: gets ss play game “ pelmanise” with words summer – hot, spring – warm, fall – cool, winter - cold Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 10’ 2. Presentation 1.Grammar T: ask ss repeat structures about the Ex: What’s the weather like ? weather & gives out new – It’s hot structures => Ss: write What weather +do/does +S +like ? S+ like + ( adj) T: ask & answer the weather today Ss: answer S1: What’s the weather like today? S2: It’s hot T: introduce new structure Ss: write 15’ T: gets ss gives out to contrast 4. 2. Practice S1:What weather do you like? S2: It’s like cold weather Ex: S1:What’s the weather like in HN ?.

(421) structure Ss: gives out 3. Practice T: gets ss practise structure using picture drill A3-135 10’ Ss: practise in pairs T: call ss to stand up to practise ss: practice in pairs T: correct mistakes 4. Production T: gets ss practise mapped dialogue Can Tho 32C HN 15 C ..........HN? ......cold  ........Can Tho ..........hot .......like ? ..........cold ............HN .........like? .........hot .........Can Tho. S2: It’s hot. What’s the weather like in Can Tho? S1: It’s cold S2: What weather do you like? S1: It’s like cold weather S2: Come to HN! S1: What weather do you like? S2:.............. (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & form sentences - Do exercise 3-109 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 13 A4” ________________________________________________ Planning date: Period 82:. Teaching date: UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS LESSON 3 : A (4). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to use “When”clause inpositive statement & “Wh” questions fluently II.Language contents 1.Structure When it’s hot , he goes swimming 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 4.

(422) Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 7’ 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Form: oral Question: Call 2 ss read exercise2108 c. Introduce T: gets ss play game “ networds” with pastimes Ss: play 10’ T: the remark & the winner 2. Pre- reading ? What do you in the summer/ fall/ winter/ spring? Ss: answer T: introduce the structure in the lesson Ss: write T: gets ss guess & answer the question 15’ ? What does Ba do when it’s ............? Ss: guess & answer 3. While- reading T: read the text 1 time Ss: read & check their guess 10’ T: correct mistakes T: gets ss practise the structure A4136 Ss: practise T: correct mistakes 4. Post- reading T: gets ss write a text about themselves then practise with pairs using cuewords Ss: write & practise T: correct mistakes 4. Writing. Answer: exercise2-108 Pastimes 1. Grammar Ex: What does Ba do when it’s hot? when it’s hot, I go swimming What+do/does+S+do+When it’s+(weather)? When it’s + (weather) +S + V....... 2. Practice: Ex: S1: What does Ba do when it’s hot? S2: He goes swimming. Ex: when it’s hot, I go to the park when it’s cold , I watch TV when it’s warm, I go jogging.

(423) (3’) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures & text - Do exercise 4-110 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 13 B1”./.. Planning date Period 83:. Teaching date unit 13 : activities and the seasons Lesson 4 : b (1). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about sports & activities in season & frequency of the activities in the season II.Language contents 1.Structure S +( adv of frequency) + V +( asport) + in the ( a season) 2.Vocabulary - to go sailimg(v)đi bơi thuyền basketball(n)bóng rổ III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s&work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s Writing activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Form: oral Question: Do exercise 4-110 Answer: in workbook b.when it’s hot, I ................ a. when it’s cold ,I............ c.when it’s warm, I ................. c. Introduce d. when it’s cold , I................. 4.

(424) T: gets ss play game “ matching” with the words with the right triks Ss: play & rerad T: the remark & the winner. 2. Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture B1-138 & introduce the topic of the season “ activities in season” Ss: listen T: introduce newwords by pictures Ss: read inchoral & single & write T: introduce new structure by example Ss: write & read T: read in choral & single T: correct mistakes 3.Practice: T: ask ss close them book & make sentences From the cuewords & picture Ss: to do & read T: correct mistakes. T: ask ss make questions for these answer Ss: write & practise T: correct mistakes. Play game - always - - sometimes  - usually - never - often.   . 1.Vocabulary - to go sailimg(v)đi bơi thuyền - basketball(n)bóng rổ Ex:We often play soccerin the warm =>. S +( adv of frequency) + V + ( asport) + in the ( a season). 2. Write a.We / often / swpring -> We often play soccer in the warm b. They/ sometime / fall -> They sometimes go sailing in the fall c. She/ usually/ winter -> She usually watches TV in the winter d. He / never/ cold -> He never go fishing in the cold 3.Answer the questions a. What do you do in the spring ? b. What do they do in the fall ? c. What do you do in the summer ? d. What do you do in the winter ? e. What does she do in the fall ? 4.

(425) f. What does he do in the spring ? 4. Production Play game T: gets ss play game “ luck 1.What’s the weather like? number” 2. What do you usually do in the Ss: play summer ? T: the remark & the winner 3. Lucky number! 4. Where do you usually go in the spring ? 5. what weather do you like? 6. what fruit don you usually eat in the summer? 7. Lucky number1 8. What sports do you do in the winter? 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structures - Do exercise 1,2-111, 112 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 13 B2” Planning date Teaching date Period 84:. unit 13 : activities and the seasons Lesson 4 : b (2). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to write about activities they do in different seasons II.Language contents 1.Structure What +do/does +do + in the ( a season)? S + (adv of freequency) + V ...... 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s Writing activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? 4.

(426) b.Check the old lesson: Form: oral Question: Call 1 student read by heart B1-138 c. Introduce T introduce in newwords 2. Pre- reading T: gets ss play game “brainstorm’ with the topic “activities in seasons” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner. T: introduces the structure & gets the ss to practise using the cuewords in the game Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes 3. While- reading T: ask ss write a paragraph about in seasons of themselves Ss: write & read T: correct mistakes. Answer: B1-138 Student’sbooks. Example: “summer” Go swimming Usually eat fruit Activities & season. summer fly kites Sometimes go camping. 1Grammar Ex: What do you usually do in the summer ? I usually go swimming =>. What+do/does+do+inthe(aseason)? S + (adv of freequency) + V ...... 2. Write Ex:In the spring I often go for a walk & go fishing sometimes play soccer & go camping .I never play tennis in the spring 3. Practice name sea wea usua usua usua son ther lly lly lly 4. Post- reading go do eat T: gets ss to take a survey do Lan fall cool the go hot write it up moun cam drink Ss: take the survey & write tain ping the paragraphs Ect... T: correct mistakes 5. Homework : - Learn by heart grammar & write again paragraphs - Do exercise 3-113 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 14 A1,2,3”. 4.

(427) Planning date Teaching date Period 85:. unit 14 : making plans Lesson 1 : a ( 1, 2, 3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about vacation plans using “ going to “ & “ wh...” question II.Language contents 1.Structure What Where + be + S + going to + V ing.........? How long S + going to + V ...... 2.Vocabulary - a vacation(n)kỳ nghỉ - to visit (v)tham quan - to stay(v) ở lại - a citadel(n)thành nội - a beach (n) bãi biển - an aunt(n)dì, cô, bác - an uncle(n)cậu, chú, bác - a destination(n)đích đến III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce T introduce in newwords 1.Vocabulary 2. Pre- reading - a vacation(n)kỳ nghỉ T: ask ss look at picture A1-140 & - to visit (v)tham quan inrtoduce the situation in the - to stay(v) ở lại dialogue - a citadel(n)thành nội Ss: read & write - a beach (n) bãi biển - an aunt(n)dì, cô, bác - an uncle(n)cậu, chú, bác - a destination(n)đích đến. 4.

(428) T: gets ss read the newwords & play game” Rub out & remember” 2Grammar Ss: play What T: the remark & the winner Where + be + S + going T: introduce the structure in the to + lesson V ing How long S + going to + V ...... 3. While-reading T: read the dialogue 1 time Ss: read in choral & single T: correct mistakes T: ask read again dialogue & answer the questions Ss: answer T: correct mistakes. 3. Answer the questions a. She is going to visit Hue b. She is going to stay with her aunt & uncle c.She is going to stay for a week d.She is going to for a week e.She is going to visit the citadel 4. Make the dialogue. 4. Post- reading T: ask ss make a new dialogue using the cuewords in exercise3141 Ss; make 7 read in pairs T: correct mistakes 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 1,2-114 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 14 A4,5” Planning date date Period 86:. Teaching unit 14 : making plans Lesson 2 : a ( 4,5 ). I.Objectives: 4.

(429) -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to read a text about vacation plans tounderstand detail & practise “ going to” future & sequencing words( fist, then, next, finally) II.Language contents 1.Structure S + going to + V ...... 2.Vocabulary - Temple (n) -finally( III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson - Form: oral Answer: Question: Call 2 ss to do exercise Am going to visit/ are/ going 1-114 to/ am going to / stay/are you going to/ am going to stay/are you going/ am going to/ am c. Introduce going to T: gets ss play the game” Play game hangman” The key: “ be going to” 2. Pre- reading T; repeat the use of “ be going to” with the future meaning Ss: listen T: introduce situation of the lesson Phuong, Mai are going to Play game visit some places in their summer Ben Thanh market Nha vacation Trang Ss: listen & remember The beach HCM T: gives out the poter & gets ss to city play the matching the places with The citadel HN right city Ngoc Son Temple Quang Ss: play Ninh T: correct mistakes Ha long bay Hue T: gets ss guess& order the 4.

(430) places Phuong & Maiare going to visit Ss: guess & order & answer T: correct mistakes. 1. Order the places 1 Ha long bay 2.Ngoc Son Temple 3. The citadel 4. The beach 5. HCM city 3. While- reading 2. Practice T: reda the text 1 time & ss read place where Ho wha Ss: read in choral & single s to to w t to T: listen & coreect mistakes visit stay long do T: gives out the grid & gets ss to first HL completewith the information in bay the text then HN Ss: read & complete & practise next Hue T: coreect mistakes Afte Nha r Tran that g fina HC lly M city Ex: S1:Which place are Phuong& Mai are going tovisit Hlong bay first? S2:They are going to 4. Post-reading visitHlong bay first............... T:gets ss answer the questions & 3. Write write their own plan this summer a. Which place are you going to vacation visit? Ss: answer & write & read T: b. Where are you going to stay? correct mistakes c. how long are you going to stay for? d.What are you going to do these ? 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & read again the text - Do exercise 3 -114 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 14 B 1,2,3,4”. 4.

(431) Planning date Teaching date Period 87:. unit 14 : making plans Lesson 3 : b ( 1,2,3 ,4 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about plans for the near future with “ going to “ in free time II.Language contents 1.Structure 2.Vocabulary - tonight (adv) tối nay - tomorrow(adv)ngày mai - helf(v)giúp đỡ - weekend(n)ngày cuối tuần III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s Writing activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson - Form: oral Question: Call 1 ss read again the text A4 c. Introduce 1.Vocabulary T:introduce in new lesson - tonight (adv) tối nay 2. Presentation - tomorrow(adv)ngày mai T: introduce new words in the - helf(v)giúp đỡ lesson - weekend(n)ngày cuối tuần Play game Ss: read in choral & single& ho my a ba my my write me fri mo dm mo mo wo end vie in m m rk ton T: gets ss play game “finding see friends” play SsL: play do T: the remark & the winner 4.

(432) visit helf go watch Ex: S1 :What are you going to do tomorrow? S2: I’m going to ( play badminton) 2. Make new dialogue ...tonight---------------> .....see a movie ...helf my mom---------->... tonight ...tomorrow----------->...go walking ....play volleybal--------->...tomorrow Ex: S1: What are you going to do tonight? S2: I’m going to see a movie. What are you going to do tonight? S1: I’m going to helf my mom . What are you going to do tonight? S2:....... T: gets s repeat structure” be going to” & practise using in formation in the table above Ss: practise in pairs T: correct mistakes 3. Practice: T: gives out dialogue & gets ss guess & fill in the gaps Ss: guess & complete the dialogue (B1) then ss read in choral & single T: correct mistakes T: gets ss to do mapped dialogue with cuewords in B2114 Ss: make the dialogue & practise in pairs T: correct mistakes 4. Production T: gets ss practise structure in B4 Ss: practise in pairas T: correc mistakes 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & read again the dialogue B1,2 - Do exercise 1 -115,116 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 14 B 5,6”. Planning date date. Teaching. 4.

(433) Period 88:. unit 14 : making plans Lesson 4 : b ( 5,6 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about free time plans using “ be going to” II.Language contents 1.Structure Be + going to +............... 2.Vocabulary - to bring (v) mang( theo) - a camera(n) máy chụp ảnh - to take a photo(v)chụp ảnh III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson - Form: oral Answer: Question: Write again the - tonight (adv) tối nay newwords - tomorrow(adv)ngày mai - helf(v)giúp đỡ - weekend(n)ngày cuối tuần Tonig On On In c. Introduce ht ? Satur Sun The T:gets ss to do to take a survey day day Sum Ss: to do & answer mer T: correct mistakes Me Part ner1 Part Ner2 Ex: S1: What are you going to do........? S2: I’m going to ....... 1.Vocabulary 2. Pre- reading - to bring (v) mang( theo) 4.

(434) T: introduce the newwords in the - a camera(n) máy chụp ảnh text - to take a photo(v)chụp ảnh Ss: read & write T: introduce situation in the reading text “ Minh & his friends are going to have a picnic” Ss:listen T; gives out the questions ask ss guess ? Where are they going to do ? ? What three things are they going to bring ? What are they going to do there ? Ss: guess 3. While- reading T: read the text 1 time Ss: read in choral & single T: correct mistakes T: call some ss answer the questions in guess Ss: answer T: correct mistakes T: gets ss practise the structure under the text Ss: practise in pairs T; correct mistakes 4. Post- reading T: ask ss look at pictures B6-146 & talk names of them Ss: look at & answer T: gets ss guess match name with right things Ss: guess T: gets ss listen & to do Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes T: ask ss write 5 sentences about girls 4. 2. Answer the questions 1. They are going to have a picnic near a lake 2. They are going to bring a camera, some food & some a drink 3. They are going to bring his camera. 3. Matching the names the right pictures Vui: c,e Ly : b Lan : a Mai: d Nga: d 4. Write.

(435) Ss:write & read T: correct mistakes 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & read again the text - Do exercise 3 -116 - prepare next lesson “ Unit 14 C1,2,3” Planning date date Period 89:. Teaching unit 14 : making plans Lesson 5 : b ( 1,2,3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to make suggestions with” Let’s, What about..,Why don’t we ” &responding(trả lời) II.Language contents 1.Structure - Let’s + V( infi...) - Why don’t we + V( infi...) - What about + V(ing) 2.Vocabulary - a pagoda (n) chùa - a minibus(n) xe buýt(8->12 ghế ngồi) III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce T:ask ss some question about “ be going to” Ss: answer 1Vocabulary T: correct mistakes - a pagoda (n) chùa 2. Presentation - a minibus(n) xe buýt(8->12 T: ask ss look at the pictures & ghế ngồi) introduces the situation in the Ex: Let’s go camping doalogue C1 & introduces => 4.

(436) newwords Ss: read & write T: introduce structures in the lesson & to make suggest by example Ss: write & read. Let’s + V.......... Ex: What about going to Hue ?. =>. What about + Ving......? Ex:Why don’t we go to Huong pagodo ? =>. Why don’t +S +V(infi)....? T:gives out the questions guess ?Where are they going to? ? How are they going to ? Ss: guess & answer 3. Practice: T: read the text 1 time Ss: read in choral & groups T: correct mistakes T: gets ss read again the dialogue & answer the questions Ss: answer T: correct mistakes. 2.Answer the questions a.He wants to go to Hue b.She wants to go to Huong pagodo c.She wants to walk d.Because it’s too far e.He wants to travel by bike 3.Practice: Ex: S1: Let’s go to beach T: gets ss using stuctures in part S2: That’s a good idea C3-148 ( No, I don’t want.....) Ss: practise & answer Play game T: correct mistakes You your 4.Production friend T: ask ss practise structures With See a movie--->no...go to the “ let’s” with cuewords in beach mapped dialogue No...to hot Ss: practise in pairs Go to the museum---T: correct mistakes >yes,...walk No,...go by minibus Yes Ex: 4.

(437) S1: Let’s see a movie S2: No, i don’t want to .Let’s go to the beach S1: No, it’s too hot. Let’s go to the museum S2: Yes, that’s a good idea. Let’s walk there 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise1,2 ,3 -116,117 - prepare next lesson “ Grammar practice” Planning date Teaching date Period 90 grammar practice I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to practise more fluently in present simple tense, abverbs of freequency, present progressive tense, “going to” future & the weather II.Language contents 1.Structure - present simple tense - “going to” future - present progressive tense 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s Writing activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce T:introduce in new lesson 2.Language focus 1.Present simple T: gives out the board &  like  like  like  like gets the ss to take the survey don’ don’ don’ don’ Ss: to do t like t like t like t like name sports season food drink 4.

(438) T: gets ss to write sentences with information in the survey Ss: write & answer T: correct mistakes T: guide ss to do exercise 1 Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes. 1.Ha Foot ball swim ming  2. 3. Ex:S1:What sports do you like? S2: foodball S1:What sports don’t you like? S2: swimming Ex: ha likes foodball but he doesn’t likes swimming. Exercise 1-150 a.do/ like/ do/ play/ do/ don’t b.does/ does/ likes/ does/ plays/does/ doesn’t c. do/ do/ don’t 2.Adverbs of freequency. T: gets ss to play the game “slap the board”with the adverbs of freequency into TV Ss: play T: the remark & the winner& guide ss to do exercise 2-150 & play the game “ noughts & crosses” Ss: to do & play T: correct mistakes. Exercise 2-150 TV? The The store? movies? Swimming? Your Fishing? mom? Table Camping? Badminton? tennis? Ex:S1: how often do you(watch TV)? S2:(twice a week) S1:.............. 3. Present progressive tense. 4.

(439) T: ask ss repeat use way & structure of present progressive tense & gets ss to make the sentences using the cuewords Ss: repeat & to do & answer T: correct mistakes. T: guide ss to do exercise 3151 Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes T: ask ss repeat use way & structure of “going to” future & practise using picture drill Ss: repeat & practise T: correct mistakes T: guide ss to do exercise 4151 Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes. 1.get up at 6/ get up at 7 2. go to school/ go camping 3. study/ not study 4.have rice for lunch/ have a picnic 5. walk home/ walk in the mountains Ex: S1: Hung usually (gets up at 6) S2: That’s right, but today he’s (getting up at 7 ) Exercise 3-151 a.am watching/ playing/ is winning b.is cooking/ aren’t/ is c.am doing/ am reading 4. Future“going to”. Exercise 4-151 a. They are going to play soccer b. They are going to play tennis c. They are going to have a picnic d. He isgoing to swim/ to go swimming e. She is going to watch TV f. She is going to cook/ to have lunch( dinner). 5. The weather T: ask ss to answer the questions in exercise6-153 Ss: answer T: correct mistakes 3.Production T: gets ss to answer the 4.

(440) questions in exercise5-153 Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & use way - Do exercise “ test your self” - prepare next lesson “Check 45’” Planning date Teaching date Period 91 Check 45’ I.Objectives: - to check how well the ss have learned material & to check th ss need to focus their attention on the knowlge in unit 12 ->14 II.Language contents 1.Structure future, present simple tense 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: question, key, point Ss: prepare IV. Teachingmethods: - Writing V. Teaching procedures 1. Warm up: 2. Questions Câu 1: Hoàn thành các câu sau với động từ trong ngoặc 1. He is....................a video game now ( play) 2.Lan .....................aerobics every day ( do) 3. They ....................TV at the moment(watch) 4. we usually.......................fishing in the summer(go) 5. .................Hoa.................sports? – Yes, she.................sports (like) 6. What.................she.....................? – She.......................badminton(play) 7. ...................they...................soccer ? - No, they .....................(play) 8. Ba and Lan.....................to the zoo every week(go) Câu 2: Viết các từ sau sang TA 1. Mùa đông 2. Thời tiết 3. Luôn luôn 4. Môn cầu lông Câu 3: Trả lời các câu hỏi sau 1.What is the weather like in the fall ? 2. Do you often play soccer ? - yes,..................... 4.

(441) 3. How often do you go jogging ? 4. What are you going to this evening ? (do my homework) Câu 4: Hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại sử dụng gợi ý A: What are you going to do this summer vacation? B: (visit Ha Noi) A: Where are you going to stay ? B: ( at a friend’s house) A: how long are you going to stay ? B: ( for a week) A: What are you going to do ? B: (see Hoan Kiem lake and Ngoc Son temple) Câu 5:Dịch các câu sau sang TA 1. Tôi thường nghe nhạc vào tối thứ 7 2. Vào mùa xuân thời tiết âm áp 3. Key & point Câu 1:(4 point) 1. playing 2. does 3. are watching 4. go 5. does/like/likes 6. does/ play/ plays 7. do/ play/ don’t 8. go Câu 2:(1point) 1.winter 2. weather 3. always 4. badminton Câu 3:(2 point) 1. It’s hot in the summer 2. Yes, I do 3. I sometimes go jogging 4. I’m going to do my homework this evening Câu 4:(2point) B: I’m going to visit Ha Noi B: I’m going tostay at a friend’s house B: I’m going to stay there for a week B: I’m going to see Hoan Kiem lake and ngoc Son temple Câu 5:(1point) 1.I often listen to music on suaturday 2. It’s warm in the sping 4. Phần trả bài G: KH: TB: Y: Ưu:. 4.

(442) Nhược:. Planning date Period 91:. Teaching date unit 15 : countries Lesson 1 : a ( 1,2,3,4 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about countries, nationalities & language of people in the world II.Language contents 1.Structure - Which language + do/does + S + speak? - S +speak(s) +(a language) - Where + be + S + from ? - S + be + from +(a country) 2.Vocabulary - world(n) thế giới - a nationalities (n) quốc tịch - a country (n) quốc gia - a language (n)ngôn ngữ - speak (v) nói III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce 1.Vocabulary T:introduce in new lesson - world(n) thế giới 2.Presentation - a nationalities (n) quốc tịch T: ask ss look at the picture & - a country (n) quốc gia introduce the situation of the - a language (n)ngôn ngữ 4.

(443) lesson & introduces newwords Ss: read in choral & single & write. - speak (v) nói Play game. T: gets ss play game “rub out & remember” Ss: play T: the remark & the winner T; gives out the board & gets ss guess the country names in Vnese Ss: guess & answer. English Vnese Japan Nhat China Trung quoc Australia Oxtraylia Britain Anh Canada Canada 2.Grammar Ex1:S1: Where are you from ? S2: I’m from China =>. T: gives out example & introduce structure Ss: write & read. Where + be + S + from ? S + be + from +(a country) Ex2: S1: Which language do you speak ? S2: I speak chinese =>. Which language + do/does + T:ask ss look at a3-155 introduce S + speak? nationlities & language through S +speak(s) +(a language) the countries 3.Practice: Ss: read in choral & single Ex1:S1: Where is ( Laura)from ? 3.Practice: S2: She’s from Canada T: gets ss using structure practise A1 using picture( then gets ss play game “nought & crosses”) Ss: practise in pairs Ex: S1:Who’s that ? T: correct mistakes S2: That’s (Yoko) T: gets ss practise the structure in S1: Where is she from ? partA4-156 using information in S2: She’s from Japan partA3-155 S1: What’s her Ss: practise in pairs 4.

(444) T: correct mistakes 4.Production T: call some pairs ss practise in front of class Ss: practise T: correct mistakes. nationnality? S2: She’s Japanese S1: Which language does you Speak ? S2: She speaks Japanese. 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise1,2 -126,127 - prepare next lesson “unit 15 A5,6” Planning date Period 92. Teaching date unit 15 : countries Lesson 2 : a ( 5,6). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to write a postcard about being on vacation & answer some personal questions II.Language contents 1.Structure S+ be + Ving S + be + going to + V 2.Vocabulary - a postcard(n) bưu thiếp - interesting(adj)thú vị, đẹp, hay - wet (adj) ẩm ướt - a tower(n)cái tháp - a lot of = many : nhiều III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: -Form: 5’ Answer: Question: Write again - world(n) thế giới vocabulary - a nationalities (n) quốc tịch - a country (n) quốc gia - a language (n)ngôn ngữ 4.

(445) - speak (v) nói c. Introduce T: ask ss some the questions ? Where are you from ? ? Which language do you speak ? Ss: answer T: correct mistakes T:introduce in new lesson 2.Pre- writing T; gives out postcard & teaches newwords Ss: read in choral & single & write. 1.Vocabulary - a postcard(n) bưu thiếp - interesting(adj)thú vị, đẹp, hay - wet (adj) ẩm ướt - a tower(n)cái tháp - a lot of = many : nhiều. T: gets ss practise reading A5156 Ss: read in choral & single T: ask ss repeat structure “present progressive tense, future tense” Ss: repeat T: gives out cuewords & ask ss put them into three column Ss: put the words T:correct mistakes Japan, Beijing, The Statue of Liberty, Tokyo, VN, Sydney, the USA, France, The Citadel, Paris, New York, The Eiffel Tower, China, Bondi beach, The Great Wall, Austrialia, Hue, Mount Juijiama. 4. Country. City. Interesting place Japan Tokyo Mount Juijiama VN Hue The Citadel The USA New The Statue York of Liberty France Paris The Eiffel Tower China Beijing The Great Wall Austrialia Sydney Bondi beach 2.Write Ex: group1.

(446) 3.While-writing T: repeat the form of a postcards & gets ss to do part5-156 in group ( 6 groups) Group1: postcard from Japan Group2: postcard from VN Group3: postcard from the USA Group4: postcard from France Group5: postcard from China Group6: postcard from Australia Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes 4.Post- writing T; ask ss practise using information in the grid in writing Ss: practise in pairs T; correct mistakes. Dear Nhan, I’m on vacation in Tokyo. The weather is cold. I’m travelling by bus & visiting a lot of interesting places Tomorrow .I’m going to visit Mount Juijiama Love, Lan 3.Practice S1: Where are you ? S2: I’m in Japan. I’m visiting Tokyo S1: What are you going to do tomorrow S2:I’m going to visit Mount Juijiama 4. Answer the question. T: gets ss answer the questions A6-157 Ss: answer T: correct mistakes 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 3,4,5 -128 - prepare next lesson “unit 15 B1” Planning date Period 93. Teaching date unit 15 : countries Lesson 2 : b (1). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to describe places &compare them using comparatives & superlatives 4.

(447) II.Language contents 1.Structure Which (What) is the tallest in VN HCM is bigger than HN 2.Vocabulary - building(n) toà nhà,cao ốc III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Answer: -Form: oral - a postcard(n) bưu thiếp Question: Write again vocabulary - interesting(adj)thú vị, đẹp, hay - wet (adj) ẩm ướt - a tower(n)cái tháp - a lot of = many : nhiều c. Introduce Play game T: gets ss play game the A B “matching”( choose the adj which Hue small best discribe the cities) HCm city cold Ss: play game Sapa big T: the remark & the winner Long xuyen hot T:introduce in new lesson HN wet Hoi An 2.Presentation T:ask ss look at the pictures & compare the house & the building Ss: compare T: introduce structure compare with adj Ss: write T: gets ss change some adj into comparatives & superlatives Ss: change 4. 1.Grammar - building(n) toà nhà,cao ốc =>. Which/What + be + the adj+ N? * So sánh hơn với tính từ ngắn ex: YC is smaller than Son La => S1 + be + adj +er + than + S2 * So sánh hơn với tính từ dài.

(448) T:correct mistakes T:gets ss read B1-158 Ss: read in chorai & single T:correct mistakes. Ex: I’m tallest in class => S1 + be + the + adj + est + N Ex: tall-> taller -> tallest cold 3. Practice: hot T:repeat structure 2.Practice: Ss: listen 1. DN/ HN/ HCM city (big) T: gets ss practise the structures 2.HN/ Uong Bi/ Sa pa (cold) using the cuewords 3. Vinh/ Long Xuyen/ Hoi An Ss: practise in pairs (small) T:correct mistakes 4. Hn/ Can Tho/ Hue (wet) 5. Ben Tre/Tra Vinh/ Ha Tinh(hot) 4.Production Ex: S1: HN is bigger than DN T: ask ss to make the questions for S2: but HCM city is the the answer biggest Ss: to do & answer 3. Make the questions T: correct mistakes 1.Phanxipang 2.The Mekong 3.Hue 4. Sapa 5.HCM city 6. Ha Tinh 1.What’s the tallest mountain in VN ? 2.What’s the biggest riverin VN ? 3.What’s the westtest cityin VN ? 4.What’s the cold town in VN ? 5.What’s biggest city in VN ? 6.What’s the hottest townin VN ? 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 1 -129 - prepare next lesson “unit 15 B 2,3,4,5” Planning date. Teaching date 4.

(449) Period 94. unit 15 : countries Lesson 3 : b ( 2,3,4,5 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to read fact about famous places inthe world & practice comparatives of adj II.Language contents 1.Structure -It has a population of 13,6 million - Which is bigger LD or tokyo ? - How long is the Great wall ? 2.Vocabulary - population(n) dân số - thick (adj)dày - structure(n) ctrình - high (adj) cao - a million (n) triệu III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Answer: -Form: 5’ * So sánh hơn với tính từ ngắn Question: Viết lại ctrúc so sánh => hơn và so sánh hơn nhất S1 + be + adj +er + than + S2 * So sánh hơn với tính từ dài => S1 + be + the + adj + est + N c. Introduce Play game T: gets ss play game the “Lucky 1.What’s the biggest city in number” VN? 2.What’s the biggest city Ss: play game in Britain? T: the remark & the winner 3.What’s the biggest city in T:introduce in new lesson Japan? 4.Lucky number 5.What’s the tallest mountain you know? 6. Lucky number 4.

(450) 7. What’s the wettest cityyou know? 8.Which one is coller: Caan Tho or Sapa 1.Vocabulary - population(n) dân số - thick (adj)dày - structure(n) ctrình - high (adj) cao - a million (n) triệu. 2.Pre- reading T: introduce the topic of the lesson & introduce newwords Ss: read in choral & single & write T: gets ss play game “What & Where” Ss: play T:correct mistakes T: gets ss to order the cities in the world Ss:order biggest first HCM city, LD, Tokyo, HN, Mexico city T:correct mistakes 3.While-reading T: gets ss read B2,3,4-159 Ss: read in choral & single T: ask ss answer the questions Ss: answer T: correct mistakes. 1 Mexico city 3.LD 5.HN. 2. Tokyo 4. HCM city. 2.Answer the questiosns Part 2: a.No,it isn’t b.Mexico city is the biggest c.Tokyo is bigger than LD Part 3: Petronas Twin Tower is taller the Sears Tower Part 4: The Great wall is over 6,000 kms long( It is b/w 4 & 12 meters high, It is over 9 meters thick How long/ high/thick + be + N? It’s/ They are +......meter/km long/ High/ thick. T:introduce structure in lesson Ss: write 4.Post-reading T:gets ss play game “answer given” with two groups 4.

(451) 1.Mexico 8.Malaysia 2.12 million 9. 452 meters 3.LD 10.The Great wall 4.HCM city 11.China 5.Chicago 12. 6.000kms 6.Petronas Twin Tower 13. 4 to12 meters 7. 442 meters. * Play game Ex: S1: What’s the biggest city in the worlds? S2: S1: What’s the population of Tokyo? S2: S1:How high is Petronas Twin Tower? S2: 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 2,3 -129.130 - prepare next lesson “unit 15 C1, 2” Planning date Period 95. Teaching date unit 15 : countries Lesson 4 : c ( 1,2). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to describe natural features in VN II.Language contents 1.Structure We have lots of mountains ? Does VN have any.................? Yes, it does ? No, it doesn’t 2.Vocabulary - rain(n) mưa - a desert(n)sa mạc - a forest(n) rừng - great(adj) to, lớn III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? 4.

(452) b.Check the old lesson: -Form: oral Question: Read again B3,4 c. Introduce T: gets ss play game the “slap the board” Ss: play game T: the remark & the winner T:VN là 1 nước nằm trong vùng có khí hậu nhiệt đới do đó có đặc điểm địa lý rât là phong phú.Để biiết được nó phong phú ntn ta cùng nhau tìm hiểu 2.Pre-reading T: ask ss look at the pictures -162,163 ? Các em thấy phong cảnh VN ntn? (đẹp ) ? đa số các btranh các em nhìn thấy gì? (núi) ? ở VN có nhiều sông và gì ? (sông) ? ở bức tranh 6 các em đoán xem là gì? (rừng) ? vì sao VN có nhiều cây cối um tùm,xanh tốt nvậy ? (mưa) ? Lạc đà thường đi qua đâu ?(sa mạc) ? 2 bức tranh còn lại ở đâu ? (biển) Ss: answer T: introduce newwords Ss: read in choral & single & answer T: Các em thấy VN có rât nhiều núi , rừng, sông, biển....ta có từ “ nhiều” T: explain 4. Answer: B3,4 - 160, 161 Play game Beautifyl green Lakes beaches Fields. river. Mountains. 1.Vocabulary. - a forest(n) rừng - rain(n) mưa - a desert(n)sa mạc. - Red river (n) sông hồng - Me kong(n) Sông mê kông - Great (adj)To lớn 2.Grammar Lots of = much/many(nhiều) “lot of”: dùng cho cả dtừ đếm được và không đếm được dùng trong câu (+) “much” dùng trước dtừ không đếm được dùng trong câu (-) ( ?).

(453) Ss: write. “ many”dùng trước dtừ đếm được số nhiềudùng trong câu (-) ( ?) Ex: We have lots of lakes => S + have/ has + lots of/ much/ many + N. 3.Complete the dialogue a.Mountains e. Forests b. River f. Beaches c. Lakes g. Deserts 3.While-reading d. Rain T:read the text 1 time 4.Practice: Ss: read in choral & single Ex: S1: Does VN have any T: gets ss complete the dialogue- rain ? 164 with the pictures S2: Yes, it does Ss: complete & answer T: correct mistakes ? Why can we say VN is a T: ask ss practise in pairs in C2- beautiful country ? 164 => Because in VN-have many Ss: practise & answer forests, beautiful beaches, great T: correct mistakes rivers,............ 4.Post-reading T:gives uot questions ask ss discuss in group Ss: discuss group & answer 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 1, 2,3 -130 - prepare next lesson “unit 15 C3” Planning date Period 96. Teaching date unit 15 : countries Lesson 5 : c (3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to read a text about the world’s great rivers & mountains to sky for details 4.

(454) II.Language contents 1.Structure - “Wh” questions / comparisions of adj 2.Vocabulary - the sea(n) biển - Mediterranean(n)Địa trung hải - North afica(n)bắc phi - to flow to(v) chảy tới - Tibet (n)tây tạng III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Answer: -Form: oral Lots of = much/many(nhiều) Question: Nêu cách dùng của “lot of”: dùng cho cả dtừ đếm “lot of/ much/ many “ được và không đếm được dùng c. Introduce trong câu (+) T: gets ss play game the “much” dùng trước dtừ không “wordsquare” đếm được dùng trong câu (-) Ss: play game ( ?) T: the remark & the winner “ many”dùng trước dtừ đếm được số nhiềudùng trong câu (-) 2.Pre-reading ( ?) T;ỉntoduce the situation of the 1.Vocabulary leson & itroduce newords - the sea(n) biển Ss: read in choral & single & - Mediterranean(n)Địa trung hải write - North afica(n)bắc phi T;gets ss to do exercise “T” “F” - to flow to(v) chảy tới Ss: to do & answer - Tibet (n)tây tạng T: correct mistakes exercise “T” “F” a.There are 2 great rivers in VN  b.The Red river is longer than the mekong river F c. The Red River & the Mekong River both start in China T 4.

(455) d.The longest river in the world is not in VN T e.Phanxipang is the hightest mountain in the world F 2. Answer the questions a. It’s a mekong River b. It’s start in Tibet c. It’s the Nile River d. It’s flow to Mediterranean e. It’s Mount Everest f. It’s Mount Phanxipang. 4.Post-reading T:gets ss to dicuss & to do exercise 3-131 Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 3 -131 - prepare next lesson “unit 16 A 1,3” Planning date Period 97. Teaching date unit 16 : man and the environment Lesson 1 : a ( 1,3 ). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to talk about food using countable & uncountable quanlities II.Language contents 1.Structure - How much rice is there ? - There is some/ a lot of/a little rice - How many eggs are there ? - There are some/ a lot of/a fewrice 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson , radio Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: -Form: oral Answer: C3-166 4.

(456) Question: Read again C3 c. Introduce T: gets ss play game the “Jumble words” Ss: play game T: the remark & the winner. 2.Practice: T:ask ss look at the pictures A1166 & repeat the quanlities & structure with “ how many/ how much” T: explain the uses of “ a few/ a little/ a lot of/ lots of”. T: gets ss read A1-166 Ss: read in choral & single T: correct mistakes 3.Practice: T: open the radio 3->4 times pert A3-167 & write the letter of the picture under the right heading Ss:write 7 answer T: correct mistakes T: gets ss to practise the structure using picture drill (A1,3) Ss: practise T: correct mistakes 4.Production: T; gets ss play game the chain “What’s for dinner” 4. Play game 1.Toespota->potatoes 2.gegs -> eggs 3.icer ->rice 4.weryflos -> flowers 5.motatoes -> tomatoes 6.nonios -> onions 1. Grammar “How much” dùng cho dtừ không đếm được “How many” dùng cho dtừ đếm được “a little”có nghĩa “1 chút” dùng cho dtừ không đếm được( luôn luôn có hình thức số ít ) “a lot of” có nghĩa như “much/ many” dùng cho dtừ không đếm được & dtừ đếm được trong câu (+) “a few” có nghĩa” 1 vài dùng cho dtừ đếm được (số nhiều) 2.Write the letter ofthe picture under the right heading a. a lot of b. some c.a lot of d.a few e. a little f. some. Play game S1: There’s a little rice S2: There’s a little rice & a few.........

(457) Ss: play T: the remark & the winner 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure - Do exercise 1 -132 - prepare next lesson “unit 16 A2” Planning date Period 98. Teaching date unit 16 : man and the environment Lesson 2 : a (2). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to read a text about farming & gets futher practice in “ alot of/ a few/ a little” II.Language contents 1.Structure - How much/ many ..............? 2.Vocabulary - a buffalo(n) con trâu - animals(n) động vật - a cow (n) con bò cái - product(v) sản xuất - grow (v) trồng - plow (v) cày - pull a cart (v)kéo xe bò III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check -Form: Play game Question: A dozen 2 1/ 2 a c. Introduce eggs potatoes glass of T: gets ss play game the meat “noughts & croses” 1/ 2 kilo 100g 4 kilos Ss: play game onions rice vegetable T: the remark & the winner 1kilo 2 2 flowers fruit tomatoes 4.

(458) Ex:S1: There’re a lot of eggs S2: there’re a few patotoes 1.Vocabulary - a buffalo(n) con trâu 2.Pre-reading - animals(n) động vật T: ask ss look at picture-166 & - a cow (n) con bò cái introduce the situation of the text - product(v) sản xuất & introduce newwords - grow (v) trồng Ss: read in choral & single - plow (v) cày - pull a cart (v)kéo xe bò Play game T: gets ss read all the newwordss Rice a cow again & play the game “networds” Grow animal Ss: play T; the remark & the winner vegetable On the farm Milk fields Produce. paddy fields. plow. Eggs vegetable pull a cart 2.Answer the questions A.He produces a lot of rice b. Yes,he does c.He produces a little fruit d.They produces a little milk e.They produces a lot of eggs. 3.While-reading T:gets ss to guess 5 things Mr Hai has on his farm Ss: guess & answer T:read the text 1 time Ss: read in choral & single T: ask ss answer the questions Ss: answer 3.Practice: T: correct mistakes Mr Hai / 4.Post-reading Produces T: gives out the table & gets ss to Have complete ( ) then ss practise grows flowing the example exchanges 4. a some A A lot few little of.

(459)  paddy fields  rice  vegetables  Fruit trees  Fruit  Buffalo  Cow  Chickens . .. Ex: S1: How much paddy fields does Mr Hai have ? S2: (some) S1:........ 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary & read again text - Do exercise 2 -132 - prepare next lesson “unit 16 A4,5 ” Planning date Period 99. Teaching date unit 16: man and the environment Lesson 3: a (4,5). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to read a text about the environment to understand ideas in terms of & cause & effect “ Why....?Because.....” & talk about invronmental issues II.Language contents 1.Structure - Why +...............? - Because.............. 2.Vocabulary - land(n) đất, đất đai - cut down(v) đốn, hạ( cây) - plants(n) cây cối - burn(v) đốt - destroy(v)phá huỷ - to be indanger(n) gặp nguy hiểm III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare 4.

(460) IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: -Form: oral Question: Write again vocabulary. c. Introduce T: gets ss play game the “matching game” Ss: play game T: the remark & the winner. 2.Pre-reading T; introduce the topic of the leson & newords Ss: write 7 read T: correct mistakes. T: gets ss play game “slap the board” with newwords Ss: play T: correct mistakes T: introduce the structure in the lesson question with “Why...” answer with “ Because” 4. Writing. Answer: - a buffalo(n) con trâu - animals(n) động vật - a cow (n) con bò cái - product(v) sản xuất - grow (v) trồng - plow (v) cày - pull a cart (v)kéo xe bò Play game population rừng trồng forests the world cánh đồng dân số farmer (to) grow nông dân con vật Fields food thức ăn thế giới animals 1.Vocabulary - land(n) đất, đất đai - cut down(v) đốn, hạ( cây) - plants(n) cây cối - burn(v) đốt - destroy(v)phá huỷ - to be indanger(n) gặp nguy hiểm Play game.

(461) 3.While-reading T: read the text 1 time & gets ss Why +do/does + S + V read + .........? Ss: read in single Because + ............... T: ask ss answer the questions 2.Answer the questions Ss: answer a. Because there are more T: correct mistakes people 4.Post-reading b. Because they need more T: ask ss using the picture cues & fields retell the text in their own words c.Because people are Ss: retell destroying their home & their T: correct mistakes environment T: introduce the names of the animal in A4 Ss: write 5. Homework : - Learn by heart structure & vocabulary - Do exercise 2,3 -133 - prepare next lesson “unit 16 B1,2” Planning date Teaching date Period 100. unit 16 : man and the environment Lesson 4: b(1,2). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to read a text about population for vocabulary & understand ideas II.Language contents 1.Structure 2.Vocabulary - environment(n)môi trường - waste(v) lãng phí - gas(n)hơi, khí đốt - wild(adj) hoang dã - pollute(v)làm ô nhiễm - oil(n)dầu(tự nhiên) - trash(n) rác rưởi - coal(n)than đá, củi III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 4.

(462) 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: -Form: oral Question: Write again vocabulary. c. Introduce T: gets ss play game the “slap the board” Ss: play game T: the remark & the winner 2.Presentation T: ask ss look at the picture then introduce the topic of the lesson “pollution” & introduce newwords Ss: read & write T: correct mistakes. T: gets ss play “Rubout & remember” Ss: play game T: the remark & the winner 3.Practice: T: read a text 1 time Ss: read in choral & single T: ask ss answer the questions Ss: answer T: correct mistakes. Answer: - land(n) đất, đất đai - cut down(v) đốn, hạ( cây) - plants(n) cây cối - burn(v) đốt - destroy(v)phá huỷ - to be indanger(n) gặp nguy hiểm Play game cây con vật phá huỷ đốt cháy xuất. đất đai. mối nguy hiểm cây. đốn ,hạ. 1. Vocabulary - environment(n)môi trường - waste(v) lãng phí - gas(n)hơi, khí đốt - wild(adj) hoang dã - pollute(v)làm ô nhiễm - oil(n)dầu(tự nhiên) - trash(n) rác rưởi - coal(n)than đá, củi. 2.Answer the questions a.Because people are destroying the forest 4. sản.

(463) b.Gases are polluting the air c.The pollution come from gases & trash d.Trash is polluting the land, the rivers, the oceans. 4.Production T:gets ss dicuss & answer the question “How to save our world” Ss: dicuss & answer T: correct mistakes T: gets ss read B2-170 & match the ruler with these signs 3.Match the rulers with these Ss: match & answer signs T: correct mistakes a. -> picture (C) b. -> picture (f) c. -> picture (a) d. -> picture (h) e. -> picture (e) f. -> picture (b) g. -> picture (g) h. -> picture (d) 5. Homework : - Learn by heart read again a text & vocabulary - Do exercise 1,2-134 - prepare next lesson “unit 16 B 3,4,5,6” Planning date Period 101. Teaching date unit 16 : man and the environment Lesson 5: b(,3,4,5,6,). I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to read a text about enviromental issues, protect the enviroment by giving advice with should/ sould’t.& have more knowledge about environment & protect environment II.Language contents 1.Structure - don’t throw trash on the street / we should save water/ we shouldn’t 2.Vocabulary - pick(v)hái(hoa) - plastic(n) nhựa dẻo - scrap metal(n)sắt thép, phế thải - trash can(n) thùng rác 4.

(464) - collect(v)thu nhặt. - recycle(v) tái sử. - save(v) tiết kiệm - feed(v) thức ăn. - feed(v)thức ăn - damage (v) phá. dụng hoại III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: Answer: -Form: oral - environment(n)môi trường Question: Write again vocabulary - waste(v) lãng phí - gas(n)hơi, khí đốt - wild(adj) hoang dã - pollute(v)làm ô nhiễm - oil(n)dầu(tự nhiên) - trash(n) rác rưởi - coal(n)than đá, củi c. Introduce Play game T: gets ss play game the “nought plants water the air & crosses” power wild the Ss: play game animal oceans T: the remark & the winner forests coal trash Ex: S1: Don’t (destroy plants) S2:................. 1.Read 2.Presentation Ex: We should save water T: introduces the situation in the We shouldn’t leave our lesson throgh the dialogue b4 trash Ss: write T: gets ss practise reading B4-171 Ss: read in choral & single T: correct mistakes 3.Practice: 2.Practice: T:gets ss practise structure using Ex:S1: We shouldn’t damage 4.

(465) the picture partB5 Ss: practise T:correct mistakes. trees S2: That’s right S1: We should save water S2: That’s right............. T:introduce the situation of the text & teaches the newwords Ss: read & write. 3.Vocabulary - pick(v)hái(hoa) - plastic(n) nhựa dẻo - scrap metal(n)sắt thép, phế thải - trash can(n) thùng rác - collect(v)thu nhặt - recycle(v) tái sử dụng - save(v) tiết kiệm - feed(v)thức ăn - feed(v) thức ăn - damage (v) phá hoại 4.Answer the questions a.We collect & recycle many the waste food, empty bottle & collect waste paper, scrap metal & old plastic b.We collect waste food & feed it to pigs c.They recycle them. T: gets ss read the text B6-172 Ss:read T;ask ss answer the questions Ss: answer T:correct mistakes. 4.Production T;ask ss dicuss the questions (d,e) Ss: discuss & answer T: correct mistakes 5. Homework : - Learn by heart read again B4,6 & vocabulary - Do exercise 3,4-135 - prepare next lesson “grammar practice” Planning date. Teaching date. Period 102 grammar practice I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to practice more fluentlyin present simple tense, present progressive tense,comparisions & indefinite quantifiers II.Language contents 4.

(466) 1.Structure. - present simple tense ( countries & languages) - present progressive tense - comparisions of adj - indefinite quantifiers ( a few, a little, a lot/ lots) 2.Vocabulary - private(adj) riêng - result(n) kết quả III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce 1.Present simple tense T: introduce new lesson S+ V(es, s)......... 2.Language focus: T:ask ss repeat structure & using Play game of present simple tense Ss: repeat Chinese T: gets ss play game “networks” with the topic “ countries & china languages” Ss: play countries & languages T: the remark & the winner T: ask ss to do exercise 1-174 Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes Exercise 1-174 a.do/speak/ don’t/speak b.speaks c.speaks chinese d.she speaks Japanese e. speaks Vnese f. speaks E 2. Present simple tense & present progressive tense T:ask ss repeat structure & using S+ be + Ving of present simple tense & present 4.

(467) progressive tense Ss: repeat T: correct mistakes T: ask ss to do exercise 1-174 Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes. Exercise 2-174 a. is b. lives c. is/ is staying d. is e. does/ teaches f. does/ teach / doesn’t/teaches 3. Adjectives * So sánh hơn với tính từ ngắn S1 + be + adj + er + than + S2 * So sánh hơn với tính từ dài S + be + the + adj + est + N Exercise 3-175 - short -> shorter ->shortest - tall -> taller ->tallest - small -> smaller ->smallest - big -> bigger->beggest - high -> higher ->highest - thick -> thicker ->thickest a. longer / tthe longest b. the longest c. the biggest/ taller/ the tallest d. the biggest / bigger/ the biggest/ the biggest. T:ask ss repeat structure comparisions of adj Ss: repeat T: correct mistakes T: ask ss to do exercise 1-174 Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes. 4. Indefinite quantifiers 3.Production T: ask ss repeat using & the meaning of “a few, a little, a lot/ lots” Ss: repeat T: correct mistakes T: ask ss to do exercise 4-175 Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes. Exercise 4-175 A lot /alittle /a few / alot /lots / alot. 4. Homework : - Review all exercise in book - Do exercise test yourself - prepare next lesson “review” Planning date. Teaching date 4.

(468) Period 103 review I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to the knowledgein the second term to prepare for the text lesson II.Language contents 1.Structure - future / weather & activities 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures Teacher ‘s & student’s activies Writing 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce 1. Future T: introduce new lesson S + be + going to + V..... 2.New lesson: T: ask ss repeat structure & using of “ future” Ss: repeat T: correct mistakes T: gets ss to read book the dialogue Unit 14 (A) Ss: read book T: gets ss to talk about their plan in the summer 2. Weather & activities Ss: talk 1. sping – warm T: correct mistakes 2. summer – hot 3.Production 3. fall – cool T: gets ss to do exercise 4. winter – cold Ss: to do & answer * Talk about the activities T: correct mistakes 3. Exercise 4.

(469) 1. What do you do when it is cold ? - When it is cold I watch TV 2. How often do you do morning exercises in winter ? - I sometimes do morning exercise in winter 3. Do you run in sumer ? How often ? - Yes, I do . I run 3 times a week 4. What are you going to do this summer vacation ? - I’m going to visit Hn 5. Who are you going with / - I’m going with my friends 6. where are you going to stay / - I’m going to stay with in the hotel 7. What are you going to do there ? - I’m going to visit the zoo 4. Homework : -Learn by heart using & structure - Review all exercise - prepare next lesson “review” Planning date. Teaching date. Period 104 review I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to the knowledgein the second term to prepare for the text lesson II.Language contents 1.Structure 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching procedures 4.

(470) Teacher ‘s & student’s activies 1. Warm up a. Organization: Who’s absent today? b.Check the old lesson: don’t check c. Introduce T: introduce new lesson 2.New lesson: T: guide ss to do & call ss to do Ss: to do & answer T: correct mistakes 1. b 2. a 3.a 4. c 5.c 6. b. T: guide ss to do & call ss to do Ss: to do & answer & explain T: correct mistakes 1.goes 2. is 3. are playing 4. jog. T: guide ss to do & call ss to do 4. Writing. Câu1:Chọn từ đúng nhất để hoàn chỉnh câu(1,5 point) 1.HN is............. than HCM city a.smallest b.smaller c.small 2.I..........my grandmother on the weekend a. am going to visit b.visit c. am visiting 3...........go camping a. Let’s b. What about c. Why don’t 4.How.......... rice do you want a.long b.many c. much 5.I’m thirsty.I’d like..........water a.any b.a c.some 6.They are going to stay there.......a week a.in b.for c.on Câu2: Cho dạng đúng của đtừ trong ngoặc (2point) 1.Ba often (go)..................to the movies on Sundays 2. She (be).............going to travel to Hue tomorrow 3. They(play).............volleybal at the moment 4. We usually(jog)............in the morning Câu3:Chuyển câu khẳng định.

(471) Ss: to do & answer & explain T: correct mistakes. 3. Production T: guide ss to do & ask ss read & translation & call ss to do Ss: to do & answer & explain T: correct mistakes. 4. sang câu phủ định (2point) 1.You can play video game => You can’t play video game 2. I’m a teacher => I’m not a teacher 3. My sister has long hair => My sister has’t long hair 4. We like play soccer => We don’t like play soccer Câu4: Đọc đoạn văn rồi đánh dấu (T) vào câu đúng & (F) vào câu sai với nội dung đoạn văn (4,5point) Miss Lien lives in a small house in HN. She teactes E at a school there . She usually has breakfast at seven in the morning & She usually has breakfast at seven in the cateen of the school. She teaches her students in the morning. She teaches them dialogues on Wednesdays & Fridays . She sometimes goes to the movies theater . She always goes to bed at ten o’clock. She usually listens to mucsic in the evening. T F 1. Miss Lien lives in a big house in HN (F) 2. Miss Lien teactes E (T) 3. She usually has breakfast at seven- thirsty (F) 4. She usually has breakfast at seven in the cateen (T).

(472) 5. She teaches E in the afternoon (F) 6. She teaches her students dialogues on Wednesdays (T) 7. She sometimes goes to the movies theater (T) 8. She always goes to bed at nine o’clock (F) 9. She usually goes out in the evening. (F) 4. Homework : -Learn by heart using & structure - Review all exercise - prepare next lesson “Check for the 2nd term” Planning date. Teaching date. Period 105 Check for the 2nd term I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss to be able to the knowledgein the second term to prepare for the text lesson II.Language contents 1.Structure 2.Vocabulary III. Teaching aids T: Student’s & work books, plan lesson Ss:Student’s &work books, prepare IV. Teaching methods: - Writing V. Teaching procedures 1. Warm up : Who’s absent today? 2. Questions Câu 1:Chọn từ đúng nhất để hoàn chỉnh câu 1.What about......................to Hue ? a. go b. to go c. going 2. .....................don’t we go to Hue ? a.why b. how c.where 3. ..........................are you going to stay there ? a.how long b. how much c.how many 4. I’m going to stay there ...........................a week 4.

(473) a.in b.for c. on 5. ..............................go camping. a. let’s b. what about c. why don’t 6. I’m thirsty . I’d like.......................water a.any b. some c. a Câu 2: Chọn từ đúng điền vào chỗ trống để hoàn chỉnh bài hội thoại a would thirsty feel hungry noodles some like Nam:How do you fell (1).................................? Lan:I’m hot and I am (2)................... Nam:What (3) ................................you like ? Lan:I’d (4).............................orange juice. What about you ? Nam:I am(5)........................I want (6) ................noodles. What about you,Lan? Would you like some (7) ..............................? Lan: No, thanks .I’m thirty . I’d like (8)....................drink. Câu3: Cho dạng đúng của đtừ trong ngoặc 1. Nam often (go)..............................to the moviess on Sundays. 2. I (travel)................................to Nha trang tomorrow. 3. They (play).......................soccer at the moment. 4. He usually (jog)........................in the morning. 5. I (go)................................to Ha noi next month. Câu4: Đọc đoạn văn sau Và trả lời câu hỏi Minh is a student. He is going to have a summer holiday. He likes reading. He is going to buy a lot of books. But he doesn’t have much mony. He is going to ask for money from his parents. How much is he going to ask for ? MayVN $ 30.000 Questions: 1. What is Minh going to have ? -..................................................................... 2. What does he like ? - ..................................................................................... 3. What is he going to do ? - .............................................................................. 4. Does he have much money ? - ......................................................................... 5. How much is he going to ask for ? - ................................................................. 3. Key & point 4.

(474) Câu 1:( 3points) 1.c 2.a 3.a 4.b 5.a 6.b Câu 2:(2 points) 1. fell 2. thirsty 3. would 4. like 5. hungry 6. some 7. noodles 8. a Câu 3: (2,5 points) 1. goes 2. am going to travel 3. are playing Câu 4: ( 2,5 points) 1. He is going to have a summer holiday 2. He likes reading 3. He is going to buy a lot of books 4. No. he doesn’t 5. He is going to ask for VN $ 30.000 4. Phần trả bài G: KH: TB: Y: Ưu: Nhược:. 4. 4. jogs.

(475)

GIAO AN TIENG ANH 6QUANG HUYUNG HOA HA TAY

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về